Pipesim: User Guide

PIPESIM
Version 2017.2
User Guide
PIPESIM User Guide
Copyright © 2017 Schlumberger. All rights reserved.
This work contains the confidential and proprietary trade secrets of Schlumberger and may not be
copied or stored in an information retrieval system, transferred, used, distributed, translated or
retransmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, in whole or in part, without
the express written permission of the copyright owner.
Trademarks & Service Marks
Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used to identify the
products and services described herein are either trademarks, trade names or service marks of
Schlumberger and its licensors, or are the property of their respective owners. These marks may
not be copied, imitated or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. In addition, covers, page headers, custom graphics, icons, and other design
elements may be service marks, trademarks, and/or trade dress of Schlumberger, and may not be
copied, imitated, or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. Other company, product, and service names are the properties of their respective
owners.
PIPESIM® is a mark of Schlumberger.
An asterisk (*) is used throughout this document to designate a mark of Schlumberger.
Security Notice
The software described herein is configured to operate with at least the minimum specifications set
out by Schlumberger. You are advised that such minimum specifications are merely
recommendations and not intended to be limiting to configurations that may be used to operate the
software. Similarly, you are advised that the software should be operated in a secure environment
whether such software is operated across a network, on a single system and/or on a plurality of
systems. It is up to you to configure and maintain your networks and/or system(s) in a secure
manner. If you have further questions as to recommendations regarding recommended
specifications or security, please feel free to contact your local Schlumberger representative.
PIPESIM User Guide
Table of Contents
1 Navigate the interface ..............................................................................................................1
1.1 Workspace tab options .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Workspace types ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Network-centric workspace ............................................................................................................ 4
1.2.2 Well-centric workspace ................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Workspace options ..................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Units ................................................................................................................................................... 7
Select a standard unit system .................................................................................................... 7
Create a custom unit system ...................................................................................................... 7
Import or export a custom unit system ...................................................................................... 8
1.3.2 Plugins ............................................................................................................................................... 8
User defined flow correlations .................................................................................................... 8
User defined equipment .............................................................................................................. 8
User profile calculations ............................................................................................................ 11
1.3.3 Advanced options............................................................................................................................. 8
1.3.4 Catalog ............................................................................................................................................ 13
1.3.5 GIS map options............................................................................................................................. 13
1.4 Tour of the ribbon ...................................................................................................................................... 15
1.5 Change the main window layout ............................................................................................................ 16
1.6 Manage floating panes ............................................................................................................................. 16
1.6.1 Inputs pane ..................................................................................................................................... 18
1.6.2 Tasks pane...................................................................................................................................... 18
1.6.3 Information area overview ............................................................................................................ 19
Message center pane ................................................................................................................ 19
Validation pane ........................................................................................................................... 20
1.7 Manage the catalogs ................................................................................................................................. 21
1.7.1 Manage the centrifugal compressor catalog .............................................................................. 22
Add centrifugal compressors to the catalog ........................................................................... 22
1.7.2 Manage the reciprocating compressor catalog.......................................................................... 22
Add reciprocating compressors to the catalog ...................................................................... 22
1.7.3 Manage the pump catalog ............................................................................................................ 22
Add items to the pump catalog................................................................................................. 25
1.7.4 Manage the gas lift valve catalog ................................................................................................ 27
Add gas lift valves to the catalog ............................................................................................. 27
1.7.5 Manage the ESP catalog .............................................................................................................. 28
Add ESP pumps to the catalog ................................................................................................ 29
1.7.6 Manage the PCP catalog .............................................................................................................. 30
Add items to the PCP catalog .................................................................................................. 30
i
PIPESIM User Guide
1.7.7 Manage the fluid templates catalog............................................................................................. 31
View a built-in fluid template ..................................................................................................... 32
Create a custom fluid template ................................................................................................ 32
View or edit a custom fluid template........................................................................................ 33
1.7.8 Manage the well templates catalog ............................................................................................. 33
View a built-in well template ..................................................................................................... 33
Create a custom well template ................................................................................................. 34
View or edit a custom well template ........................................................................................ 34
1.7.9 Manage the survey data catalog .................................................................................................. 34
Add a survey to the survey data catalog ................................................................................ 29
1.7.10 Catalog properties tables .............................................................................................................. 40
Casing catalog properties ......................................................................................................... 40
Tubing catalog properties ......................................................................................................... 42
Flowline/riser catalog properties .............................................................................................. 43
Centrifugal compressor catalog properties ............................................................................ 44
Reciprocate compressor catalog properties .......................................................................... 45
Pump catalog properties ........................................................................................................... 46
Gas lift valve catalog properties ............................................................................................... 46
ESP catalog properties ............................................................................................................. 47
PCP catalog properties ............................................................................................................. 48
Survey data catalog properties ................................................................................................ 48
Gun system properties .............................................................................................................. 50
2 Build physical models .......................................................................................................... 52

2.1 Create or edit a well model ...................................................................................................................... 53
2.1.1 Add tubular data ............................................................................................................................. 55
Add casing and tubing to a simple wellbore schematic ........................................................ 55
Add casing and tubing to a detailed wellbore schematic ..................................................... 57
2.1.2 Add a deviation survey .................................................................................................................. 61
Azimuth ........................................................................................................................................ 63
Measured depth and true vertical depth ................................................................................. 63
2.1.3 Add downhole equipment ............................................................................................................. 64
Choke properties ........................................................................................................................ 65
Packer .......................................................................................................................................... 68
Separator (downhole) ................................................................................................................ 68
Sliding sleeve.............................................................................................................................. 69
Sub-surface safety valve ........................................................................................................... 70
Tubing plug ................................................................................................................................. 70
2.1.4 Add artificial lift ............................................................................................................................... 73

Add a gas lift injection port........................................................................................................ 74
Add a gas lift injection valve ..................................................................................................... 76
Add an ESP................................................................................................................................. 82
Add a progressive cavity pump (PCP) .................................................................................... 84
ii
PIPESIM User Guide
Add a rod pump .......................................................................................................................... 87
2.1.5 Add heat transfer data ................................................................................................................... 91
Measured depth and true vertical depth ................................................................................. 63
2.1.6 Add completions ............................................................................................................................. 93
IPR options and applicability table ........................................................................................... 95
Multilayer completions ............................................................................................................. 146
Associate zones with completions ......................................................................................... 149
2.1.7 Add surface equipment using the well editor ........................................................................... 150
2.1.8 Work with well tabs and ribbons ................................................................................................ 152
2.1.9 Interactive wellbore schematic ................................................................................................... 152
2.2 Create or edit a network model ............................................................................................................ 155
2.2.1 Navigate in the network diagram ............................................................................................... 156
Pan and zoom in the network diagram ................................................................................. 156
Bring objects into view ............................................................................................................. 157
Change the model display properties.................................................................................... 157
Print the model from the network diagram ........................................................................... 158
2.2.2 Add wells ....................................................................................................................................... 158
2.2.3 Add sources and sinks ................................................................................................................ 160
Sink properties .......................................................................................................................... 160
iii
PIPESIM User Guide
2.2.4 Add surface equipment using the network diagram ................................................................ 161
Choke properties ........................................................................................................................ 65
Check valves............................................................................................................................... 65
Compressor properties ............................................................................................................ 165
Expander properties ................................................................................................................ 167
Flowline - simple model properties ........................................................................................ 168
Flowline - detailed model properties - general tab .............................................................. 171
Flowline - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab ..................................................... 174
Pipeline comparison: land, subsea, and riser ...................................................................... 176
Generic equipment properties ................................................................................................ 177
Generic pump properties ........................................................................................................ 178
Heat exchanger properties ..................................................................................................... 180
Injection point properties ......................................................................................................... 181
Generic multiphase booster .................................................................................................... 183
OneSubsea multiphase booster............................................................................................. 188
OneSubsea wet gas compressor........................................................................................... 197
Multiplier/adder properties ...................................................................................................... 207
Riser - simple model properties ............................................................................................. 207
Riser - detailed model properties - general tab ................................................................... 210
Riser - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab .......................................................... 212
Three phase separator ............................................................................................................ 214
Two phase separator ............................................................................................................... 215
Source and junctions treated as source properties ............................................................. 217
Configure wellstream outlet or inlet conditions .................................................................... 220
View surface equipment properties ....................................................................................... 223
Engine Keyword Tool ................................................................................................................ 72
2.2.5 Create a network model from a GIS shapefile automatically ................................................... 53
2.2.6 Add connections ........................................................................................................................... 226
3 Create or edit fluid models ................................................................................................ 228

3.1 Define black oil fluids ............................................................................................................................. 229
3.1.1 Properties tab ............................................................................................................................... 146
3.1.2 Viscosity properties ...................................................................................................................... 232
3.1.3 Calibration properties .................................................................................................................. 236
3.1.4 Thermal properties ....................................................................................................................... 237
3.2 Define compositional fluids .................................................................................................................. 238
3.2.1 Viscosity properties ...................................................................................................................... 232
3.2.2 Salinity models ............................................................................................................................. 232
3.2.3 Binary interaction parameter (BIP) sets ...................................................................................... 99
3.2.4 E300 thermal coefficients............................................................................................................ 245
3.3 Multiflash in the compositional fluid mode (native) vs. Multiflash MFL files ........................... 228
3.4 Ensure consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network model.......................... 246
3.5 Create/define a new MFL fluid .............................................................................................................. 238
3.5.1 Import existing MFL fluid files ..................................................................................................... 238
iv
PIPESIM User Guide
3.5.2 View wax or asphaltene curves on phase envelopes ............................................................... 99

3.5.3 Edit a MFL fluid file ...................................................................................................................... 238
3.5.4 Availability of Multiflash models in PIPESIM using the MFL file fluid mode option ............ 246
3.5.5 Multiflash phases supported in PIPESIM ................................................................................. 246
3.6 Display phase envelopes for compositional fluid or mfl file ........................................................ 260
3.7 Override fluid phase ratios .................................................................................................................... 263
3.8 Import a PVT file ....................................................................................................................................... 264
3.9 Convert black oil models into compositional models using Multiflash for PIPESIM ............. 265
4 Run simulations ................................................................................................................... 271

4.1 Configure simulation settings .............................................................................................................. 271
4.1.1 Flow correlation properties ......................................................................................................... 272
4.1.2 Heat transfer properties............................................................................................................... 275
4.1.3 Erosion/corrosion properties ...................................................................................................... 275
4.1.4 Environmental properties ............................................................................................................ 277
4.1.5 Output variables properties ........................................................................................................ 278
Manage output variable report templates ............................................................................. 279
4.1.6 Advanced properties ........................................................................................................................ 8
4.1.7 Override the default value in specific rows ............................................................................... 285
4.1.8 Enter sensitivity ranges ............................................................................................................... 286
4.2 Run a network simulation ...................................................................................................................... 286
4.2.1 Boundary conditions .................................................................................................................... 288
4.2.2 Rate constraints ........................................................................................................................... 288
4.2.3 Node/branch results tab properties - network simulation ....................................................... 291
4.2.4 Profile results tab properties - network simulation................................................................... 293
4.2.5 Improve network simulation performance................................................................................. 293
Restart simulation .................................................................................................................... 299
PIPESIM differences from other simulators ......................................................................... 300
Reversing the changes made to PIPESIM models to optimize their simulation
performance .............................................................................................................................. 301
4.3 Run a P/T profile....................................................................................................................................... 302
4.3.1 System results tab properties ..................................................................................................... 302
4.3.2 P/T profile parameters tab .......................................................................................................... 303
4.3.3 Auxiliary results tab ...................................................................................................................... 302
OneSubsea booster performance plot .................................................................................. 307
OneSubsea operating point row details ................................................................................ 308
4.4 Run a nodal analysis ............................................................................................................................... 309
4.4.1 Nodal analysis properties ............................................................................................................ 311
4.4.2 Add a nodal point ......................................................................................................................... 313
4.4.3 Nodal analysis results tab properties ........................................................................................ 315
4.4.4 System results tab properties ..................................................................................................... 302
4.5 Run a system analysis ............................................................................................................................ 318
4.5.1 System analysis properties ......................................................................................................... 319
v
PIPESIM User Guide
4.5.2 System results tab properties - system analysis ..................................................................... 322

4.5.3 Profile results tab properties - system analysis ....................................................................... 302
4.6 Create a VFP table ................................................................................................................................... 324
4.6.1 VFP table properties .................................................................................................................... 325
4.6.2 Save a VFP table to a file ........................................................................................................... 327
4.7 Run model calibration ............................................................................................................................ 328
4.7.1 Run data comparison .................................................................................................................. 328
4.7.2 Run data matching ....................................................................................................................... 329
Data matching properties ........................................................................................................ 337
4.8 Design an ESP .......................................................................................................................................... 340
4.8.1 ESP design task parameters ...................................................................................................... 343
4.8.2 Tapered ESP design ..................................................................................................................... 93
4.9 Run gas lift tasks ..................................................................................................................................... 348
4.9.1 Run deepest injection point ........................................................................................................ 349
DIP results tab properties ....................................................................................................... 352
4.9.2 Run gas lift response ................................................................................................................... 353
Gas lift response results tab properties ................................................................................ 355
4.9.3 Run gas lift design ....................................................................................................................... 357
Design results tab properties .................................................................................................. 352
Gas lift redesign ....................................................................................................................... 370
4.9.4 Run gas lift diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 373
System results tab properties ................................................................................................. 302
Profile results tab properties ................................................................................................... 302
Diagnostics results tab properties .......................................................................................... 352
4.10 Run a perforation design ......................................................................................................................... 39
4.10.1 Run a perforation design to generate penetration results (Penetration workflow) .............. 384
4.10.2 Run a perforation design to generate productivity results (Productivity workflow) ............. 397
4.10.3 Rock data ...................................................................................................................................... 414
Sandstone table ....................................................................................................................... 415
Limestone table ........................................................................................................................ 415
Dolomite table ........................................................................................................................... 415
4.10.4 Perforating gun systems ............................................................................................................. 419
4.10.5 Results ........................................................................................................................................... 424
Install a new completion .......................................................................................................... 427
Update an existing completion ............................................................................................... 431
4.10.6 Report ............................................................................................................................................ 434
Perforation design results ....................................................................................................... 435
Productivity results ................................................................................................................... 439
Perforating system results ...................................................................................................... 444
4.10.7 Update gun catalog ...................................................................................................................... 449
4.11 Manage results ......................................................................................................................................... 450
vi
PIPESIM User Guide
4.11.1 Launch the results viewer ........................................................................................................... 451

4.12 Ill-conditioned simulations .................................................................................................................... 452
4.13 Guidelines for Calibrating Well Models ............................................................................................. 453
5 Manage model data ............................................................................................................. 458

5.1 Manage flowlines and risers ................................................................................................................. 458
5.2 Manage fluids ............................................................................................................................................. 13
5.3 Manage zones ........................................................................................................................................... 460
6 Work with the GIS map ....................................................................................................... 462

6.1 Choose a basemap .................................................................................................................................. 462
6.2 Navigate the GIS map ............................................................................................................................. 463
6.2.1 Zoom to bookmarks ..................................................................................................................... 464
6.2.2 Pan and zoom to your map area ............................................................................................... 464
6.3 Work with layers ...................................................................................................................................... 464
6.3.1 GIS shapefile basics .................................................................................................................... 465
6.3.2 Use shapefiles .............................................................................................................................. 466
6.3.3 Use map services......................................................................................................................... 467
Network prerequisites .............................................................................................................. 467
Obtain WMS parameters ........................................................................................................ 469
6.4 Use the GIS map ...................................................................................................................................... 471
6.4.1 Create a new network model on the GIS map manually ........................................................ 471
6.4.2 Locate a previously built schematic network on the GIS map ............................................... 472
6.4.3 Move the entire network to a new map location ...................................................................... 472
6.4.4 Display object clusters ................................................................................................................. 473
6.4.5 ESRI, ASTER and SRTM elevation data sources ..................................................................... 52
6.4.6 Change the PIPESIM data source for GIS elevation data capture ......................................... 52
6.4.7 Capture elevations ....................................................................................................................... 477
6.4.8 View profile direction ................................................................................................................... 478
6.4.9 Edit equipment locations ............................................................................................................. 478
6.4.10 Create a network model from a GIS shapefile automatically ................................................... 53
6.4.11 Split a flowline ............................................................................................................................... 480
6.4.12 View network simulation results on the GIS map .................................................................... 480
7 Technical Description ......................................................................................................... 482

7.1 Flow models .............................................................................................................................................. 482
7.1.1 Flow regimes ................................................................................................................................ 482
Flow regimes classification for vertical two phase flow ...................................................... 482
Flow regimes classification for horizontal two phase flow.................................................. 483
vii
PIPESIM User Guide
7.1.2 Horizontal multiphase flow correlations .................................................................................... 486

Baker Jardine (BJA) correlation ............................................................................................. 487
Beggs and Brill original............................................................................................................ 487
Beggs and Brill revised............................................................................................................ 487
Dukler, (AGA) and Flanigan ................................................................................................... 487
Dukler, (AGA) and Flanigan (Eaton Holdup) ........................................................................ 487
Eaton-Oliemans ........................................................................................................................ 488
Hughmark-Dukler ..................................................................................................................... 488
LEDA .......................................................................................................................................... 488
Minami and Brill ........................................................................................................................ 489
Mukherjee and Brill .................................................................................................................. 489
NOSLIP correlation .................................................................................................................. 489
OLGAS 2-phase / OLGAS 2000 3-phase ............................................................................. 490
Oliemans ................................................................................................................................... 490
TUFFP unified mechanistic model (2-phase and 3-phase) ............................................... 490
Xiao ............................................................................................................................................ 491
Xiao (film modified) .................................................................................................................. 491
7.1.3 Vertical multiphase flow correlations ......................................................................................... 492
Ansari ......................................................................................................................................... 492
Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi ..................................................................................................... 492
Beggs and Brill original............................................................................................................ 493
Beggs and Brill revised............................................................................................................ 493
Duns and Ros ........................................................................................................................... 493
Gomez ....................................................................................................................................... 493
Gomez enhanced ..................................................................................................................... 493
Govier and Aziz ........................................................................................................................ 494
Gray ........................................................................................................................................... 494
Gray modified ........................................................................................................................... 494
Gregory ...................................................................................................................................... 494
Hagedorn and Brown ............................................................................................................... 495
Mukherjee and Brill .................................................................................................................. 496
NOSLIP correlation .................................................................................................................. 496
OLGAS 2-phase/OLGAS 3-phase ......................................................................................... 496
LEDA 2-phase/3-phase ........................................................................................................... 497
Orkiszewski ............................................................................................................................... 497
TUFFP unified mechanistic model (2-phase and 3-phase)................................................ 490
7.1.4 Suggested correlations ............................................................................................................... 498
7.1.5 Friction and holdup factors ......................................................................................................... 499
7.1.6 Single phase flow correlations ................................................................................................... 500
Moody (default for liquid or gas) ............................................................................................ 501
AGA (for gas) ............................................................................................................................ 502
Cullender and Smith (for gas) ................................................................................................ 502
Other friction pressure drops for gas ..................................................................................... 503
Hazen-Williams (for liquid water) ........................................................................................... 504
7.1.7 Swap angle ................................................................................................................................... 504
viii
PIPESIM User Guide
7.1.8 deWaard (1995) corrosion model .............................................................................................. 505

7.1.9 Cunliffe's method for ramp up surge ......................................................................................... 508
7.1.10 Liquid by sphere (Sphere Generated Liquid Volume, SGLV)................................................ 509
7.1.11 Liquid loading................................................................................................................................ 511
Critical unloading velocity ....................................................................................................... 511
Critical gas rate......................................................................................................................... 513
7.2 Completion (IPR) models ....................................................................................................................... 513
7.2.1 Inflow performance relationships for vertical completions ..................................................... 513
Productivity index (PI).............................................................................................................. 514
Vogel's equation ....................................................................................................................... 515
Fetkovich's equation ................................................................................................................ 516
Jones' equation ........................................................................................................................ 517
Forchheimer equation.............................................................................................................. 518
Back pressure equation .......................................................................................................... 518
Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Equation ................................................................ 519
Transient IPR ............................................................................................................................ 526
Data File .................................................................................................................................... 531
Bubble Point Correction .......................................................................................................... 532
Vertical Well Skin Factor ......................................................................................................... 533
7.2.2 Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions ............................................. 546
Theory ........................................................................................................................................ 546
Pressure drop ........................................................................................................................... 547
Inflow production profiles ........................................................................................................ 550
Steady-state productivity ......................................................................................................... 551
Pseudo-steady state productivity ........................................................................................... 554
Solution gas-drive IPR ............................................................................................................. 557
Horizontal gas wells ................................................................................................................. 557
Distributed productivity index method ................................................................................... 560
7.2.3 Oil / water relative permeability tables ...................................................................................... 560
7.2.4 Coning ........................................................................................................................................... 561
7.3 Equipment ................................................................................................................................................. 562
7.3.1 Chokes, valves and fittings ......................................................................................................... 562
Choke ......................................................................................................................................... 562
Choke subcritical flow correlations ........................................................................................ 565
Choke critical pressure ratio ................................................................................................... 568
Choke critical flow correlations............................................................................................... 569
Flow control valves mechanistic theory ................................................................................ 570
Fittings ....................................................................................................................................... 571
Sudden expansions or contractions due to adjacent pipes of differing diameters .......... 574
7.3.2 Compressors, pumps, and expanders ...................................................................................... 576
Centrifugal pumps and compressors .................................................................................... 576
Reciprocating compressor operation .................................................................................... 578
Expanders ................................................................................................................................. 580
7.3.3 Multiphase boosting technology ................................................................................................ 582
Guide to multiphase booster efficiencies .............................................................................. 596
ix
PIPESIM User Guide
7.3.4 Artificial lift ..................................................................................................................................... 597

Progressive cavity pump (PCP) ............................................................................................. 597
Electrical submersible pumps (ESP) ..................................................................................... 601
Gas lift ........................................................................................................................................ 605
7.4 Heat transfer models............................................................................................................................... 640
7.4.1 Energy equation for steady-state flow....................................................................................... 640
7.4.2 Overall heat transfer coefficient ................................................................................................. 641
7.4.3 Inside fluid film heat transfer coefficient ................................................................................... 644
Inside forced convection ......................................................................................................... 646
Inside natural/free convection ................................................................................................ 652
7.4.4 Conductive heat transfer coefficients ........................................................................................ 654
7.4.5 Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients .................................................... 655
7.4.6 Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface ................................... 657
Fully buried ground heat transfer coefficient ........................................................................ 657
Partially buried ground heat transfer coefficient .................................................................. 659
7.4.7 Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock ........................................... 661
Ramey model ............................................................................................................................ 661
7.5 Fluid Models .............................................................................................................................................. 663
7.5.1 Steam modelling........................................................................................................................... 664
Single branch steam ................................................................................................................ 664
Network model steam .............................................................................................................. 665
7.5.2 Black oil fluid modeling ................................................................................................................ 665
Black oil correlations ................................................................................................................ 667
Solution gas-oil ratio ................................................................................................................ 668
Oil formation volume factor ..................................................................................................... 673
Oil viscosity ............................................................................................................................... 675
Gas compressibility .................................................................................................................. 683
Gas viscosity ............................................................................................................................. 686
Surface tension......................................................................................................................... 686
Black oil enthalpy ..................................................................................................................... 687
Black oil mixing ......................................................................................................................... 689
7.5.3 Compositional fluid modeling ..................................................................................................... 696
Cubic equations of state .......................................................................................................... 697
Non-cubic equations of state .................................................................................................. 700
Components for cubic equations of state ............................................................................. 705
Components for non-cubic equations of state ..................................................................... 710
Viscosity models for compositional fluids ............................................................................. 675
Solid precipitation ..................................................................................................................... 713
7.5.4 Fluid property table files .............................................................................................................. 716
Internal fluid property tables ................................................................................................... 717
x
PIPESIM User Guide
7.5.5 Liquid mixture properties ............................................................................................................. 717

Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions ............................................................................... 717
Liquid-gas surface tension ...................................................................................................... 723
7.6 Stock tank and flowing conditions ...................................................................................................... 724
7.7 Typical and default data ......................................................................................................................... 725
7.7.1 Limits .............................................................................................................................................. 725
General ...................................................................................................................................... 725
Well Performance..................................................................................................................... 725
Network...................................................................................................................................... 725
7.7.2 Typical values ............................................................................................................................... 725
Fluid properties ......................................................................................................................... 725
Roughness ................................................................................................................................ 726
Thermal Conductivities ............................................................................................................ 727
Permeability .............................................................................................................................. 728
Drainage radius ........................................................................................................................ 729
Fittings ....................................................................................................................................... 729
7.8 Glossary ..................................................................................................................................................... 731
7.8.1 Roman Letters .............................................................................................................................. 731
7.8.2 Greek Letters ................................................................................................................................ 734
7.8.3 Subscripts...................................................................................................................................... 735
7.9 Conversion factors .................................................................................................................................. 736
7.9.1 Length ............................................................................................................................................ 736
7.9.2 Volume........................................................................................................................................... 736
7.9.3 Mass............................................................................................................................................... 736
7.9.4 Time ............................................................................................................................................... 737
7.9.5 Gravity ........................................................................................................................................... 737
7.9.6 Pressure ........................................................................................................................................ 737
7.9.7 Energy ........................................................................................................................................... 737
7.9.8 Power ............................................................................................................................................. 737
7.9.9 Dynamic viscosity......................................................................................................................... 737
7.9.10 Permeability .................................................................................................................................. 738
7.10 References................................................................................................................................................. 738
8 Keyword index ...................................................................................................................... 751

8.1 Keyword list .............................................................................................................................................. 751
8.1.1 A ..................................................................................................................................................... 751
8.1.2 B ..................................................................................................................................................... 751
8.1.3 C ..................................................................................................................................................... 752
8.1.4 D E ................................................................................................................................................. 752
8.1.5 F...................................................................................................................................................... 752
8.1.6 G ..................................................................................................................................................... 753
8.1.7 H ..................................................................................................................................................... 753
8.1.8 I ....................................................................................................................................................... 753
8.1.9 J ...................................................................................................................................................... 753
xi
PIPESIM User Guide
8.1.10 K ..................................................................................................................................................... 753

8.1.11 L ...................................................................................................................................................... 753
8.1.12 M ..................................................................................................................................................... 753
8.1.13 N ..................................................................................................................................................... 754
8.1.14 O ..................................................................................................................................................... 754
8.1.15 P ..................................................................................................................................................... 754
8.1.16 Q R ................................................................................................................................................. 754
8.1.17 S ..................................................................................................................................................... 754
8.1.18 T ...................................................................................................................................................... 755
8.1.19 U ..................................................................................................................................................... 755
8.1.20 V ..................................................................................................................................................... 755
8.1.21 W .................................................................................................................................................... 755
8.1.22 XYZ ................................................................................................................................................ 756
8.2 Input files and input data conventions............................................................................................... 756
8.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 756
8.2.2 Statements .................................................................................................................................... 756
8.2.3 Delimiters ...................................................................................................................................... 756
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 757
8.2.4 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................ 757
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 758
8.2.5 Numeric data ................................................................................................................................ 758
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 758
8.2.6 Units description ........................................................................................................................... 758
8.2.7 Character input ............................................................................................................................. 759
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 759
8.2.8 Comment statements and blank lines ....................................................................................... 759
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 759
8.2.9 Multiple value data sets............................................................................................................... 759
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 760
8.2.10 Input files ....................................................................................................................................... 761
General ...................................................................................................................................... 761
The main input ('.PSM' or '.PST') file ..................................................................................... 761
Included files and the INCLUDE statement .......................................................................... 761
AUTOEXEC.PSM..................................................................................................................... 762
modelname.U2P or branchname.U2P .................................................................................. 762
8.3 General data .............................................................................................................................................. 762
8.3.1 Change parameters within the system profile .......................................................................... 763
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 763
Multiple cases ........................................................................................................................... 763
8.3.2 HEADER - Job Accounting Header (Required) ....................................................................... 763
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 764
8.3.3 JOB - Job Title (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 764
8.3.4 CASE - Case Title (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 764
8.3.5 UNITS - Input and Output Units (Optional) .............................................................................. 764
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 765
xii
PIPESIM User Guide
8.3.6 OPTIONS Calculation Procedure Options (Optional) ............................................................. 765

8.3.7 RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data ...................................................................................................... 776
8.3.8 ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) ................................................................................................. 777
8.3.9 INLET System Inlet Data ............................................................................................................ 779
8.3.10 PRINT Output Printing Options (Optional) ............................................................................... 780
Per-case output page options ................................................................................................ 781
Attributes ................................................................................................................................... 783
Point report subcodes.............................................................................................................. 784
One-off output pages ............................................................................................................... 786
8.3.11 PLOT Output Plotting Options (Optional) ................................................................................. 787
8.3.12 NOPRINT Output Print Suppression Options (Optional)........................................................ 791
8.3.13 BEGIN , END - Block delimiters ................................................................................................. 791
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 792
8.3.14 PUSH - Remote Action Editing (optional) ................................................................................. 792
8.3.15 PLOTFILEDATA ........................................................................................................................... 794
8.3.16 EXECUTE - deferred execution of a statement ....................................................................... 794
8.4 FLOW CORRELATION DATA ................................................................................................................ 794
8.4.1 CORROSION ................................................................................................................................ 795
8.4.2 EROSION Erosion Rate and Velocity (Optional)..................................................................... 795
8.4.3 SLUG Slug Calculation Options (Optional) .............................................................................. 796
Slug catcher size ...................................................................................................................... 797
8.4.4 VCORR Vertical Flow Correlation Options ............................................................................... 798
Summary of valid vertical flow correlation combinations.................................................... 798
Vertical flow correlations - abbreviations .............................................................................. 799
8.4.5 HCORR Horizontal Flow Correlation Options .......................................................................... 801
Summary of valid horizontal flow correlation combinations ............................................... 802
Horizontal flow correlations - abbreviations .......................................................................... 799
8.4.6 SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (Optional) ..................................................................... 804
8.4.7 USERDLL - Flow Correlations ................................................................................................... 806
8.5 Well performance modeling .................................................................................................................. 806
8.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 807
8.5.2 COMPLETION Completion Profile Delimiter............................................................................ 808
Supercode ................................................................................................................................. 808
8.5.3 FCV : Flow control valve ............................................................................................................. 809
...................................................................................................................................... 811
8.5.4 WELLPI Well Productivity Index (Optional) .............................................................................. 811
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 811
8.5.5 VOGEL Vogel Equation (Optional) ............................................................................................ 812
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 812
8.5.6 FETKOVICH Fetkovich Equation (Optional) ............................................................................ 812
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 812
8.5.7 JONES Jones Equation (Optional) ............................................................................................ 813
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 813
8.5.8 IFPPSSE : Data for the Pseudo Steady State Equation (Optional) ...................................... 813
8.5.9 WCOPTION Well Completion Data (Optional) ........................................................................ 815
xiii
PIPESIM User Guide
8.5.10 IPRCRV or IFPCRV: Inflow Performance Curve ..................................................................... 819

Examples ................................................................................................................................... 820
8.5.11 BACKPRES Back Pressure Equation (BPE) (Optional)......................................................... 821
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 821
8.5.12 HORWELL Horizontal Well Inflow Performance ..................................................................... 821
8.5.13 LAYER Reservoir Layer Properties ........................................................................................... 823
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 825
8.5.14 PERMCRV: Curves of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional) ........................ 825
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 826
8.5.15 PERMTAB: Tabulation of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional) ................... 826
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 826
8.5.16 HVOGEL (Optional) ..................................................................................................................... 827
8.5.17 FORCHHEIMER (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 827
8.5.18 FRACTURE: Data for Hydraulic Fracture ................................................................................. 827
8.5.19 TRANSIENT: Data for the Transient Inflow equation (Optional) ........................................... 828
8.6 SYSTEM DATA.......................................................................................................................................... 829
8.6.1 CHOKE (Optional) ....................................................................................................................... 830
8.6.2 COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves ........................ 834
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 835
8.6.3 COMPRESSOR Compressor (Optional) .................................................................................. 836
8.6.4 RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump .............................................................................................. 837
8.6.5 EQUIPMENT Generic Equipment ............................................................................................. 562
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 840
8.6.6 EXPANDER Expander (Optional) .............................................................................................. 841
8.6.7 FITTING : Valves and Fittings .................................................................................................... 842
EXAMPLES ............................................................................................................................... 843
8.6.8 FMPUMP (Optional) .................................................................................................................... 843
8.6.9 FRAMO 2009 (Optional) ............................................................................................................. 843
EXAMPLE ................................................................................................................................. 844
8.6.10 HEATER Heater/Cooler (Optional) ............................................................................................ 844
8.6.11 GASLIFT: Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells .............................................................. 845
Main-code: GASLIFT ............................................................................................................... 846
8.6.12 INJPORT Gas Lift Injection Valve ............................................................................................. 848
8.6.13 INJGAS: Injection Gas (Optional) and INJFLUID: Fluid Injection ......................................... 851
8.6.14 MPBOOSTER (Optional) ............................................................................................................ 853
8.6.15 MPUMP Multiphase Pump (Optional) ....................................................................................... 854
8.6.16 NODE System Profile Data (Required) ..................................................................................... 856
8.6.17 OSSWGC (Optional): Wet Gas Compressor, OneSubSea ................................................... 857
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 858
8.6.18 PIPE: Pipe or Tubing cross-section dimensions (Required).................................................. 858
8.6.19 PUMP Pump (Optional) ............................................................................................................... 860
8.6.20 COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves ........................ 834
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 835
8.6.21 REINJECTOR (Optional) ............................................................................................................ 864
8.6.22 RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump .............................................................................................. 837
xiv
PIPESIM User Guide
8.6.23 SEPARATOR Separator (Optional)........................................................................................... 865

8.6.24 CHOKE (Optional) ....................................................................................................................... 830
8.6.25 WELLHEAD Wellhead Profile Delimiter ................................................................................... 871
8.7 HEAT TRANSFER DATA ........................................................................................................................ 871
8.7.1 Notes on Heat Transfer Output Printing ................................................................................... 871
8.7.2 HEAT Heat balance options (optional)...................................................................................... 871
Heat transfer mode .................................................................................................................. 874
8.7.3 COAT Pipe coat and annular space medium data (optional) ................................................ 874
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 875
8.7.4 TCOAT Pipe coat thickness data (optional) ............................................................................. 876
8.7.5 KCOAT Pipe coat thermal conductivity data (optional) .......................................................... 876
Files ............................................................................................................................................ 877
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 878
8.7.6 FLUID Fluid thermal conductivity data (optional) .................................................................... 879
8.7.7 CONFIG: Pipe Heat transfer configuration data (optional) .................................................... 879
8.7.8 Pipeline burial depth examples .................................................................................................. 881
8.8 Fluid models ............................................................................................................................................. 882
8.8.1 BLACK OIL DATA ........................................................................................................................ 882
BLACKOIL: Black Oil Fluid definitions .................................................................................. 882
PROP Fluid Property Data (Optional) ................................................................................... 884
LVIS: Liquid Viscosity Data (Optional) .................................................................................. 886
CPFLUID: Fluid Heat Capacity Data (Optional) .................................................................. 891
TPRINT Tabular fluid property tables ................................................................................... 891
CALIBRATE: Black Oil Property Calibration (Optional)...................................................... 892
CONTAMINANTS Gas phase contaminants data (optional) ............................................. 894
RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data .................................................................................................. 776
COMPOSITIONAL DATA ....................................................................................................... 895
AQUEOUS: Aqueous component specification ................................................................... 896
CEMULSION Compositional liquid emulsion data (optional) ............................................. 896
COMPOSITION: Compositional fluid specification ............................................................. 898
LIBRARY: Library component specification ......................................................................... 902
MODEL: Model properties specification ............................................................................... 903
PETROFRAC: Petroleum fraction specification .................................................................. 904
GFA: Generic fluid artifact ...................................................................................................... 905
8.8.2 MFL files ........................................................................................................................................ 905
PROCOPTIONS: Master MFL file for mixing (optional but recommended) .................... 905
8.9 PIPESIM OPERATIONS OPTIONS........................................................................................................ 906
8.9.1 NAPLOT: Nodal analysis ............................................................................................................ 906
8.9.2 NAPOINT system analysis point ................................................................................................ 910
8.9.3 MULTICASE introduction and summary................................................................................... 910
General rules for use with MULTICASE ............................................................................... 911
8.9.4 Explicit subcodes ......................................................................................................................... 912
8.9.5 General purpose subcodes ........................................................................................................ 914
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 914
8.9.6 Combine MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE ........................................................................ 915
xv
PIPESIM User Guide
8.9.7 Multiple case and PS-PLOT ....................................................................................................... 917

8.9.8 Reservoir simulator tabular data interface................................................................................ 917
8.9.9 ASSIGN change profile data by assignment............................................................................ 919
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 919
8.9.10 OPTIMIZE ..................................................................................................................................... 919
Examples ................................................................................................................................... 858
8.10 PIPESIM-Net keywords ........................................................................................................................... 921
8.10.1 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................... 921
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 922
8.10.2 BRANCH ....................................................................................................................................... 924
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 924
8.10.3 SOURCE ....................................................................................................................................... 926
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 926
8.10.4 SINK ............................................................................................................................................... 929
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 929
8.10.5 JUNCTION .................................................................................................................................... 930
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 930
8.10.6 NSEPARATOR ............................................................................................................................. 931
Subcodes .................................................................................................................................. 931
8.11 Keyword index .......................................................................................................................................... 751
8.11.1 Keyword list ................................................................................................................................... 751
A ................................................................................................................................................. 751
B ................................................................................................................................................. 751
C ................................................................................................................................................. 752
D E.............................................................................................................................................. 752
F .................................................................................................................................................. 752
G ................................................................................................................................................. 753
H ................................................................................................................................................. 753
I ................................................................................................................................................... 753
J .................................................................................................................................................. 753
K ................................................................................................................................................. 753
L .................................................................................................................................................. 753
M ................................................................................................................................................. 753
N ................................................................................................................................................. 754
O ................................................................................................................................................. 754
P ................................................................................................................................................. 754
Q R ............................................................................................................................................. 754
S ................................................................................................................................................. 754
T .................................................................................................................................................. 755
U ................................................................................................................................................. 755
V ................................................................................................................................................. 755
W ................................................................................................................................................ 755
XYZ ............................................................................................................................................ 756
xvi
PIPESIM User Guide
9 Tutorials ................................................................................................................................. 937

9.1 Oil well performance analysis .............................................................................................................. 937
9.1.1 NODAL analysis ........................................................................................................................... 938
9.1.2 Task 1: Build the well model ....................................................................................................... 938
9.1.3 Task 2: Perform a NODAL analysis .......................................................................................... 944
9.1.4 Task 3: Generate a pressure/temperature profile ................................................................... 945
9.1.5 Fluid calibration ............................................................................................................................ 948
9.1.6 Single point calibration ................................................................................................................ 948
9.1.7 Task 4: Calibrate PVT data ........................................................................................................ 949
9.1.8 Multiphase flow correlation calibration ...................................................................................... 950
9.1.9 Inflow performance matching ..................................................................................................... 951
9.1.10 Task 5: Sensitize on the Well PI to match well performance ................................................ 951
9.1.11 Well performance analysis.......................................................................................................... 952
9.1.12 Task 6: Analyze water cut sensitivity ........................................................................................ 952
9.1.13 Task 7: Evaluate gas lift performance....................................................................................... 954
9.1.14 Task 8: Model multiple completions .......................................................................................... 957
9.1.15 Task 9: Model a downhole choke .............................................................................................. 959
9.2 Gas well performance analysis ............................................................................................................ 961
9.2.1 Compositional fluid modeling ..................................................................................................... 961
9.2.2 Task 1: Create a compositional fluid model for a gas well ..................................................... 965
9.2.3 Gas well deliverability .................................................................................................................. 970
9.2.4 Task 2: Calculate gas well deliverability ................................................................................... 971
9.2.5 Task 3: Calibrate the inflow model using multipoint test data ............................................... 972
9.2.6 Erosion prediction ........................................................................................................................ 973
9.2.7 Task 4: Select a tubing size........................................................................................................ 974
9.2.8 Choke modeling ........................................................................................................................... 975
9.2.9 Task 5: Model a flowline and choke .......................................................................................... 976
9.2.10 Task 6: Predict future production rates ..................................................................................... 979
9.2.11 Liquid loading................................................................................................................................ 980
9.2.12 Task 7: Determine a critical gas rate to prevent well loading ................................................ 981
9.3 Subsea tieback design ........................................................................................................................... 985
9.3.1 Flow assurance considerations .................................................................................................. 985
9.3.2 Task 1: Size the subsea tieback and riser................................................................................ 986
9.3.3 Hydrates ........................................................................................................................................ 994
9.3.4 Task 2: Select tieback insulation thickness .............................................................................. 996
9.3.5 Task 3: Determine the methanol requirement ....................................................................... 1000
9.3.6 Severe riser slugging ................................................................................................................. 1003
9.3.7 Task 4: Screen for severe riser slugging ................................................................................ 1004
9.3.8 Slug catcher sizing ..................................................................................................................... 1005
9.3.9 Task 5: Size a slug catcher ...................................................................................................... 1008
9.4 Looped gas gathering network .......................................................................................................... 1011
9.4.1 Model a gathering network ....................................................................................................... 1011
9.4.2 Task 1: Model a pipeline network ............................................................................................ 1012
xvii
PIPESIM User Guide
9.4.3 Task 2: Screen the network for erosion issues ...................................................................... 1022
9.5 Manual creation of a simple network model on the GIS map ..................................................... 1023
9.5.1 Task 1: Build the network model on a map ............................................................................ 1024
9.6 Automatic creation of a network model on the GIS map ............................................................. 1038
9.7 Use of inline heating for wax mitigation .......................................................................................... 1038
10 Support ................................................................................................................................. 1057

10.1 SIS web support ..................................................................................................................................... 1057
10.2 On-site support ...................................................................................................................................... 1057
10.3 SIS Education ......................................................................................................................................... 1057
Index ............................................................................................................................................. 1058
xviii
PIPESIM User Guide
1
Navigate the interface
The user interface is similar in style to the Microsoft® Office ribbon. At startup, the Workspace tab
appears.
Startup options
• Create a new network-centric or well-centric workspace.
• Open an existing workspace (including PIPESIM* 2007-2012 single-branch and network
models).
• Open a recent model from the Recent workspaces group, which displays the last 20
workspaces used.
• Perform other activities, using the Workspace tab options on the left.
License information
In the License information group, green icons indicate licensed features and red icons indicate
unlicensed features.
PIPESIM single-branch (wells & pipelines)
required to run single branch simulations
PIPESIM network modeling
required to run network simulations

1
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Workspace tab options (p.2)
Workspace types (p.3)
Workspace options (p.6)
Tour of the ribbon (p.15)
Change the main window layout (p.16)
Manage floating panes (p.16)
Manage the catalogs (p.21)
1.1 Workspace tab options

The Workspace tab provides options to manage your PIPESIM* workspace files and preferences.
Option Description
Save Saves the current workspace. If no workspace is open, this option is unavailable.
Save as Saves the current workspace to a different location in the file system. If no workspace is
open, this option is unavailable.
Open Opens an existing workspace. If a workspace containing unsaved changes is already
open, you are prompted to save it.
You can open the following types of models in a workspace:
• PIPESIM 2013+ network or well model file (.pips*)

2
PIPESIM User Guide
Option Description
• PIPESIM (2007-2012) single-branch model file (.bps)
• PIPESIM (2007-2012) network model file (.bpn)
Close Closes an open workspace. If the workspace contains unsaved changes, you are
prompted to save it.
New Creates a new workspace, or opens an existing workspace. By default, the New option
is selected when you start the application.
Help Provides access to the online help, support portal, Schlumberger contact information,
demo videos, case studies (sample model files), and information about the application.
Options Opens the Options window where you can configure unit systems, manage installed
plug-ins, configure GIS map options, and select advanced simulation preferences..
Exit Quits the application. If the workspace contains unsaved changes, you are prompted to
save it.
Related links:
Navigate the interface (p.1)
1.2 Workspace types

A workspace contains all of the data for a model. There are two types of workspaces: network-
centric and well-centric. The well-centric workspace mode is essentially a subset of the network-
centric mode that simplifies the user interface by showing user interface elements relevant only to
well modeling applications. Both workspace types use the same model file format (.pips).
Well-centric workspace
Use this workspace type when your focus is specifically on modeling wells only. Some of
the options and viewers for network modeling and simulation are not offered in a well-
centric workspace. When you save the workspace, the mode is retained; the next time you
open the workspace, it will automatically open in well-centric mode.
Network-centric workspace
Use this workspace type when you want to construct a network model and run Network
Simulation tasks to optimize the model. Network-centric mode also includes all the
functionality of well-centric mode. When you save the workspace, the mode is retained;
the next time you open the workspace, it will automatically open in network-centric mode.
You can switch modes easily any time a workspace is open. This is useful, for example, when you
want to extend a single-well model to include other wells and build a production network. On the
Home tab, in the Perspective gallery, click Well or Network.
Related links:
Network-centric workspace (p.4)
Well-centric workspace (p.5)

3
PIPESIM User Guide
1.2.1 Network-centric workspace

A network-centric workspace consists of four main areas: ribbon and context tab, navigation
panes, network diagram, and information area.
Ribbon and contextual tool tab
The ribbon is located at the top of the window. The Network tools tab is contextual; its
content is determined by the core tab selected (Home, Insert, or Format).
Context bar
The context bar appears just below the ribbon and is always viewable. You may use the
context bar to create, edit, and select studies and wells.
Navigation panes
Use the Inputs pane to add and manage network objects in the diagram. Use the Tasks
pane to perform analysis and simulation tasks.
Note: By default, the Tasks pane is not visible. To show the pane, change the window
layout.
Network diagram
The network diagram serves as the canvas on which you build the surface network, using
objects located in the Insert tab. Equipment with missing values is outlined in red. On the
Format tab, you can access additional visualization options such as zoom, icon size, grid
size and style, and object labels.
Information area
Located at the bottom left of the window, this area contains the Message center and
Validation tabs. Each tab opens a dockable pane.

4
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
1.2.2 Well-centric workspace

A well-centric workspace consists of four main areas: the ribbon and contextual tool tab, the
context bar, the Well editor, and information area.
Ribbon and contextual tool tab
The ribbon is located at the top of the window. The Well tools tab is contextual; its
content is determined by the core tab selected (Home, Insert, or Format).
Context bar
Well editor
This window contains the interactive wellbore schematic on the left and a well properties
area, organized into tabs, on the right.
Information area
Located at the bottom left of the window, this area contains the Message center and
Validation tabs. Each tab opens a dockable pane.

5
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
1.3 Workspace options

Use the Options dialog box to configure your workspace environment.
Related links:
Units (p.7)
Plugins (p.8)
Advanced options (p.8)
Catalog (p.13)
GIS map options (p.13)

6
PIPESIM User Guide
1.3.1 Units
Use the Options dialog box to either select a standard unit system for data display or to create
and manage custom unit systems. You can also quickly select both default and customized unit
systems from the Home tab.
Related links:
Select a standard unit system (p.7)
Create a custom unit system (p.7)
Import or export a custom unit system (p.8)
Select a standard unit system

You can select a standard unit system for data display.
1. On the Workspace tab, click Options.
2. In the left pane, click Units.
3. In the Default unit system list, click one of the following items:
Field
Metric
Uses a set of decimalized prefixes (in powers of ten). Although more consistent than
field units, there were still inconsistencies among disciplines. For example, scientists
preferred centimeter gram seconds (CGS), and engineers preferred meter kilogram
seconds (MKS), mainly because engineers were used to larger quantities. Both CGS
and MKS are metric units.
SI
Uses a set of base units that are all from the metric system, but are chosen to provide
consistency. Using SI units makes it easier to compare work done in different countries
and disciplines. Length is provided in meters, mass in kilograms, time in seconds, and
temperature in degrees Kelvin.
Note: The Description and Reference base name fields update based on your selection.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
Units (p.7)
Create a custom unit system

You can create a custom system of units of measurement for display of input data and results.
2. In the left pane, click Units.

7
PIPESIM User Guide
3. In the Display unit system list, click a predefined unit system to use as a basis (preferably, the
one most similar to the system you want to create).
4. Click Clone.
5. Enter a name for the new unit system in the Name field, and click OK.
6. In the table, change the units of measurement as necessary.
7. Click Close.
Note: You can export, import, rename, or delete custom unit systems.
Related links:
Units (p.7)
Import or export a custom unit system

You can import a custom system of units of measurement for display of input data and results. You
can also save a custom unit system to a local or network drive.
2. In the Options dialog box left pane, click Units.
3. To select a custom unit system from a local or network drive, perform the following actions:
a. Click Import.
b. Browse to the location of the file, select it, and then click Open.
c. Close the Options dialog box.
4. To save a custom unit system to a local or network drive, perform the following actions:
a. Click Export.
b. Enter the file name, and then click Save.
c. Close the Options dialog box.
Note: You can create, export, rename, or delete custom unit systems. Custom unit systems are
saved in the .cus file format.
Related links:
Units (p.7)
1.3.2 Plugins
Plugins allow you to extend the functionality of PIPESIM* to enable custom modules that have
been developed externally.
• User defined flow correlations
• User defined equipment

8
PIPESIM User Guide
• User profile calculations
Related links:
User defined flow correlations (p.8)
User defined equipment (p.8)
User profile calculations (p.11)
User defined flow correlations

Multiphase flow models are fundamental to PIPESIM* and an area of ongoing research and
development. To facilitate the testing and use of proprietary models, PIPESIM supports user
defined multiphase flow correlations to calculate the flow pattern, liquid holdup, pressure gradient,
and other characteristics of multiphase flow. Additionally, the ability to specify input switches and
report any output variable associated with the user flow correlation is available.
User defined multiphase flow correlations may be written in a variety of languages including c, c++,
Fortran, etc. Self-documenting code templates for two-phase and three-phase models written in c+
+ and Fortran are provided in ..\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM201x.x
\Developer Tools\User Flow Correlations directory created during the PIPESIM
installation.
Register user flow correlations

Use the Options dialog box to register a user defined flow correlation plug-in.
2. In the left pane, click Plugins.
3. Click Register.
4. Browse to and select the desired user flow correlation DLL.
5. Click Open.
The user flow correlation DLL with relevant information is added to the list of plugins.
Use user defined flow correlations

1. To define a user flow correlation, from the Home tab, click Simulation Settings, and then the
Flow Correlations tab.
2. From the vertical or horizontal flow correlations group, select the desired Source and
Correlation from the list.
For correlations defined with extra input options, a settings button will be displayed so you can
select the desired options.
The settings menu is only available when the Use Global option is selected. When using local
flow correlations, options defined in this settings menu will be applied for all local instances.

9
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Plugins (p.8)
User defined equipment

PIPESIM* supports many types of equipment that can be inserted into a flow path to model
devices that affect the fluid (flowrate, pressure, temperature and enthalpy). Examples include
pumps, compressors, heaters, multipliers, chokes, etc.
If you want to model certain specialized or proprietary devices not currently supported by PIPESIM,
you can create a Dynamically Linked Library (DLL) to achieve this. Such devices may include jet
pumps, multiphase boosters, valves, etc.
Self-documenting code templates written in c++ and Fortran are provided in the .. \Program
Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM201x.x\Developer Tools\User Equipment
directory created during the PIPESIM installation.
Register user defined equipment

3. Click Register.
4. Browse to and select the desired user equipment DLL.
5. Select a user equipment or flow correlations DLL.
6. Click Open.
The user equipment DLL with relevant information is added to the list of plugins.
Use user defined equipment

Depending on the type of user equipment created, you can add a user defined equipment to the
PIPESIM model from one of three possible locations:
• Surface equipment (network or well editor)
• Downhole equipment (well editor)
• Artificial lift (well editor)
Depending on the specific configuration options defined for the user equipment, you can specify
settings and input variables in the properties editor of the user equipment. Additionally, you may
sensitize on numerical input parameters while running certain single branch tasks (such as PT
Profile, System Analysis, Nodal Analysis). Results may be viewed in both tabular and graphical
form by inspecting the System node result tables and System plots respectively.
Related links:
Plugins (p.8)

10
PIPESIM User Guide
User profile calculations

PIPESIM enables you to perform your own auxiliary calculations along the flow profile and report
the results. User profile calculations may take any calculated profile output result variable and use
these as input to the user function. Examples may include new corrosion models, sand transport
models, reporting of flow assurance risks, etc. Several examples may be found in the “PIPESIM
Labs” directory that installs with PIPESIM (…\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM20xx.x
\PIPESIM Labs).
Register user profile plugin

To create your own profile calculation in PIPESIM, you will need to create a Dynamically Linked
Library (DLL) to achieve this. Self-documenting code templates written in c++ and Fortran are
provided in the .. \Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM20xx.x\Developer Tools\ User Profile
3. Click Register.
4. Browse to and select the desired user profile DLL.
5. Click Open.
Use user profile calculations

After registering the user profile calculation, you can activate it for use in simulations by selecting
Simulation Settings on the Home tab and then selecting the User Extensions tab.
Depending on the specific configuration options defined for the user profile calculation, you may
specify settings and input variables in the properties editor. Results may be viewed in both tabular
and graphical form by inspecting the Profile result tables and Profile plots respectively. Additionally,
these result may be selected as color gradients on the GIS map after performing a network
simulation. If the name of the result variable contains the word “risk” the results will map to colors
representing severity index (integers from 0-5).
Related links:
Plugins (p.8)
1.3.3 Advanced options

The Advanced options, under Workspace » Options » Advanced, allows you to configure
options settings.
The Advanced tab contains the following options:
Property Description
PROGRAM Engine Path
PATHS The Engine path is the directory where the PIPESIM* engine resides.

11
PIPESIM User Guide
Performance curve import path
The Performance curve import path contains the PIPESIM *.mdb file,
used in versions 2012 and older. This is only required if you have saved
user defined pump, ESP or compressor curves.
ENGINE Number of processes for Network engine
OPTIONS PIPESIM 2012 (and newer) introduced a parallelized network solver where
you can run network simulations with multiple processors to increase the
speed. The selection for this will be limited to the number of available
processors on your hardware as reported by Windows. The larger the
selected value the faster the network simulation. Set this to a smaller value
of you would like to limit the number of processes used for simulation due
to other running applications that may need processing resources.
Network debug codes
For the advanced user and as directed by technical support to enable/
disable optional features deemed temporary or to provide additional
specific console output or problem workaround, these codes are only used
during Network simulation.
Network verbosity level
Indicates how much information is displayed in the engine console during
network simulation. 0 is minimal, 1 is default and higher generally
increases the amount of output.
Single branch debug codes
For the advanced user and as directed by technical support to enable/
disable optional features deemed temporary or to provide additional
specific console output or problem workaround, these codes are used for
any operation other than network simulation.
Single branch verbosity level
Indicates how much information is displayed in the engine console during
any operation. 0 is minimal, 1 is default and higher generally increases the
amount of output.
RESULTS Show engine console
DISPLAY When you run a simulation, the engine output is displayed in a tab called
OPTIONS Engine Console. If this option is not checked, you do not get that tab.
Show engine output files
If this option is checked, two additional tabs will be added and the contents
of the output and summary file will be displayed.
Max. auto-selected case/case group results
Displays only the number of profile results returned and ignores
subsequent results.

12
PIPESIM User Guide
This option controls the number of profile plots automatically selected for
initial display in the profile plot.
This option helps improve performance and legibility when several
sensitivities are run.
DIAGNOSTICS Open application log
This option opens PIPESIM log file.
LICENSING License checkout options:
As needed (slower)
This option will checkout PIPESIM license features as needed. If a
network license server is used, you may experience latency when running
simulation tasks or editing compositional fluid models due to the time
required to access the license server and check out the appropriate
license. This is the default setting.
At startup (faster)
This option will checkout one of each available PIPESIM license features
when the PIPESIM user interface is opened. The features are checked
back into the license server when PIPESIM is closed. This option
eliminates network latency when checking license features, allowing faster
performance when running simulation tasks or editing compositional fluid
models.
Related links:
1.3.4 Catalog
Catalog data can be updated to include user defined performance curves that may exist in one of
the older versions of catalog. The import process does not affect standard catalog data of the
destination catalog; it only adds user defined data, if any from the source catalog and merge into
destination catalog.
If you install a newer version of PIPESIM* and an older database is found, perform the following
steps:
1. On the Workspace tab, select Options.
2. Click Catalog on the left hand side.
3.ecide if you want to import or export catalog data.
D
IMPORT You can import from a Previous version of catalog or From file (*.sdf) that
SOURCE you may have exported earlier.

13
PIPESIM User Guide
Previous Version:
When this option is selected, the drop down menu Version to import from
becomes active and displays all the previous versions of catalog listed
under the default catalog location. Clicking Import will import and merge
user data if it exists, otherwise, you will get a notification.
From File:
When this option is selected, the drop down menu File to import from
becomes active and allows you to browse to the location where you may
have the catalog file (*.sdf). The import will be successful if the selected file
is a previous version of the catalog and has some user data.
IMPORT Duplicate options are Ignore and Overwrite.
DUPLICATES In case one of the imported user data has same name as one of the existing
data in destination catalog, the import will be ignored (with Ignore option) or
override the destination catalog with imported data (if overwrite option is
selected).
EXPORT This option exports the current catalog as *.sdf file.
UPDATES This option updates the perforation gun catalog.
Related links:
1.3.5 GIS map options

You can add bookmarks and map services layers from the map options under Workspace »
Options » GIS map.
LICENSED Elevation account

FEATURES If you have your own Geonames account, you can provide the account name
(ID) here. This field should generally not be touched and only be used in
cases where you expect to make an extraordinarily large number of elevation
capture requests and have your own account name which may be provided
here. For more information, see Capturing Elevation (p.477).
ELEVATION Default elevation source
There are 3 sources available for elevation data capture in PIPESIM; ESRI,
SRTM and ASTER services. Select your preferred option from the dropdown
menu. For more information, see ESRI, ASTER and SRTM Elevation Data
Sources. (p.52)
MAP Map services can be added by connecting to an internal GIS server or a service
SERVICE over the Internet. The speed depends on your bandwidth and the server that
LAYERS hosts the map layers. You can connect to a web map service or an ArcGIS map.
However, if you do not connect to your internal GIS server or the Internet, the

14
PIPESIM User Guide
GIS map cannot display the layers from those sources. Supported map service
types are Web Map Service (WMS) and ArcGIS.
For more information, see Using Map Services (p.467).
Related links:
1.4 Tour of the ribbon

The ribbon is a command bar that organizes application features into a series of tabs at the top of
the main window. The ribbon replaces traditional menus and toolbars.
The ribbon consists of the following key components:

Quick Access Toolbar
This small toolbar provides quick access to the Save and Save as commands (also
located in the Workspace tab). Click the down arrow to access additional commands,
such as moving the Quick Access Toolbar below the ribbon and minimizing the ribbon.
Core tabs
The Workspace, Home, Insert, and Format tabs appear in both workspace modes.
Contextual tool tabs
These tabs appear under certain circumstances. For example, in network-centric mode,
the Network tools context tab appears above the core tabs.
Context bar
Tab groups
Within each tab, related features are organized into named groups.
Related links:

15
PIPESIM User Guide
1.5 Change the main window layout

You can change the layout of the main window in network centric mode only. For example, you can
show or hide the Inputs and Tasks panes.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Layout, and then click a layout view.
2. To return to the default layout (showing the Inputs pane only, on the left), on the Home tab, in
the Application options group, click Default Layout.
Related links:
1.6 Manage floating panes

You can dock, auto hide, and undock the following panes: Inputs, Tasks, Message center, and
Validation.
1. To dock a floating pane, perform the following actions:
a. Right-click the title bar, and then click Dockable.
b. Drag the title bar onto the arrow that represents the desired docked position.

16
PIPESIM User Guide
2. To auto hide a floating pane, perform one of the following actions:

Clic•k Auto-hide (the pin-shaped button).
Note: When the pin is horizontal, auto-hide is active.

When the pin is vertical, auto-hide is inactive (the pane is pinned).
• In the View position list, click Auto-hide.
3. To undock a floating pane, perform the following actions:

a. Right-click the title bar, and then turn off Auto hide, if necessary.
b. Right-click the title bar, and then click Float view always.
c. Drag the title bar to move the pane anywhere on the monitor screen.
Note: In well-centric mode, you cannot undock the Wellbore schematic.
Related links:
Inputs pane (p.18)

17
PIPESIM User Guide
Tasks pane (p.18)

Information area overview (p.19)
1.6.1 Inputs pane

Use the Inputs pane to manage all equipment in the model. When an object is selected in the
pane, the object is automatically selected in the network diagram (network-centric mode) or
displayed in the Wellbore schematic (well-centric mode). In addition, any open properties pane
or tab automatically displays the properties of the selected object.
• In network-centric mode, the pane appears on the left side of the window by default.
• In well-centric mode, the pane is not visible since you are not generally dealing with a large
number of model objects. However, if the workspace contains multiple wells, you can quickly
select wells in the Well selector group under the ribbon.
Operation Instructions
Expand or collapse an Double-click the object category.
object tree • In network-centric mode, the pane contains a tree for each type of
surface equipment.
• In well-centric mode, the pane contains only one tree, and it is for
wells.
Display a command Right-click an object.
menu
Edit an object Double-click the object name, or right-click the object and then click
Edit.
Table 1.1: Pane Operations
Related links:
1.6.2 Tasks pane

Use the Tasks pane to display simulation tasks in network centric mode only.
Network-centric mode offers five tasks: Network simulation, P/T profile, Nodal analysis,
System analysis, VFP tables, and ESP design.
In a valid model, Network simulation is always available. When the selected object is a well,
source, or junction treated as source, the remaining tasks become available.
When a well is selected, all tasks become available.
By default, the Tasks pane is not visible. (These same tasks appear on the ribbon in the Home
tab.) To show or hide the pane, change the window layout.

18
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
1.6.3 Information area overview

The information area, located at the bottom of the window, displays all messages related to
application operations.
Pane Description
Message center Displays messages related to application operations.
Validation Displays validation warnings and errors, along with recommendations for
resolution.
Related links:
Message center pane (p.19)
Validation pane (p.20)
Message center pane

The Message center pane displays information related to operations performed in the
application. This pane features filtering and sorting.
There are three key types of messages:

Errors
Problems that resulted in the termination of an operation
Warnings
Problems that do not result in the termination of an operation, but may need attention
Information
Information about operations and the status of the application

19
PIPESIM User Guide
Filter messages by Click the appropriate filter button (Errors, Warnings, Information, or
type Current Study).
You may select multiple filters.
Note: The Current Study filter show messages for the currently open
study only.
Search for a To find messages containing specific text, enter the text in the text box.
message
Delete a message Right-click the message, and then click Clear.
Sort the table To sort the table in ascending or descending order, double-click a column
header.
Copy table data 1. Drag the mouse pointer to select the desired table cells. To quickly
select all table data, click the top left cell.
2. Press CTRL+C.
3. Paste the table data into a document, such as an e-mail message or
spreadsheet.
Related links:
Validation pane
The Validation pane displays all known issues within the model, such as object properties that
are missing or out of range, sources not linked to fluids, or problems with connections. Clicking the
hypertext in the Context column opens the relevant editor so that you can correct the issue.

20
PIPESIM User Guide
Resolve an error 1. Click a message to select the invalid object in the Inputs pane and
network diagram, if visible.
2. Double-click a message to open the appropriate editor where you can
correct the problem.
Sort the table To sort the table in ascending or descending order, double-click a column
header.
Copy table data 1. Select a table row.
2. Press CTRL+C.
3. Paste the table data into a document, such as an e-mail message or
spreadsheet.
Related links:
1.7 Manage the catalogs

The Catalogs button (accessed from the Home tab, in the Application options group) provides
access to the equipment and template catalogs that you can manage. The catalogs contain well
and pipeline components and their associated properties. After you add a pipeline or well
component to a network or well model, you can define its properties by selecting the component
from a catalog.
Note: You can share catalogs by using the Export or Import options on the Catalog tab of the
Options dialog box (accessed from the WORKSPACE tab Options button).
Related links:
Manage the centrifugal compressor catalog (p.22)
Manage the reciprocating compressor catalog (p.22)

21
PIPESIM User Guide
Manage the pump catalog (p.22)

Manage the gas lift valve catalog (p.27)
Manage the ESP catalog (p.28)
Manage the PCP catalog (p.30)
Manage the fluid templates catalog (p.31)
Manage the well templates catalog (p.33)
Manage the survey data catalog (p.34)
Catalog properties tables (p.40)
Filter catalog views
Add items to the pump catalog (p.25)
1.7.1 Manage the centrifugal compressor catalog

There are no predefined items in the Centrifugal compressor catalog. You can populate the
catalog by adding compressors to it. As you add new compressors, they appear in the catalog. You
can filter the columns in the catalog to quickly locate a compressor. You can clone any compressor
in the catalog and then edit it. You can also edit or delete any custom compressor that you added
to the catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click
Centrifugal compressor catalog.
2. To add a new compressor to the catalog from scratch, click New, and then use the
Compressor dialog box to add it.
3. To add a new compressor by cloning an existing one, perform the following steps:
a. Click the compressor's row number to highlight the row, and then click Clone.
b. Double-click inside the cloned row.
c. In the Compressor dialog box, edit the compressor properties, and then click OK.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
Centrifugal compressor catalog properties (p.44)
Add centrifugal compressors to the catalog (p.22)
Add centrifugal compressors to the catalog

There are no predefined compressors in the Centrifugal compressor catalog. You can use
the Compressor dialog box to add new compressors. As you create new compressors, they
appear in the catalog.
2. Click New.

22
PIPESIM User Guide
3. In the Compressor dialog box, click the Properties tab, and then enter the compressor
properties.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the compressor
Model Model name or number of the compressor
Min. flowrate Minimum recommended flowrate for the performance curve. You can construct the
curve outside this limit, but warning messages appear when the operating point is
outside this limit.
Max. flowrate Maximum recommended flowrate for the performance curve. You can construct
the curve outside this limit, but warning messages appear when the operating
point is outside this limit.
Base speed Speed at which the performance curve is defined
4. Click the Performance data tab, and then enter the compressor curve properties.
Flowrate Flowrate associated with the discharge pressure. This is in flowing (actual) conditions,
not stock tank conditions.
Head Specifies the pressure at the compressor head.
Efficiency Specifies the efficiency of the compressor
You must enter properties for at least two curves.
Note: You can add performance curve data to the database but it will not be listed in the
5. Click the Performance curve tab to view the curve on a graph.

6. Click OK.
Related links:
Compressor properties (p.165)
1.7.2 Manage the reciprocating compressor catalog

There are no predefined compressors in the Reciprocating compressor catalog. You can
populate the catalog by adding compressors to it. As you create new compressors, they appear in
the catalog. You can filter the columns in the catalog to quickly locate a compressor. You can clone
any compressor in the catalog and then edit it. You can also edit or delete any custom compressor
that you added to the catalog.
Reciprocating compressor catalog.

23
PIPESIM User Guide
2. To add a new compressor to the catalog from scratch, click New, and then use the
Compressor dialog box to add it.
3. To add a new compressor by cloning an existing one, perform the following steps:
a. Click the compressor's row number to highlight the row, and then click Clone.
c. In the Compressor dialog box, edit the compressor properties, and then click OK.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
Reciprocate compressor catalog properties (p.45)
Add reciprocating compressors to the catalog (p.22)
Add reciprocating compressors to the catalog

There are no predefined compressors in the Reciprocating compressor catalog. You can
use the Compressor dialog box to add new compressors. As you create new compressors, they
appear in the catalog.
2. Click New.
3. In the Compressor dialog box, click the Properties tab, and then enter the compressor
properties.
Abs. min. suction pressure Absolute minimum suction pressure
Abs. max. capacity Absolute maximum capacity. (The performance curve can be
constructed outside this range. Warning messages show where the
operating point is outside this limit.)
Stages Number of stages used
Inter-stage temperature Temperature of the gas between stages
4. Click the Performance data tab, and then enter the compressor curve properties.
Discharge pressure Pressure at the compressor outlet. For each discharge pressure, there is at
least one flowrate, suction pressure, and efficiency percent.
Efficiency Specifies the efficiency of the compressor

24
PIPESIM User Guide
Power Horsepower of the compressor
Flowrate Flowrate associated with the discharge pressure. This is in flowing (actual)
conditions, not stock tank conditions.
Suction pressure Pressure at the compressor inlet
Note: You can add performance curve data to the database but it will not be listed in the

6. Click OK.
Related links:
1.7.3 Manage the pump catalog

There are no predefined pumps in the Pump catalog. You can populate the catalog by adding
pumps to it. As you create new pumps, they appear in the catalog. You can filter the columns in the
catalog to quickly locate a pump. You can also clone, edit, or delete the pumps in the catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Pump
catalog.
2. To add a new pump from scratch, click New, and then use the Generic pump dialog box to
add it.
3. To add a new pump by cloning an existing one, perform the following steps:
a. Click the pump's row number to highlight the row, and then click Clone.
c. In the Generic pump dialog box, edit the pump properties, and then click OK.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
Pump catalog properties (p.46)
Add items to the pump catalog

There are no predefined items in the Pump catalog. You can use the Generic pump dialog box
to add new pumps. As you add new pumps, they appear in the catalog.

25
PIPESIM User Guide
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Pump
catalog.
2. Click New.
3. In the Generic pump dialog box, click the Properties tab, and then enter the pump properties.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the pump
Model Model name or number of the pump
Min flowrate Minimum recommended flowrate for the performance curve
You can construct the curve outside this limit, but warning messages appear when
the operating point is outside this limit.
Max flowrate Maximum recommended flowrate for the performance curve
You can construct the curve outside this limit, but warning messages appear when
the operating point is outside this limit.
This cannot be changed for the simulation, but you can set a different operating
speed in the Pump editor window. The curve is then adapted for that operating
speed.
Base stages Initial point at which the performance curve is defined
This can be changed for the simulation.
4. Click the Performance data tab, and then enter the pump curve properties.
Flowrate Flowrate associated with the discharge pressure
This is in flowing (actual) conditions, not stock tank conditions.
Head Specifies the actual pressure at the pump head
Efficiency Efficiency associated with the discharge pressure
Note: You can add performance curve data to the database but it will not be listed in the Pump
catalog.

6. Click OK.
Related links:
Manage the pump catalog (p.22)

26
PIPESIM User Guide
1.7.4 Manage the gas lift valve catalog

The Gas lift valve catalog includes valves from several manufacturers. If the catalog does
not include the valve that you need, you can easily add it. As you add new valves, they appear in
the catalog. You can filter the columns in the catalog to quickly locate a valve. You can clone any
valve in the catalog and then edit it. You can also edit or delete any custom valve that you added to
the catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Gas lift
valve catalog.
2. To add a new object from scratch, click New, and then use the Gas lift valve dialog box to
add the valve object.
3. To add a new item by cloning an existing one, perform the following steps:
a. Click the item row number to highlight the row, and then click Clone.
c. In the Gas lift valve dialog box, edit the valve properties, and then click OK.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
Add gas lift valves to the catalog (p.27)
Gas lift valve catalog properties (p.46)
Select a gas lift injection valve (p.80)
Add gas lift valves to the catalog

If the gas lift valve catalog does not contain the type of valve that you need, you can add it to the
catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Gas lift
valve catalog.
2. Click New.
3. In the Gas lift valve dialog box, type the name of the Manufacturer and Series.
4. Select the Valve type, and then enter the associated properties.
Valve type • IPO: Inject-pressure-operated gas lift valve that is designed in a way that
the casing pressure is acting on the larger area of the bellows and thus
are primarily sensitive to the casing pressure. The drop in casing pressure
which occurs during unloading is used to close the valves in the correct
sequence.
• PPO-N: Production Pressure Operated Valve that uses a nitrogen
charged dome as the loading element to cause the valve to close.
Most gas lift equipment manufacturers use a valve setting temperature
base of 60 degrees for nitrogen charged gas lift valves. The valve is

27
PIPESIM User Guide
submerged in a 60 degrees F water bath to ensure a constant nitrogen
temperature in the dome of each valve during the test rack setting
procedure.
• PPO-S: Production Pressure Operated Valve with a spring to pre-load the
bellows and hold the valve stem on the port (for example, a spring is used
as the loading element to cause the valve to close).
This type of value is also called a PPO unbalanced spring valve. The
advantage of this type of PPO valve is that there are no temperature
effects to consider when setting the valves opening pressure.
• Orifice: Fixed opening primarily used for single point injection or can be
combined with other gas lift valves
• Dummy: A blank gas-lift valve placed in a gas-lift mandrel to isolate the
tubing string from the annulus. Gas-lift valves frequently are replaced with
dummy valves during intervention work on wells with gas-lift completions.
Valve size Valve outer diameter
Port size Valve port (orifice) diameter
Port area Cross sectional area of the port
Bellow area Cross sectional area of the bellows
Discharge Discharge coefficient for the Thornhill-Craver equation, used to calculate valve
coefficient gas throughput (given injection and production pressure)
DP [Delta P] to Difference between the production pressure when the valve is fully open to fully
fully open closed (for a fixed injection pressure)
This is only needed for diagnostics operation if the throttling behavior of the
valve is to be modeled.
5. Click Close.
Related links:
1.7.5 Manage the ESP catalog

The ESP catalog is the PIPESIM repository for the number of stages required to achieve target
flowrate under given well, fluid, and operating conditions. If the catalog does not include the ESP
pump that you need, you can easily add it. As you add new ESP pumps, they appear in the
catalog. You can filter the columns in the catalog to quickly locate an ESP pump. You can clone
any ESP pump in the catalog and then edit it. You can also edit or delete any custom ESP pump
that you added to the catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click ESP
catalog.
2. To add a new pump from scratch, click New, and then use the ESP dialog box to add it.

28
PIPESIM User Guide
a. Click the pump row number to highlight the row, and then click Clone.
c. In the ESP dialog box, edit the pump's properties, and then click OK.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
ESP catalog properties (p.47)
Add ESP pumps to the catalog (p.29)
Add ESP pumps to the catalog

The ESP data catalog is the PIPESIM repository for the number of stages required to achieve
target flowrate under given well, fluid, and operating conditions. If the catalog does not contain the
pump that you need, you can add it to the catalog. As you add new pumps, they appear in the
catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs and then click ESP
catalog.
2. Click New.
3. In the ESP dialog box Properties tab, enter the ESP pump properties.
Parameter Description
Manufacturer ESP Pump Manufacturer
Model ESP Pump Model (every manufacturer has a list of models as stored in the
database
Series ESP Pump series (every model has a series that reflects the size of the pump).
A higher series represents larger OD of the pump.
Diameter ESP diameter
Min flowrate: Recommended minimum flowrate for the pump operation
Max flowrate Recommended maximum flowrate for the pump operation
Base frequency The frequency/speed the pump is expected to run
Base speed Speed the performance curve is defined, typically 60 Hz
Base stages Stage the performance curve is based defined, typically 1
4. Click the Performance data tab, and then enter the ESP pump curve properties.
Flowrate Flowrate in flowing conditions
Head Pump efficiency to be factored
Efficiency Efficiency of the curve

29
PIPESIM User Guide
Power Power requirements
Note: You can add performance curve data to the database but it will not be listed in the ESP
catalog.

6. Click OK.
Related links:
1.7.6 Manage the PCP catalog

To simulate a PCP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which you
can select. If the catalog does not include the pump that you need, you can easily add it. As you
add new pumps, they appear in the catalog. You can filter the columns in the catalog to quickly
locate a pump. You can clone any pump in the catalog and then edit it. You can also edit or delete
any custom pump that you added to the catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click PCP
catalog.
2. To add a new pump from scratch, click New, and then use the PCP dialog box to add the pump.
a. Click the pump row number to highlight the row, and then click Clone.
c. In the PCP dialog box, edit the pump properties, and then click OK.
4. Click Close.
Related links:
Add items to the PCP catalog (p.30)
Add items to the PCP catalog

If the PCP catalog does not contain the type of progressive cavity pump that you need, you can
add it to the catalog. As you add new pumps, they appear in the catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs and then click ESP
catalog.
2. Click New.

30
PIPESIM User Guide
3. In the ESP dialog box Properties tab, enter the ESP pump properties.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the pump (from catalog)
Model Model of the pump (from catalog)
Diameter Diameter of the pump for the model selected (from catalog)
Nominal rate Actual volumetric flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping with no
back-pressure at its discharge (m3/sec or ft3/min)
Base speed Frequency at which the performance curve is defined
4. Click the Performance data tab, and then enter the pump curve properties.
Flowrate Flowrate in flowing conditions
Head Pump efficiency to be factored
Efficiency Efficiency of the curve
Power Power requirements
Note: You can add performance curve data to the database but it will not be listed in the PCP
catalog.

6. Click OK.
Related links:
Manage the PCP catalog (p.30)
1.7.7 Manage the fluid templates catalog

Use the Fluid templates catalog to create custom fluid templates from either existing or new
fluids, edit custom fluid templates, and view built-in or custom fluid templates. The Fluid
templates catalog includes the built-in templates and any custom templates that have been
created.
Related links:
View a built-in fluid template (p.32)
Create a custom fluid template (p.32)
View or edit a custom fluid template (p.33)
Create or edit fluid models (p.228)

31
PIPESIM User Guide
View a built-in fluid template

Built-in fluid templates appear as expandable objects in the Fluid templates catalog. You can
view built-in templates, but you cannot edit them.
The following built-in fluid templates are available:

• Dry Gas
• Light Oil + Gas
• Heavy Oil + Gas
• Dead Oil
• Water
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Fluid
templates catalog.
2. Click a template to expand the view that shows the phase ratio and watercut percentage.
3. Double-click the template, or right-click the template and then click View.
4. View the fluid properties, and then click Close.
Related links:
Manage the fluid templates catalog (p.31)
Create a custom fluid template

When you create custom fluid templates, they appear in the Fluid templates catalog. Custom
templates appear bright blue, with a face icon. You can edit or delete custom templates.
1. On the Home tab, in the Data group, click Fluid manager.

2. Perform one of the following actions:
• To create a custom fluid template from an existing fluid, go to step 3.
• Create a new fluid without a template by clicking New, and then clicking OK.
3. Double-click the row number of the fluid to open the Fluid editor.
4. Enter any fluid properties, if necessary, and then click Save as template.

32
PIPESIM User Guide
The fluid appears as a custom template in the Fluid templates catalog.

5. Click Close.
Related links:
Manage fluids (p.13)
View or edit a custom fluid template

View or edit a custom fluid template in the Fluid templates catalog.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Fluid
templates catalog.
2. Click a template to expand the view that shows the phase ratio and watercut percentage.
3. Double-click the template, or right-click the template and then click Edit.
4. View or edit the fluid properties, and then click Close.
Related links:
1.7.8 Manage the well templates catalog

Use the Well templates catalog to create custom well templates from either existing or new
wells, edit custom well templates, and view built-in or custom well templates. The Well
templates catalog includes one built-in template and any custom templates that have been
created.
Related links:
View a built-in well template (p.33)
Create a custom well template (p.34)
View or edit a custom well template (p.34)
View a built-in well template

The built-in well template, Simple Vertical, appears as an expandable object in the Well
templates catalog. You can view the built-in template, but you cannot edit it.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Well
templates catalog.
2. Click a template to expand the view that shows the template type.

33
PIPESIM User Guide
3. Double-click the template, or right-click the template and then click View.
4. View the well properties, and then click Close.
Related links:
Manage the well templates catalog (p.33)
Create a custom well template

When you create custom well templates, they appear in the Well templates catalog. Custom
templates appear bright blue, with a face icon. You can edit or delete custom templates.

• To create a well template from an existing well, go to step 2.
• Create a new well.
2. In the Inputs pane, right-click the well, and then click Save as template.
templates catalog.
The well appears as a custom template.
Related links:
Add wells (p.158)
View or edit a custom well template

View or edit a custom well template in the Well templates catalog.
templates catalog.
2. Click a template to expand the view that shows the template type.
3. Double-click the template, or right-click the template and then click Edit.
4. View or edit the well properties, and then click Close.
Related links:
Add wells (p.158)
1.7.9 Manage the survey data catalog

34
PIPESIM User Guide
The survey data catalog is the PIPESIM repository for flowing survey measurements acquired on
wells and flowlines. A flowing survey is typically conducted on wells; and measures properties such
as pressure, temperature, holdup, etc. along the profile of the well, while it is flowing at a stabilized
flow rate. Flowing surveys are used in the PIPESIM Data Matching (p.329) task which involves
tuning or mathematically regressing, selected flow correlations and/or heat transfer models, to
match the measured survey data. This is to improve the accuracy and predictability of the flow
correlations for the pressure drop calculations, and the heat transfer models for the temperature
calculations. Flowing surveys can be acquired in the following ways:
• Running production logging tools
• Running pressure gauges on wireline to acquire data at certain depths
• From wellhead and permanent downhole gauges installed on wells
• From fiber-optic telemetry installed on wells
Related links:
Add a survey to the survey data catalog (p.29)
Add a survey to the catalog by manual data entry (p.35)
LAS files (p.38)
LAS file format for PIPESIM (p.38)
Add a survey to the catalog by importing an LAS file (p.39)
Survey data catalog properties (p.48)
Run data matching (p.329)
Add a survey to the survey data catalog

You can add a survey to the catalog in the following two ways:
• Manual data entry
• Import from an LAS file
Related links:
Add a survey to the catalog by manual data entry
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Survey data
catalog.
2. Click New.
3. In the Survey data dialog box, enter the survey name.

35
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: It is recommended that you choose unique and descriptive names for each survey, to enable
you to easily differentiate them when performing the data matching task. Additionally, you will not
be able to save a survey with a duplicate name.
4. Select the survey type: Well or Flowline.
Note: When you select Well, the first column in the Profile Data table is Measured depth. If
Flowline is selected, the first column in the Profile Data table is Measured distance.
5. Select the Date/Time when the survey was acquired.

6. Enter the measured or interpreted stabilized oil, water, and gas flowrates at standard
conditions, on the well or flowline.
The GOR and watercut are automatically calculated.
Note: Currently, the fluid ratios in the Survey data dialog box are not used by the data matching
task, nor are visible in it. The fluid ratios used by the task, and visible in the interface, are those
defined in the Fluid manager.
Oil flowrate Measured oil flowrate at standard conditions for the surveyed object
Gas flowrate Measured gas flowrate at standard conditions for the surveyed object
Watercut Watercut for the surveyed object
Note: Watercut is calculated from the measured water and oil flowrate values.
GOR Gas oil ratio for the surveyed object
Note: Gas oil ratio is calculated from the measured gas and oil flowrate values.
7. Optional: Enter survey comments.

8. Select the Fluid phases: 2-phase or 3-phase.
This is relevant only if you have measured holdup data. The 2-phase option enables you to
enter liquid and/or gas holdup, while the 3-phase option enables you to enter any available
holdup data: oil, water, or gas.
9. In the Profile Data grid, enter the survey data.
You can paste from a spreadsheet like Microsoft® Excel®.
Note:

36
PIPESIM User Guide
• To be able to save the survey, you must enter at least one row of data, which must include
an MD value (measured depth for a well, or measured distance for a flowline) and at least
one other property, such as Pressure, Temperature, or Holdup.
• The measured Pressure, Temperature, and Holdup data must be at flowing conditions.
The data matching task tunes the empirical flow correlations to match these measured data;
and the flow correlations tuned by the task were developed for flowing conditions.
• The PIPESIM data matching (p.329) task is able to tune the models (flow correlations and
heat transfer models) to match only the measured pressure, temperature, and liquid holdup
data. If gas holdup data (HG) is entered, PIPESIM will automatically calculate the liquid
holdup (HL) as 1 - HG, and match this data, if selected in the task. Similarly, if oil and water
holdups are entered, PIPESIM will automatically sum them to obtain the liquid holdup which
will be matched, if selected, in the data matching task.
Fluid phases Select 2-phase or 3-phase
Measured depth Measured depth of the surveyed well
This option is set automatically when Well is selected for the Type.
Measured distance Measured distance of the surveyed flowline
This option is set automatically when Flowline is selected for the Type.
Pressure Measured flowing pressure at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Temperature Measured flowing temperature at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Oil holdup Measured flowing oil holdup at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Note: This option is available only when 3-phase is selected for the Fluid
phases.
Water holdup Measured flowing water holdup at the corresponding MD
phases.
Liquid holdup Measured flowing liquid holdup at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Gas holdup Measured flowing gas holdup at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
10. Click OK.
If the OK option is not available, you have unresolved validation issues.

37
PIPESIM User Guide
The survey is added to the Survey data catalog. All surveys in the catalog are available to use
in the data matching task.
Related links:
LAS files
LAS is the abbreviation for Log ASCII Standard. A LAS file is an industry-standard ASCII format for
storing digital log data. LAS files can store static data such as petrophysical information (e.g.
porosity) and dynamic data such as production log surveys (e.g. flowing pressures).
PIPESIM* currently supports importing only production log survey LAS files, specifically for the
data matching (p.329) task.
There are three LAS file versions (1.2, 2, and 3), and two types of LAS format (wrapped and
unwrapped). PIPESIM currently supports importing only versions 1.2 and 2 LAS files. PIPESIM
also supports importing both wrapped and unwrapped LAS files.
Related links:
LAS file format for PIPESIM

For LAS files to be imported into the survey data catalog in PIPESIM*, they must follow a specific
format. It is strongly recommended that you export the production log LAS files you want to use in
PIPESIM from a production log software such as Emeraude™ or BorFlow*, or any specialized LAS
file software. This helps ensure that the LAS files are set up in the correct ASCII format for
PIPESIM.
It is important to note the following:
• Although the survey data catalog can store well and flowline survey data, only well survey data
can be imported from a LAS file, because LAS files store only well log data.
• PIPESIM recognizes and imports only a small subset of LAS mnemonics (listed in the table
below) that are relevant to production simulation. Any unrecognized mnemonics will be ignored
during the import. When the LAS file is imported, the recognized mnemonics are mapped to the
equivalent PIPESIM variables, as indicated below, and the data is populated to the correct
columns in the Profile Data table in the Survey data catalog.
LAS file mnemonic PIPESIM variable

DEPT Measured depth
WPRE Pressure
WTEP Temperature

38
PIPESIM User Guide
LAS file mnemonic PIPESIM variable

YO Oil holdup
YW Water holdup
YG Gas holdup
• The measured pressure, temperature, and holdup data must be at flowing conditions. The data
matching task tunes the empirical flow correlations to match these measured data. The flow
correlations tuned by the task were developed for flowing conditions.
• The PIPESIM data matching (p.329) task is able to tune the models (flow correlations and heat
transfer models) to match only measured pressure, temperature, and liquid holdup data. If gas
holdup data (HG) is entered, PIPESIM will automatically calculate the liquid holdup (HL) as 1 -
HG, and match this data if selected in the data matching task. Similarly, if oil and water holdups
are entered, PIPESIM will automatically sum them to obtain the liquid holdup which will be
matched, if selected, in the data matching task.
• PIPESIM will not import any non-ASCII characters.
• If there are any problems importing the LAS file, review the Message center for details.
Correct the problems by editing the LAS file, and then re-import it.
• PIPESIM will not be able to import most LAS files created manually because they do not strictly
follow the standard LAS format. Manually-created LAS files containing non-ASCII characters,
that do not have the required number of spaces before the first column of data will not be
imported by PIPESIM, unless the LAS files are modified with a text editor to include these
spaces. This is why it is strongly recommended that you export the production log LAS files that
you want to use in PIPESIM from a production log software such as Emeraude or BorFlow, or
any specialized LAS file software, and not create them manually.
Reference
Canadian Well Logging Society: http://www.cwls.org/las/
Related links:
Add a survey to the catalog by importing an LAS file
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click Catalogs, and then click Survey data
catalog.
2. Click Import.
3. Browse to select a production log *.las file to import.
4. Click Open.
If the import was successful, the Survey data dialog box opens. The Profile Data table displays
the production log data.

39
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: If the import was unsuccessful, review the information in the Message center, correct the
identified problems in the LAS file, and then re-import it.
The import also automatically assigns the Fluid phases by detecting the phase holdups in the LAS
file. The 2-phase option is the default and is automatically selected when there is no holdup data
detected in the LAS file. If any of the three holdup phases (oil, gas, or water) are detected in the
LAS file, the 3-phase option is automatically selected and the available data populated.
The well Name, object Type, and Date/Time are automatically populated from the LAS file in the
top section of the Survey data dialog box. However, the flowrates are empty. PIPESIM does not
support the import or calculation of flowrates from LAS files.
5. Manually enter the measured or interpreted stabilized oil, water, and gas flowrates at standard
conditions, on the well or flowline.
The GOR and watercut are calculated automatically. There should no longer be any validation
issues and the OK button should be active.
task, nor visible in it. The fluid ratios used by the task and visible in the interface are those defined
in the Fluid manager.
6. Click OK.
The survey is added to the Survey data catalog. All surveys in the catalog are available to use
in the data matching task.
Related links:
LAS files (p.38)
1.7.10 Catalog properties tables

The catalog property reference tables define the property columns in each catalog.
Casing catalog properties

Casing is pipe cemented to the formation, typically filled with a completion fluid but may instead
serve as a flow conduit for produced fluids. Casing serves the following purposes:
• Prevents the formation wall from caving into the wellbore
• Isolates the different formations to prevent the flow or crossflow of formation fluid
• Provides a way to maintain control of formation fluids and pressure as the well is drilled
Use the Casing catalog to select a specific casing size and grade after adding casing to a
wellbore schematic. You can also filter the catalog view.

40
PIPESIM User Guide
Catalog Several separate catalogs are aggregated into the PIPESIM* casing Catalog. The
API catalog represents standard casing sizes. The GOST, Tenaris, and VAM
catalogs represent connections.
OD Outside diameter of the casing.
ID Inside diameter of the casing.
Thickness Thickness of the casing wall.
Weight Weight of the casing per standard length.
Roughness The typical value for the absolute pipe roughness based on the material type. The
default value is 0.001 inches (0.0254 mm).
Grade Strength rating for the casing material.
Table 1.4: Casing Catalog Properties
Note: The casing catalog is read-only. If you wish to specify your own casing, enter the values
directly into the casing table on the Tubulars tab in the Well editor.
For more information, see Typical Values (p.725).
Related links:
Add casing and tubing to a simple wellbore schematic (p.55)
Add casing and tubing to a detailed wellbore schematic (p.57)
View casing properties

The Casing dialog box lists the properties for the casing that you selected in the Casing
catalog.
Note: The properties in the Casing dialog box are uneditable.
Catalog Several separate catalogs are aggregated into the PIPESIM* casing Catalog.
The API catalog represents standard casing sizes. The GOST, Tenaris, and
VAM catalogs represent connections.
Outside diameter Outside diameter of the casing.
Inside diameter Inside diameter of the casing.

41
PIPESIM User Guide
Roughness The typical value for the absolute pipe roughness based on the material type.
The default value is 0.001 inches (0.0254 mm).
Weight Weight of the casing per standard length.
Grade Strength rating for the casing material.
Related links:
Casing catalog properties (p.40)
Tubing catalog properties

Use the Tubing catalog to select a specific tubing size and grade after adding tubing to a
wellbore schematic. You can also filter the catalog view.
Catalog Several separate catalogs are aggregated into the PIPESIM* tubing catalog. The
API catalog represents standard tubing sizes. The Tenaris and VAM catalogs
represent connections, not full tubing strings.
OD Outside diameter of the tubing.
ID Inside diameter of the tubing.
Thickness Thickness of the tubing wall.
Weight Weight of the tubing per standard length.
Roughness The typical value for the absolute pipe roughness based on the material type. The
default value is 0.001 inches (0.0254 mm).
Grade Strength rating for the tubing material.
Table 1.5: Tubing Catalog Properties
Note: The tubing catalog is read-only. If you wish to specify your own tubing data, enter the values
directly into the tubing table on the Tubulars tab in the Well editor.
Related links:

42
PIPESIM User Guide
View tubing properties

The Tubing dialog box lists the properties for the casing that you selected in the Tubing
catalog.
Note: The properties in the Tubing dialog box are uneditable.
Catalog Several separate catalogs are aggregated into the PIPESIM* tubing catalog.
The API catalog represents standard tubing sizes. The Tenaris and VAM
catalogs represent connections, not full tubing strings.
Outside diameter Outside diameter of the tubing.
Inside diameter Inside diameter of the tubing.
The default value is 0.001 inches (0.0254 mm).
Weight Weight of the tubing per standard length.
Grade Strength rating for the tubing material.
Related links:
Tubing catalog properties (p.42)
Flowline/riser catalog properties

Use the Flowline/Riser catalog to select a specific size and grade after adding a flowline or
adding a riser to a network diagram. You can also filter the catalog view.
Type The catalog name or manufacturer of the flowline or riser.
Nom. Diameter Nominal diameter of the pipe. Pipe diameter is commonly classified in terms of
nominal diameter, although the actual outside diameter is a different value. For a
given nominal diameter, the outside diameter stays fixed and the well thickness
increases with schedule.
Schedule American National Standards Institute schedule rating, which results in a specific
pipe wall thickness as an indicator of pressure rating. For a given schedule, the
outside diameter increases with nominal diameter, while the wall thickness stays
constant or increases.
OD Outside diameter of the flowline or riser.
ID Inside diameter of the flowline or riser.
Thickness Thickness of the pipe wall (excluding any coatings).
Weight Weight per length of the pipe.

43
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Typical values (p.725)
Add connections (p.226)
View flowline/riser properties

The Flowline dialog box lists the properties for the flowline or riser that you selected in the
Flowlline/riser catalog.
Note: The properties in the Flowline dialog box are uneditable.
Type The catalog name or manufacturer of the flowline or riser.
Schedule American National Standards Institute schedule rating, which results in a
specific pipe wall thickness as an indicator of pressure rating. For a given
schedule, the outside diameter increases with nominal diameter, while the wall
thickness stays constant or increases.
Nom. diameter Nominal diameter of the pipe. Pipe diameter is commonly classified in terms of
nominal diameter, although the actual outside diameter is a different value. For
a given nominal diameter, the outside diameter stays fixed and the well
thickness increases with schedule.
Outside diameter Outside diameter of the flowline or riser.
Inside diameter Inside diameter of the flowline or riser.
Weight Weight per length of the pipe.
Centrifugal compressor catalog properties

Use the Centrifugal compressor catalog to select a compressor object upon adding a
compressor to a network diagram. You can also create new catalog items, edit or delete existing
items, and filter the catalog view.
A centrifugal compressor is a dynamic machine in which one or more rotating impellers, usually
shrouded on the sides, accelerate the gas. This compressor model uses centrifugal compressor
equations to determine the relationship between inlet pressure and temperature, outlet pressure
and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, and efficiency.

44
PIPESIM User Guide
Abs. min. suction pressure Absolute minimum suction pressure
Inter-stage temperature Temperature of the gas between stages
For more information, see Centrifugal Pumps and Compressors (p.576).
Related links:
Reciprocate compressor catalog properties

Use the Reciprocating compressor catalog to select a compressor object upon adding a
compressor to a network diagram. You can also create new catalog items, edit or delete existing
items, and filter the catalog view.
A reciprocating compressor is a positive-displacement machine in which the compressing and
displacing element is a piston having a reciprocating motion within a cylinder. These compressors
always use performance curves that you entered. If you use compressor curves, the compressor
speed and number of stages become additional factors.
Min. suction pressure Absolute minimum suction pressure
Max. capacity Absolute maximum capacity. (The performance curve can be constructed
outside this range. Warning messages show where the operating point is
outside this limit.)
Interstage temperature Temperature of the gas between stages
Speed Speed at which the performance curve is defined
For more information, see Reciprocating Compressor (p.578).
Related links:

45
PIPESIM User Guide
Pump catalog properties

Use the Pump catalog to select a pump upon adding a pump to a network diagram. You can also
create new catalog items, edit or delete existing items, and filter the catalog view.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the pump.
Model Model name or number of the pump.
Min flowrate Minimum recommended flowrate for the performance curve. You can construct
Max flowrate Maximum recommended flowrate for the performance curve. You can construct
Base frequency Frequency at which the performance curve is defined.
Base speed Speed at which the performance curve is defined. This cannot be changed for
the simulation, but you can set a different operating speed in the Pump editor
window. The curve is then adapted for that operating speed.
Base stages Initial point at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for
the simulation.
Stage number If the number of stages is supplied, it is used to adjust the supplied curve
against its specified speed.
Related links:
Add surface equipment using the network diagram (p.161)
Model a temperature change
Model a pressure change
Gas lift valve catalog properties

After you add a valve to a network diagram, you can use the Gas lift valve catalog to select
the specific valve type. By default, the Gas lift valve catalog contains standard valves from
specific manufacturers. You can also add, edit, and delete custom valves as necessary.
Manufacturer Valve maker (for example: Bompet, Daniel, Hughes, Macco, SLB (Camco),
SLB (Merla), Weatherford)
Series Series name or number
Valve type • IPO: Inject-pressure-operated gas lift valve that is designed in a way that
the casing pressure is acting on the larger area of the bellows and thus
are primarily sensitive to the casing pressure. The drop in casing pressure

46
PIPESIM User Guide
which occurs during unloading is used to close the valves in the correct
sequence.
procedure.
• PPO-S: Production Pressure Operated Valve with a spring to pre-load the
bellows and hold the valve stem on the port (for example, a spring is used
as the loading element to cause the valve to close).
tubing string from the annulus. Gas-lift valves frequently are replaced with
dummy valves during intervention work on wells with gas-lift completions.
Valve size Valve outer diameter
Port size Valve port (orifice) diameter
Port area Cross sectional area of the port
Bellow area Cross sectional area of the bellows
Discharge Discharge coefficient for the Thornhill-Craver equation, used to calculate
coefficient valve gas throughput (given injection and production pressure)
DP [Delta P] to Difference between the production pressure when the valve is fully open to
fully open fully closed (for a fixed injection pressure)
Related links:
ESP catalog properties

PIPESIM maintains a database of ESP pump manufacturers and models.

47
PIPESIM User Guide
Manufacturer ESP Pump Manufacturer
For example: ALNAS, CENTRILIFT, ESP, ODI, REDA, XPC
Model ESP Pump Model (every manufacturer has a list of models as stored in the
database)
Diameter ESP diameter
Min flowrate Recommended minimum flowrate for the pump operation
Max flowrate Recommended maximum flowrate for the pump operation
Related links:
PCP catalog properties

After you add a Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) to a network diagram, you can use the PCP
catalog to select the specific pump type. By default, the PCP catalog includes pumps from
specific manufacturers and models. You can also add, edit, and delete custom pumps as
necessary.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the pump (from catalog)
Model Model of the pump (from catalog)
Diameter Diameter of the pump for the model selected (from catalog)
Nominal rate Actual volumetric flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping with no
back-pressure at its discharge (m3/sec or ft3/min)
Survey data catalog properties

You use the Survey data dialog box to enter survey data that consists of the properties defined
in the following table.
Note:
• Oil flowrate, Water flowrate, and Gas flowrate are required parameters.
• GOR and Watercut are read-only fields that will be calculated once the required parameters
are entered.
Name Name of the survey
Type Survey object type (Well or Flowline)

48
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: If Well is selected, the first column in the Profile Data table is Measured
depth. If Flowline is selected, the first column in the table is Measured distance.
Date/Time Date and time of survey data acquisition

Oil flowrate Measured oil flowrate at standard conditions for the surveyed object
Gas flowrate Measured gas flowrate at standard conditions for the surveyed object
Watercut Watercut for the surveyed object
Note: Water cut is calculated from the measured water and oil flowrate values.
GOR Gas oil ratio for the surveyed object
Note: Gas oil ratio is calculated from the measured gas and oil flowrate values.
Comments Survey comments

Table 1.6: Survey data properties
task, nor visible in it. The fluid ratios used by the task and visible in the interface are those defined
in the Fluid manager.
Fluid phases Select 2-phase or 3-phase
Measured depth Measured depth of the surveyed well
This option is set automatically when Well is selected for the Type.
Measured distance Measured distance of the surveyed flowline
This option is set automatically when Flowline is selected for the Type.
Pressure Measured flowing pressure at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Temperature Measured flowing temperature at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Oil holdup Measured flowing oil holdup at the corresponding measured depth or
distance

49
PIPESIM User Guide
phases.
Water holdup Measured flowing water holdup at the corresponding MD
phases.
Liquid holdup Measured flowing liquid holdup at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Gas holdup Measured flowing gas holdup at the corresponding measured depth or
distance
Table 1.7: Profile data properties
Related links:
Gun system properties

The gun catalog is a repository of all Schlumberger gun systems that are available for use in the
Perforation design task (p.39). It is maintained by Schlumberger Rosharon Production Services,
the group charged with all perforating research and development efforts within Schlumberger. This
group, located in Houston, Texas, carries out shaped charged manufacturing and has an American
Petroleum Institute (API) surface perforating qualification site including test wells, surface tubular
loops and a state-of-the-art perforating research laboratory. New perforating gun systems and
shaped charges developed by this group can be added to the PIPESIM gun catalog and simulated
in the Perforation design task. Refer to the topic: Update gun catalog (p.449) for more details.
The catalog has the following properties.
Gun type The name of the gun system
The nomenclature includes the gun OD, gun system type, phasing and shots
per foot.
Charge type Type of shaped charge
Gun OD Outer diameter of the gun
Charge weight Mass of a single perforating charge for the specific gun system

50
PIPESIM User Guide
API RP Edition American Petroleum Institute standard used to test the specific gun system,
and from which the reported API entrance hole and API penetration values in
the catalog were determined
Penetration The models available for each gun system that incorporate the reported API
model penetration value in the catalog for the selected gun system(s), to simulate (in
the Perforation design task) the actual depth of penetration taking into
account the actual wellbore conditions
The options are:
Concrete: The concrete model relies upon API data for estimating downhole
charge performance. It is based on the conversion of surface concrete results
to downhole stressed rock penetrations, but has several shortcomings. Refer
to SPE125020 (p.739) for more details.
Rock: This model is based on improved correlations for the determination of
the depth of penetration in stressed rocks, rather than from concrete targets.
It is based on extensive laboratory experiments and is far more accurate in
modeling the influence of overburden stress, pore pressure and formation
strength on downhole penetration. Refer to SPE127920 (p.743) for more
details. The rock model is not available for all gun systems.
Concrete and Rock: Several gun systems can be used with both the
concrete model and the rock model. The model selection (concrete or rock) is
done in the Gun systems tab, after adding the gun and exiting the catalog.
When both models are available, the Rock model is selected by default,
because it is more accurate. It is recommended that you maintain this default
selection.
Phase angle Angle between the shaped charges
(degrees)
API entrance Entrance hole diameter of the perforation tunnels created in concrete, based
hole on the referenced API RP test edition
API penetration Depth of penetration of the perforation tunnels created in concrete, based on
the referenced API RP test edition
Related links:
Run a perforation design (p.39)
Run a perforation design to generate penetration results (Penetration workflow) (p.384)
Run a perforation design to generate productivity results (Productivity workflow) (p.397)
Perforating gun systems (p.419)
Update gun catalog (p.449)
Manage the catalogs (p.21)

51
PIPESIM User Guide
2
Build physical models
A PIPESIM model is a representation of a flowing system that can be used to simulate fluid flow
through the system. A model can be a single well with or without connected surface piping and
equipment, a pipeline transporting fluid from one point to another, or multiple wells, pipeline, and
surface equipment connected together to represent a large and complex flow network.
PIPESIM modes for building a model include:
• Well-centric mode
• Network-centric mode
For building a single well with connected surface piping and equipment, well-centric mode is
recommended even though it can be modeled in either mode. On the other hand, building a
pipeline model that does not contain a well or building a network model that consists of multiple
wells and a piping system essentially requires that you use the network-centric mode.
Basic model building workflow

Building a PIPESIM model and performing a simulation involves the following high-level steps:
1. Identify the flowing system to select the appropriate mode, well-centric or network-centric.
2. Select units system based on available data.
3. Select fluid mode (black oil, compositional, etc) and define fluid with or without calibration where
applicable.
4. Add physical elements of the model--such as wells, downhole equipment, and surface
equipment--and establish connections between them.
5. Specify basic minimum data for each model element and specify equations/correlations specific
to model element as required.
6. Apply general simulation settings by specifying your choice of flow correlations, heat transfer
options, environmental data, and other desired settings. These can be applied globally or locally
(to specific model elements).
7. Apply advance simulation settings to control calculations and reporting.
8. Select and define reporting templates based on types of models and/or intended analysis.

52
PIPESIM User Guide
9. Validate the model by addressing validation issues, if any are displayed under the Message
Center.
10. Save the model.
After you build models, you can run simulations.
11. Configure simulation tasks (your choice depends on the type of model and configuration) and
perform simulation.
12. Analyze graphical and tabular results.
For more information, see Running Simulations (p.271).
Well-centric model
In well-centric mode, you see only the wells. The Well editor consists of the Wellbore
schematic pane and the tabs that you use to configure details of the well. From the
Surface equipment tab in the Well editor, you can add and edit surface equipment.
Well-centric mode makes it easier to analyze and edit one or more wells. In well-centric
mode, you can run all PIPESIM single-branch operations such as Nodal Analysis, P/T
Profile, or VFP Tables for analysis.
Network-centric model
In network-centric mode, you can view your entire network including wells, flowlines,
risers, and surface equipment displayed over a network diagram. Network-centric mode
allows access to the full Well editor (available in a floating window). Network-centric
mode allows you to resolve issues for the entire network by running a network simulation.
Note: You can run single-branch operations in network-centric mode by selecting a particular
branch inlet such as a well, a source, or a junction source in the network diagram.
You can switch between well-centric and network-centric mode while a workspace is open. On the
Home tab, in the Perspective Gallery, select Well or Network.
Related links:
Create or edit a well model (p.53)
Create or edit a network model (p.155)
2.1 Create or edit a well model

Use the Well editor (which consists of the Wellbore schematic pane and the tabs that you
use to define the well properties) to create new wells and edit existing ones. A well is one of the
ways fluids can enter (via production well) or leave (via injection well) the network.
A well model is a schematic representation of a well. It contains complete information on the well
including wellbore construction, downhole equipment, artificial lift equipment, completion
information as well as surface equipment as applicable. A well can be created from scratch or
using a template well as starting point.

53
PIPESIM User Guide
Important: To avoid possible conflicts, assign a unique name to each piece of equipment within a
well or any branch. This practice also helps you to identify the object definitively while viewing or
analyzing results.

• To create a new well model, on the Workspace tab in the Well group, click New.
• To edit an existing well model, on the Workspace tab in the Well group, click Existing.
• To edit an existing well model, on the Workspace tab in the Recent workspaces group,
click an existing model name.
2. On the General tab, define the well type, its status, and the flow direction.
Field Action
Well name Change the name of the well, if necessary.
Active Indicates whether the well is active.
Note: Simulation tasks cannot be performed on an inactive well. If a network

contains an inactive well, that well and the equipment in its branch are ignored
during network simulation.
Well type Select Production or Injection, based on the intended flow direction. The final
solution depends on system hydraulics.
Check Models a check valve for the well and therefore controls the direction of the flow.
valve Block reverse
setting
The most common setting, Block reverse, ensures that flow is always as
intended; i.e., upward for a production well and downward for an injection well.
Block forward
Block forward blocks flow in the intended direction.
None
No flow block exists, so the flow can go in either direction based on system
hydraulics.
3. Add tubular data.
4. Add a deviation survey.
5. Add downhole equipment, if applicable.
6. Add artificial lift, if applicable.
7. Add heat transfer data.
8. Add completions.
9. Add surface equipment.
10. Create a meaningful title and click Save.

54
PIPESIM User Guide
The default title for new and imported models is New workspace.pips.
Each well model is stored in a single input file. (It is not necessary to store each model in a
separate directory.) The models are stored in binary data files with the .pips extension.
Related links:
Add tubular data (p.55)
Add a deviation survey (p.61)
Add downhole equipment (p.64)
Add artificial lift (p.73)
Add heat transfer data (p.91)
Add completions (p.93)
Add surface equipment using the well editor (p.150)
Work with well tabs and ribbons (p.152)
Interactive wellbore schematic (p.152)
2.1.1 Add tubular data

When you create a new well without using a template, the welbore schematic appears blank
except for the wellhead. You can add casing and tubing to create a simple or detailed wellbore
schematic.
A simple wellbore schematic contains one casing and one tubing. In simple design mode, the
Tubular tab on the Well editor has one table, where you can add the first row for casing and
the second row for tubing detail.
In detailed wellbore schematic you can add multiple casings and tubings. In detailed design mode,
Well editor has two tables, Casings/Liners (which also supports the Openhole type) and
Tubings.
Note: You can add casing or tubing dimensions manually or populate the elements by selecting
from a list of available tubing or casing entries from the Casing catalog or Tubing catalog.
Related links:
Add casing and tubing to a detailed wellbore schematic (p.57)
Add casing and tubing to a simple wellbore schematic

When you do create a new well without using a template, you typically add casing as the first
object and tubing as the second object to the wellbore schematic. Tubing and casing establish the
structure around which other downhole objects can be added.
1. To add casing in the Well editor, perform one of the following actions:

55
PIPESIM User Guide
• On the Tubulars tab, click New (+) in the first row of the table. The casing object also
appears on the Wellbore schematic.
• On the Insert tab in the Tubulars group, drag the Casing icon onto the Wellbore
schematic. Release the mouse button when the casing locks onto the wellhead. The
casing object also appears in the table.
2. To add tubing in the Well editor, perform one of the following actions:
• On the Tubulars tab, click New (+) in the second row of the table. The tubing object also
appears on the Wellbore schematic.
• On the Insert tab in the Tubulars group, drag the Tubing icon onto the Wellbore
schematic. Release the mouse button when the tubing locks into position. The tubing
object also appears in the table.
3. Select Mode: Simple.
4. Select either OD (outside diameter) or Wall thickness to display either the outside diameter or
wall thickness of the casing or the tubing in the table's variable column.
5. In the table, enter the remaining properties for the casing or the tubing.
You can use the default casing or tubing, design your own casing or tubing, or select a pre-
configured item from the Casing catalog or the Tubing catalog by clicking the browse
button in the Catalog column.
Field Description
Name Name of the casing or tubing object that will appear on the Wellbore
schematic.
Bottom MD The measured depth of the bottom of the casing or tubing.
ID The inside diameter of the casing or tubing.
Wall thickness The thickness of the casing or tubing wall. If wall thickness is entered, the
(variable column) outside diameter is calculated based on the inside diameter (ID) and wall
thickness.
OD (variable The outside diameter of the casing and tubing.
column)
Roughness The typical value for the absolute pipe roughness for casing or tubing wall
based on the pipe material and surface finish.
Catalog Opens either the Casing catalog or Tubing catalog from which you
can select a standard casing or tubing string. Selections from the catalog
are populated from the database.
Note: When starting from scratch, the tubular table has no data row but a New (+) sign at the
bottom left lets you add rows for casing and tubing. After you add one casing and one tubing, the
New (+) button is no longer displayed, thus preventing you from adding more rows. To add more
casings and tubings to a detailed wellbore schematic, select Mode: Detailed. You also have the

56
PIPESIM User Guide
option of entering tubing dimensions manually or selecting a specific string from the Casing
catalog or Tubing catalog.
Related links:
Add casing and tubing to a detailed wellbore schematic

You can create a more detailed model with multiple tubings and casings. Detailed models are
typically used when the well contains tapered tubings, liners, and openhole sections.
1. In the Well editor on the Tubulars tab, select Mode: Detailed.
Casing and tubing are separated into two tables and each table allows multiple entries.
2. To add new casings, perform one of the following actions:
• In the Casings/Liners table, click New (+). The casing string also appears on the Wellbore
schematic.
• On the Insert tab in the Tubulars group, drag the Casing icon onto the Wellbore
schematic. Release the mouse button when the casing locks onto the wellhead.
3. To add new tubings, perform one of the following:
• In the Tubings table, click New (+). The tubing string also appears on the Wellbore
schematic.
• On the Insert tab in the Tubulars group, drag the Tubing icon onto the Wellbore
schematic. Release the mouse button when the tubing locks into position.
The tubing string also appears in the table.
4. In the Casings/Liners table, for each casing item, assign the Section type (Casing, Liner, or
Open hole), add a unique Name, and specify the measured depth (From MD, which is always
zero, and To MD) depending on the Section type.
Note: The casing table is governed by certain rules listed below. Deviating from these rules may
invalidate the model.
a. A new string when added is the default casing; however, you can change it to another type.
b. You can add multiple casings.
c. Casings always start from the wellhead; therefore, you cannot edit the From MD starting
depth.
d. You can add multiple liners.
e. A liner is always referenced to the innermost casing/liner as its parent if the starting depth
(From MD) of a liner has multiple casings/liners around it.

57
PIPESIM User Guide
f. A liner must always fit inside its parent casing or liner.

g. Liner starting depth (From MD) must also fall between the starting depth (From MD) and
bottom depth (To MD) of the parent casing/liner.
h. Bottom depth (To MD) of a liner must be below the bottom depth of the parent casing/liner.
i. An open hole section cannot overlap any existing casing/liner. It must always start from the
bottom depth (To MD) of the previous casing/liner at the deepest depth.
j. Open holes are sometimes used as an alternative for a slotted liner.
5. In the respective tables, enter the remaining properties for either the casing or the tubing.
You can use the default casing or tubing, design your own casing or tubing , or select a pre-
configured item from the Casing catalog or the Tubing catalog by clicking the browse
button in the Catalog column.
Field Description
Section Type Applies to the Casings/Liners table only. Available types are Casing, Liner,
or Openhole.
Name Name of the casing, liner, openhole, or tubing objects. The name is displayed
in the Wellbore Schematic.
From MD From measured depth (that is, the depth at the start of a casing or tubing
string). Applies to Casing/Liner table only.
To MD To measured depth (MD) is the bottom of a casing or tubing string.
ID The inside diameter of the casing or tubing.
Wall thickness The thickness of the casing or tubing wall. If wall thickness is entered, the
outside diameter is calculated based on (ID) and wall thickness.
OD (variable The outside diameter of the casing and tubing.
column)
Note: For a tubing inside an open hole, the OD value can equal the ID value
of the open hole.
Roughness The typical value for the absolute pipe roughness based on the pipe material
and surface finish. For openhole section, this is the formation wall in contact
with the well.
Catalog Opens either the Casing catalog or Tubing catalog from which you can
select a standard casing or tubing string stored in the Pipesim* database. For
an openhole section, no catalog option is available.
Note: If you are creating a detailed wellbore design and you change your Mode selection from
Detailed to Simple, all casing and tubing entries except the first casing and the first tubing will be
deleted.

58
PIPESIM User Guide
6. Highlight a row in the Casings/Liners or Tubings table, and then in the Casing, Liner,
Openhole, or Tubing group, enter the additional properties.
Note: These properties apply only to perforation design tasks.
Field Description
Name Name of the casing or tubing
Grade Strength rating for the tubing or casing material
Note: This option is available only for casings, liners, and tubings.
Density Material density for tubing or casing in mass per unit of volume
Note: This option is available only for casings, liners, and tubings.
Borehole diameter Diameter of the borehole (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement
Note: This option is available only for casings, liners, and open holes.
7. Under Annulus Material, define the properties for each casing, liner, and tubing by performing
one or all of the following tasks depending on the well configuration.
Note: Annulus material properties apply only to perforation design tasks.
• efine properties for a casing:

To d
1. In the Casings/Liners table, select the casing.
2. Under Annulus Material, in the Cement top field, enter the measured depth (MD) of the
top of the cement of the casing.
3. Optional: Modify the Cement density default value.
4. If the cement top is below the MD of the wellbore, in the Fluid above cement list, select
the annular fluid that is between the cement top and the top of the wellbore.
5. Optional: Modify the Fluid density default value.
• To define properties for a liner:
1. In the Casings/Liners table, select the liner.
2. Under Annulus Material, in the Cement top field, enter the measured depth (MD) of the
top of the cement of the liner.
3. Optional: Modify the Cement density default value.
4. If the cement top is below the MD of the liner, in the Fluid above cement list, select the
annular fluid that is between the cement top and the top of the liner.

59
PIPESIM User Guide

• efine properties for a tubing:
To d
1. In the Tubings table, select the tubing.
2. Under Annulus Material, in the Fluid list, select the annular fluid.
Field Description
Cement Measured depth (MD) of the top of the cement column surrounding the casing or
top liner
Note:
• The software automatically populates the Cement density based on the
entered Cement top value.
• If the cement top of the casing is below the MD of the wellbore, you must
select the type of annular fluid that is above the cement.
• If the cement top of the liner is below the MD of the liner, you must select the
type of annular fluid that is above the cement.
Cement Mass of the cement per unit volume for the casing or liner
density The software automatically enters a default value when you enter the Cement top
value. You can edit the default value.
Fluid Type of annular fluid in the wellbore above the Cement top of the casing or liner
above • For casings, this option appears only when the cement top MD is below the
cement wellbore MD.
• For liners, this option appears only when the cement top MD is below the MD
of the liner.
Fluid Type of annular fluid in the tubing
The software automatically populates the Fluid density based on the selected
annular fluid.
Fluid Mass of the annular fluid per unit volume for the casing, liner, or tubing
density The software automatically enters a default value when you select the type of fluid.
You can edit the default value.
Related links:

60
PIPESIM User Guide
2.1.2 Add a deviation survey

Deviation surveys record the trajectory of the wellbore as drilled.
Wells may be deviated for many different reasons, such as:
• To increase exposure to producing zones
• To intersect a larger number of fractures
• To follow a complex geological structure
The directional change can be intentional, as part of a drilling plan; or the change can be a slight
divergence from the plan, in which case, the next tubing section added to the wellbore can begin to
correct the path.
1. In the Well editor, on the Deviation survey tab, enter the survey data, which are common
to all survey types.
Field Action
Survey Type Available options are: Vertical, 2D or 3D. If a well is vertical, no deviation survey is
required. Choice of 2D or 3D survey depends on available survey data.
Depth Enter the upper point in a well from which depth is measured (the selected
reference reference point represents zero depth).
Original RKB
rotary kelly bushing level during drilling
RKB
rotary kelly bushing level
GL
ground level
MSL
mean sea level
THF
tubing head flange level
Wellhead Enter the depth from the depth reference point.
depth For example: if the deviation survey is measured from a kelly bushing 16 ft above
the wellhead, defining a Wellhead depth of 16 ft will ensure that all
measurements relative to the Kelly bushing are correct. In other words, the 16-ft
section above the wellhead will not be included in the well profile used for
simulation.
Bottom The deepest point at which casing, liner, or openhole sections are defined in the
depth Tubulars tab. This is a read-only field.
2. If you selected 2D or 3D for the Survey type, the Deviation survey tab displays additional
properties and a table to define wellbore trajectory.
a. Define calculation options based on available data.

61
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Action
Dependent Available options are: MD, TVD or Angle
parameter The dependent parameter is one that is unknown and needs to be calculated
based on available values of others. A typical 2D survey has MD and TVD data
available making angle the dependent parameter.
Calculation Available options are: Tangential method or Minimum curvature method.
method When the Dependent parameter is MD or Angle, the Calculation method is
automatically set to Tangential method; however, with TVD as Dependent
parameter, both these methods are available to select.
Tangential method
Tubing/casing length is calculated, assuming straight pipe segments between
survey points.
Minimum curvature method
The two straight line segments of the tangential method are replaced with a
circular arc. This is accomplished by applying a ratio factor, based on the
amount of bend in the well path between the two points (the dogleg angle).
b. In the Deviation survey table, enter the new tubing segments that will divert the wellbore
trajectory from true vertical. Click New (+) to add additional rows as required.
Field Action
MD Enter the measured depth (MD) at any survey point in the well measured
relative to Depth reference.
If the well deviates from true vertical, MD will always be greater than TVD.
MD must be entered in the ascending order as you go down the table.
TVD Enter the true vertical depth (TVD), which is the actual vertical depth of the
tubing from the depth reference.
Horizontal Displays the calculated cumulative horizontal displacement of the well.
displacement
Angle Enter the angle deviation from true vertical.
Angle is usually the Dependent parameter in a 2D survey.
Azimuth (used in 3D surveys only)
Enter the angle of the wellbore direction relative to due north, as projected
perpendicular to a horizontal reference plane.
By definition, if the wellbore direction is due north, the azimuth is 0°. From
there, East = 90°, South = 180°, and West = 270°.
Max dogleg (used in 3D surveys only)
severity Enter the maximum change of direction allowed over a specified length.

62
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: By default, the data appears in tabular format. Each row in the table represents survey data
for a new wellbore section (indicating a change in borehole trajectory). Click the button below the
table to switch between tabular format and chart format.
c. Click New (+) in the Deviation survey table to add a row for each new wellbore section
(indicating a new borehole trajectory).
Related links:
Azimuth (p.63)
Measured depth and true vertical depth (p.63)
Azimuth
This figure illustrates how azimuth is determined. For drilling purposes, azimuth refers to a point
below the horizon, projected upward.
Related links:
Measured depth and true vertical depth

This graphic shows the difference between Measured Depth (MD) and True Vertical Depth (TVD).
These are only equivalent when a well is completely vertical.

63
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
2.1.3 Add downhole equipment

You can drag downhole equipment directly onto the Wellbore schematic, or you can add
equipment using the table in the Downhole equipment tab.
Note: Certain types of equipment, such as chokes and separators, can be used both in the
wellbore and on the surface.
To add downhole equipment:

1. Open the Well editor, and then perform one of the following actions:
• On the Insert tab in the Downhole equipment group, drag an equipment icon to the
appropriate position on the Wellbore schematic.
Downhole equipment appears under wellbore and at the same time it also gets added to the
equipment table under Downhole equipment tab.
Important: When you add specific downhole equipment like artificial lift equipment or a
completion, it is added to the respective tables under artificial lift tab or completions tab.

64
PIPESIM User Guide
• Click the Downhole equipment tab, and click New (+) in the installed equipment table.
Equipment is added to the table and also displays in the Wellbore schematic.
2. In the table, complete the following fields for the newly added equipment.
Field Action
Equipment Select the equipment type. Available types of equipment are: Choke, Packer,
Separator, Sliding sleeve, SSSV, Tubing plug, User Equipment (available only after
User Equipment is created), and Engine Keyword Tool.
Name Enter a unique name for the equipment to avoid any conflict with other equipments
and make it easier to identify the equipment in result table.
Active Select this check box to activate the equipment.
In the Wellbore schematic, deactivated equipment is outlined in red. If the check
box is cleared, that equipment will be ignored during simulation.
MD Enter the measured depth at which the equipment is installed.
If you dragged the equipment icon onto the Wellbore schematic, MD is
approximated. Enter a more accurate value, if necessary.
3. Click a row in the installed equipment table to display specific properties for that equipment
type. This displays equipment editor for the selected equipment below the table.
4. In the properties editor section, enter any additional properties for the equipment.
Related links:
Choke properties (p.65)
Packer (p.68)
Separator (downhole) (p.68)
Sliding sleeve (p.69)
Sub-surface safety valve (p.70)
Tubing plug (p.70)
Engine Keyword Tool (p.72)
Choke properties
A choke is a device that limits flow by mechanically constricting the cross-sectional area through
which fluid flows. The fluid velocity increases through the constriction and a pressure loss occurs.
Important: Downhole chokes and surface chokes use the same properties, although they are
created differently and appear differently in the Well schematic.
A surface choke is not part of wellbore schematic. It appears on surface schematic as below:

65
PIPESIM User Guide
Choke properties
Name Unique name of the choke.
Active Select this check box to activate the choke so that it will be used during simulation.
Clear the check box to deactivate and the choke will be bypassed during simulation.
General choke properties
Subcritical Select a correlation from the list. (All correlations except Mechanistic and
Correlation API14B require hydrocarbon liquids at Stock tank conditions.)
Critical Select a correlation from the list. Can be used to set the critical flowrate. This
Correlation may not match the subcritical flow at the critical pressure ratio, so the
subcritical flow correlation is adjusted to ensure that the flow is correct at the
critical pressure.
Bean size Enter the diameter of the choke bean. The bean size represents the diameter
of the available flow area assuming that the constriction is circular.
Critical pressure Used to determine the downstream pressure when critical flow occurs in the
ratio choke. You can specify a value or have it calculated. If you select Calculate,
the calculations are performed using the Ashford-Pierce method.
Tolerance Tolerance for identification of critical flow conditions (given as a percentage or
fraction)
Upstream pipe ID Enter the inside diameter of the pipe upstream of the choke.
Measured depth Downhole location of the choke
Advanced choke properties
Gas Phase flow (Used in the Mechanistic correlation) Flow coefficient for the gas
coefficient phase. For API14B compatibility, set this to 0.9.
Liquid Phase flow (Used in the Mechanistic correlation) Flow coefficient for the liquid
Table 2.1: Flow coefficients

66
PIPESIM User Guide
Discharge Used to calculate the flow coefficients.
coefficient
Fluid heat capacity Normally calculated, but can be specified. The valid range is 0.7 to 2.
ratio (Cp/Cv) Typically it is 1.26 for a natural gas, 1.4 for a diatomic gas. It is used to
calculate the Critical pressure ratio if that is set to 0.
Y at critical point Gas expansion factor at critical flow. Normally, it is calculated, but it can be
specified. The valid range is 0.5 to 1. It is used to modify the pressure drop
equation to allow for gas compressibility.
Table 2.2: Choke parameters
Flowrate Flowrate to identify critical flow.
Pressure ratio Pressure ratio to identify critical flow.
Sonic upstream velocity Sonic upstream velocity to identify critical flow.
Sonic downstream velocity Sonic downstream velocity to identify critical flow.
Table 2.3: Identification of Critical and Supercritical Flow
The choke model calculates the pressure ratio across the choke for the current flowrate. The
pressure ratio calculated is then categorized as subcritical, critical, or supercritical based on criteria
defined by the user. Use the check boxes to define the criteria for identification of critical and
supercritical flow. Note the following behaviors:
• Clearing all the check boxes prevents identification of critical and supercritical flow, so flow is
always subcritical. Do this for API14B compatibility.
• If more than one check box is selected, critical flow will be identified by any of the selected
criteria that are met.
Adjust sub-critical Adjust subcritical correlation to match flowrate predicted by critical
correlation correlation.
Print detailed calculations Detailed choke calculation output. It appears on your terminal
screen and on the primary output page.
Table 2.4: Miscellaneous options
For more information, see Choke (p.562).
Related links:

67
PIPESIM User Guide
Packer
A packer is a downhole device used in almost every well to isolate the annulus from the production
conduit, enabling controlled production, injection, or treatment. A typical packer assembly
incorporates a means of securing the packer against the casing or liner wall (such as a slip
arrangement), and a means of creating a reliable hydraulic seal to isolate the annulus (typically by
means of an expandable elastomeric element). A packer is generally placed close to the foot of the
tubing, shortly above the production zone.
The role of the packer in PIPESIM* is simply to define the flow path of the produced or injected
fluid. No simulation is performed on the packer itself.
On the Wellbore schematic, a packer appears as follows:
Name Unique name for the packer
Active Status of the packer. If unchecked, the packer will be bypassed and cannot
block flow.
Measured depth Downhole location of the packer
Related links:
Separator (downhole)
Downhole separator discards the separated stream while allowing the primary fluid to pass through
it. Typically downhole separators are used upstream of certain equipment like ESP, Rod-pump,
and so forth.
Name A unique name for the Separator
Active Status of the Separator. If unchecked, the separator will be bypassed and allow
fluid pass through it without separation.
Discarded Phase to be removed (Gas, Water, or Liquid)
stream
Efficiency Amount of material (measured in a percentage or fraction) removed from the
product stream at in stiu condition. For example, a water separator with 90%
efficiency removes 90% of the water. From the point downstream of the
separator, the flow model reflects only the remaining fluids.
MD Downhole location of the separator

68
PIPESIM User Guide
In the wellbore, you can use a separator to remove a single phase (gas, water, or liquid) from the
fluid stream. (On the surface, you can use a two-phase or three-phase separator.)
On the Wellbore schematic, a downhole separator appears as follows:
Related links:
Sliding sleeve
A sliding sleeve is a device that can be operated to provide a flow path between the production
conduit and the annulus. It uses a system of ports that can be opened or closed by a sliding
component that is generally controlled and operated by slickline tool string.
The role of the sliding sleeve in PIPESIM* is simply to define the flow path of the produced or
injected fluid. No simulation, for example as in pressure loss, is performed on the sliding sleeve
itself.
On the Wellbore schematic, an open sliding sleeve appears as follows:
On the Wellbore schematic, a closed sliding sleeve appears as follows:
Name A unique name for the Sliding sleeve
Active/Open Status of the Sliding sleeve. If the sliding sleeve is open, fluid may flow from
the tubing to the annulus or vice versa. If closed, no fluid may flow between
the tubing an annulus.
Measured depth Downhole location of the sliding sleeve

69
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: For a sliding sleeve to convey fluids from a completion through the tubing, the sliding sleeve
must be positioned at the exact same depth as the completion.
For more information, see Multilayer Completions (p.146).
Related links:
Sub-surface safety valve

A sub-surface safety valve (SSSV) is a safety device installed in the upper wellbore to shut off
production in an emergency, particularly for offshore wells.
Pressure drop is calculated across the SSSV using the same equation used to model chokes, and
is generally sub-critical flow.
On the Wellbore schematic, a sub-surface safety valve appears as follows:
Name A unique name for the SSSV
Active Status of the SSSV. If unchecked, the SSSV will be bypassed during
simulation.
Bean size Size of the passage available for flow
Measured depth Downhole location of the SSSV
For more information, see Choke Subcritical Flow Correlations. (p.565)
Related links:
Tubing plug
A tubing plug prevents flow through tubing in a wellbore.
The role of the tubing plug in PIPESIM* is simply to define the flow path of the produced or injected
fluid. No simulation is performed on the tubing plug itself.
On the Wellbore schematic, a tubing plug appears as follows:

70
PIPESIM User Guide
Name A unique name for the tubing plug
Measured depth Downhole location of the top of tubing plug (especially when length is
provided)
Related links:


3. Click Register.
6. Click Open.


71
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Plugins (p.8)

3. Click Register.
6. Click Open.
Engine Keyword Tool
You can insert the engine keywords tool in a well or as surface equipment. The Engine Keyword
Equipment writes to the engine input file the keywords inline and entered by you. Engine keywords
may also be entered for all single branches or for the entire network under Home » Simulation
settings » Advanced » Engine keywords. Refer to the Advanced properties (p.8) topic for more
details.
To use the Engine keywords tool, perform the following steps:
1. Double click a well to open the Well Editor.
2. Drag and drop the Engine keywords equipment on the well.
The Downhole equipment tab is active to include the engine keywords parameters.

72
PIPESIM User Guide
3. Click the Downhole equipment tab and update (if necessary) the engine keywords
parameters.
Name Name of the engine surface equipment
Active You can specify if the unit is active or not
Measured depth The depth of the equipment in the well
Note: The Measured depth parameter is only available in the Well Editor.
Engine keywords Enter the keyword used by the engine

4. For more information, see Keyword Reference (p.751).
Related links:
Advanced properties (p.8)
2.1.4 Add artificial lift

Artificial lift refers to the use of artificial means to increase the flow of liquids, such as crude oil or
water, from a production well.
Generally this is achieved by the use of a mechanical device inside the well or by decreasing the
weight of the hydrostatic column by injecting gas into the liquid some distance down the well.
Artificial lift is needed in the well when there is insufficient pressure in the reservoir to lift the
produced fluid to the surface, but often used in naturally flowing wells to boost flowrate. PIPESIM
provides options to model several types of artificial lift equipments as indicated below:
• Gas Lift (fixed injection port or injection valve)
• ESP (Electrical Submersible Pump)
• PCP (Progressive Cavity Pump)
• Rod Pump
You can model any one of these artificial lift systems in a PIPESIM well or combine two or more of
these systems to create a composite lift well.
Related links:
Add a gas lift injection port (p.74)
Add a gas lift injection valve (p.76)
Add an ESP (p.82)

73
PIPESIM User Guide
Add a progressive cavity pump (PCP) (p.84)

Add a rod pump (p.87)
Add a gas lift injection port

You can define gas lift injection ports for modeling gas lift systems. Gas lift is the process of raising
or lifting fluid from a well by injecting gas down the well through the tubing, casing, annulus, or
riser. Injected gas aerates the wellbore fluid making it lighter and thus significantly reduces back
pressure to the producing reservoir.
PIPESIM models provide a simplified form of continuous flow Gas Lift using single or multiple gas
lift injection ports installed at known locations in the wellbore. Each injection port is assigned with a
fixed quantity of injection gas. This simplified method assumes that sufficient injection pressure is
available, and that the port size is suitable to fully inject the quantity of lift gas specified at each
port.
Note: PIPESIM only models the continuous injection process.
1. In the Well editor, click the Artificial lift tab.

2. Select Fixed injection ports.
When you add a Gas lift object to the well, by default it will be a fixed injection port. If you
change your selection to Injection valve system, all added gas lift objects will become
injection valves. The depth, CHP, CHT, and fluid properties are retained.
3. Perform one of the following steps to add a gas lift injection port:
• Click New (+) at the bottom of the gas lift table.
• On the INSERT tab, in the Artificial lift group, drag the Gas lift icon to the well tubing in the
schematic.
A row that represents the gas lift injection port is added to the Gas Lift table. In the Gas lift
column, by default the gas lift port name is given the prefix GLI. This name is editable.
4. Optional: To compute the Alhanati instability factors, select Alhanati stability check.
Note: To use the Alhanati instability check, you can have only one fixed injection port.
a. In the gas lift table enter the Port size properties.

PIPESIM calculates the pressure drop across the valve and the Joule-Thomson temperature
change.
b. Under Injection Gas Surface Condition, enter the Surface injection pressure and
Surface injection temperature properties.
5. Enter the gas lift injection port properties.
Field Action
Gas lift Enter the name of the gas lift injection point. A unique name for each gas lift
injection point is required.

74
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Action
Active Select this check box to indicate the injection point is in operation. If the check box
is cleared, no lift gas will be injected through the port.
MD Depth (MD) of the specified gas lift injection port
Injection Quantity of injection gas through an injection port can be specified in one of the
quantity following ways:
options Injection gas rate
Actual (fixed) amount of lift gas to be injected. PIPESIM always injects this
amount of gas at the specified depth, assuming that the port size and injection
pressure is suitable to inject the specified quantity.
Set GLR to
Injection rate that is calculated to ensure that the stock tank gas lift ratio of the
tubing fluid downstream of the injection point is equal to this value. If this value
is less than the gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid upstream of the injection,
PIPESIM removes the gas.
Increase GLR by
Injection rate that is calculated where the stock tank gas lift ratio of the tubing
fluid is increased by an amount equal to this value.
Injection Quantity (amount) of lift gas to be injected at the port
quantity You can inject either a fixed gas volume or a volume computed based on a
resultant mixed stream gas liquid ratio.
Injection Unit of measure for the lift gas quantity based on the selected Injection quantity
quantity unit option
Port size Diameter of the gas lift port (orifice)
This option is only available when Alhanati stability check is selected.
6. Under Gas Lift, specify Gas Properties of the injected gas in one of the following ways:
• To enter a specific gravity associated with a fluid, select Specify and enter the value.
• To specify a fluid model, select Use fluid model and select a fluid from the Fluid list.
When you select a fluid model, gas specific gravity with be used from the specified fluid
model.
Note: You can create a new fluid, or edit an existing one.
7. To add multiple injection ports, repeat the preceding steps.
Related links:
Gas lift instability (p.635)

75
PIPESIM User Guide
Add a gas lift injection valve

When you add gas lift valves to a well, PIPESIM* calculates the injection depth based on given
injection parameters. The actual gas throughput for each valve is calculated based on the injection
pressure, production pressure, valve details, and valve status. For this operation, details of the gas
lift system are required (valve size, Ptro, etc.). The valve throttling response is modeled (based on
the bellows load rate of the valve).
During the Gas lift design task, you can install the gas lift valves created by the design simulation
into the well model. This operation automatically deletes any existing ports or valves in the well
model.
2. Select Injection valve system.
When you add a Gas lift object to the well, it will be an injection valve. If you change your
selection to Fixed injection ports, all added gas lift objects will become fixed injection ports.
The depth, CHP, CHT, and fluid properties are retained.
3. Perform one of the following steps to add a gas lift injection valve:
• Click New (+) at the bottom of the gas lift table.
• On the INSERT tab, in the Artificial lift group, drag the Gas lift icon to the well tubing in the
schematic.
A row that represents the gas lift injection valve is added to the Gas Lift table. In the Gas lift
column, by default the gas lift valve name is given the prefix GLI. This name is editable.
4. In the Gas Lift table, select the valve's row and enter the gas lift injection valve properties by
clicking the ellipsis button and selecting a specific valve from the Gas lift valve catalog.
The gas lift table displays the properties of the selected valve.
Field Action
Gas lift Name of the gas lift injection valve
This field is editable. A unique name for each gas lift injection valve is
required.
Active Select this check box to indicate the injection valve is in operation.
If the check box is cleared, no lift gas will be injected through the valve.
MD Depth (MD) of the specified gas lift injection valve
This field is editable.
Manufacturer Valve maker (for example: Bompet, Daniel, Hughes, Macco, SLB (Camco),
SLB (Merla), Weatherford)
Series Series name or number
Valve type • IPO: Inject-pressure-operated gas lift valve that is designed in a way
that the casing pressure is acting on the larger area of the bellows and
thus are primarily sensitive to the casing pressure. The drop in casing
pressure which occurs during unloading is used to close the valves in
the correct sequence.

76
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Action
procedure.
• PPO-S: Production Pressure Operated Valve with a spring to pre-load
the bellows and hold the valve stem on the port (for example, a spring
is used as the loading element to cause the valve to close).
tubing string from the annulus. Gas-lift valves frequently are replaced
with dummy valves during intervention work on wells with gas-lift
completions.
Port size Diameter of the gas lift valve (orifice)
Ptro Test rack opening pressure
You are required to enter a value in this field.
Discharge Discharge coefficient for the Thornhill-Craver equation, used to calculate
coefficient valve gas throughput (given injection and production pressure)
DP [Delta P] to Difference between the production pressure when the valve is fully open to
fully open fully closed (for a fixed injection pressure)
5. In the Ptro field, enter the test rack opening pressure.
6. Optional: In the MD, Port size, and DP to fully open columns, select the unit of measurement
as needed.
7. Select Active to indicate that the injection valve is in operation, and then enter the gas lift
properties.
a. Specify Gas Properties of the injected gas in one of the following ways:
• To enter a specific gravity associated with a fluid, select Specify and enter the value.
• To specify a fluid model, select Use fluid model and select a fluid from the Fluid list.
Note: You can create a new fluid, or edit an existing one.
b. Specify the Injection Gas Surface Condition properties.

77
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Action
Target injection Enter the target injection gas flowrate for design used by the software to
rate calculate the production pressure curve and operating valve sizing
Note: This option is used only by the Gas lift design and Gas lift
diagnostics tasks.
Surface injection Enter the gas lift injection surface pressure

pressure
diagnostics tasks.
Surface injection Enter the surface temperature of the injection gas

temperature
diagnostics tasks.
Minimum valve Minimum difference between injection and production pressure required for
injection DP valve placement
Valves can not be placed deeper if the pressure difference is less than this
value.
Note: This option is used only by the Gas lift Deepest injection point and
Gas lift design tasks.
8. Under Valve Performance Data, enter the following information.

a. Enter the Tuning factor value in a range of 0.2 to 5.
b. Enter the Test rack temperature value in a range of 40º F to 100° F.
c. Select the Nitrogen temp. correction option.
Field Description
Tuning factor Factor/multiplier to the Thornhill-Craver equation that adjusts the performance of
the valve (valve throughput)
The default tuning factor is 1.
When the tuning factor is 1, no adjustment is made to the valve throughput when
you run a gas lift Fixed injection pressure or Fixed injection rate diagnostics
task.
Note:

78
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Description
• If you know the measured values of CHP (fixed injection pressure) and
Qinj (fixed injection rate), you can run a Fixed injection pressure and
injection rate diagnostics task and the software will automatically
calculate the tuning factor for you.
• During the Fixed injection pressure and injection rate diagnostics task,
you can publish this calculated tuning factor to the well used in the task.
Then, the Tuning factor field displays the software-calculated value.
• This option is used only by the Gas lift diagnostics task.
Test rack Temperature that is maintained in the test rack

temperature The default value is 60º F.
Generally, the temperature is maintained at 60° F using a water bath. However,
in some circumstances the temperature may not be controlled. In this case, the
temperature is typically ambient temperature in the shop.
Note: This option is used only by the gas lift design and gas lift diagnostics tasks.
Nitrogen Nitrogen temperature correction factor (Ct) used to more accurately calculate
temp. valve dome pressures
correction • Gas lift design calculations – Ct is used to compute the test rack dome
pressure given the valve operating pressure, valve operating temperature,
and test rack temperature.
• Gas lift diagnostics calculations – Ct is used to calculate the valve
operating dome pressure given the known test rack dome pressure and
test rack temperature.
DAK-Sutton (default)
The DAK-Sutton (2014) method is more rigorous. Sutton tuned the
coefficients in the original Dranchuk & Abou-Kassem (DAK) Equation of
State for gas to match pure nitrogen properties calculated by REFPROP.
The resulting modification allows accurate calculation of nitrogen gas
compressibility for pressures up to 15,000 psia and temperatures up to 400º
F.
Winkler-Eads
The Winkler-Eads (1989) method is a composite of two empirical curve fit
equations to match Nitrogen Z factor measured data. The first equation is
valid up to 1238 psia and the second equation is valid over the range of 1238
psia to 3000 psia, with temperature ranges up to 300º F. Despite these
limitations, Sutton (2014) reported that the Winkler-Eads method gives
reasonable results up to 5000 psia and 400º F.

79
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Description
The correction factor provided by Winkler-Eads provides a way to convert
the dome pressure at the valve depth to the equivalent test rack opening
pressure (Ptro) and vice-versa.
9. To add multiple injection valves, repeat the preceding steps.
Related links:
Run gas lift diagnostics (p.373)
Run gas lift design (p.357)
Select a gas lift injection valve

When you add a gas lift injection valve to well tubing, you must select the valve from the Gas lift
valve catalog. Selecting the valve from the catalog populates the Gas Lift table in the Artificial
lift tab with the valve properties.
Note: If the valve that you need to use is not listed in the catalog, you can use the Catalogs option
on the Home tab in the Application options group to add the valve to the catalog.
1. In the Gas Lift table, highlight the row for the valve for which you need to define properties.
2. In the rightmost column in the table, click the Use catalog ellipsis button.
3. In the Gas lift valve catalog, select the valve that you want to use, and then click OK.
Related links:
Gas lift valve catalog properties (p.46)


80
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Click Register.
6. Click Open.

Related links:
Plugins (p.8)

3. Click Register.
6. Click Open.

81
PIPESIM User Guide

Add an ESP
The electric submersible pump (ESP) is perhaps the most versatile of the artificial lift methods. The
ESP comprises a downhole pump, electric power cable, motor, and surface controls. In a typical
application, the downhole pump is suspended on a tubing string hung on the wellhead and is
submerged in the well fluid. The pump is close-coupled to a submersible electric motor that
receives power through the power cable and surface controls. The ESP has the broadest
producing range of any artificial lift methods.
To simulate an ESP, PIPESIM* maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which
you can select. For each model the diameter, minimum and maximum flow rate, and base speed
are provided. A performance plot of the ESP is also available.
• Click New (+) at the bottom of the table and then click ESP as the Equipment to be used for
the artificial lift.
• Drag the ESP icon in the Artificial lift group to the well tubing in the schematic.
3. Click the row in the table for the equipment added above to display the properties for that
equipment.
4. Configure the appropriate properties.
For more information, see Electric Submersible Pumps (ESP) (p.601).
Related links:
ESP properties (p.82)
ESP properties
The following tables explain the different ESP properties.
General properties
Name Name of the Electrical Submersible Pump. A unique name is required.
Active Specifies whether the pump is in operation. If inactive, the pump is bypassed
during simulation.
Measured depth Depth of the specified ESP (MD)

82
PIPESIM User Guide
Performance data properties
Manufacturer Pump manufacturer (from catalog).
Model Model name or number of the pump (from catalog).
Note: To select an ESP from the catalog, select the catalog button and
choose the appropriate manufacturer and model. List of pump displayed is
automatically filtered based on casing inside diameter at pump location and
also the operating flowrate and operating frequency you specified.
Diameter Diameter of the pump for the model selected from catalog
Min flowrate Minimum recommended flowrate for pump selected from catalog
Max flowrate Maximum recommended flowrate for the pump selected
Base frequency The frequency used for the base performance curve (generally 60 Hz for
ESPs).
Operating The frequency at which the pump motor is expected to run.
frequency
Operating speed The actual operating speed of the pump in RPM or cycles per minute. For
both Operating frequency and Operating speed, if one is specified, the
other is calculated.
Note: The operating speed is adjusted to the operating frequency based on

the Pump speed factor defined in Simulation Settings in the Advanced tab
under Miscellaneous options.
Stages The actual number of stages of the ESP. This can be selected from a drop-
down list of available stages (stored in catalog) or entered manually.
Head factor Allows the pump head to be adjusted (default = 1).
Flowrate factor Allows the pump flowrate to be adjusted.
Power factor Allows the pump power requirement to be adjusted.
Calculation options properties
Viscosity All pump performance curves are based on water systems. This option
correction corrects for oil viscosity.
Gas separator Indicates whether a gas separator is installed. If checked, a gas separator
present will be installed upstream of ESP. Separated gas will be discarded.

83
PIPESIM User Guide
Separator The efficiency of the gas separator. This indicates the amount of free gas that
efficiency is removed. For example, a 90% efficiency indicates 90% of free gas at pump
intake condition will be discarded.
Stage by stage Stage by stage calculation is more rigorous that takes into account losses
calculation between stages of ESP and therefore gives realistic results across the pump
Performance curve and variable speed curve tabs

• To change the data format from a chart to a table, click the table-shaped View data in a table
button beneath the plot, or right-click the chart and click View table.
• To change the data format from a table to a chart, click the chart-shaped View data in a chart
button beneath the table, or right-click the table and click View chart.
Related links:
Add an ESP (p.82)
Guidelines for Calibrating Well Models (p.453)
Add a progressive cavity pump (PCP)

A PCP is a special type of rotary positive displacement pump sometimes referred to as a single-
screw pump. PCP performance is based on the volume of fluid displaced through the pump.
• Click New (+) at the bottom of the table and then click PCP as the Equipment to be used
for the artificial lift.
• Drag the PCP icon in the Artificial lift group to the well tubing in the schematic.
3. Click the row in the table for the artificial lift added in step 2 to display the properties for that
equipment.
4. Configure the appropriate properties on each tab.
Related links:
PCP properties (p.84)
PCP properties
The following tables describe the different PCP properties.
General properties
Name Name of the PCP. A unique name is required.

84
PIPESIM User Guide
Active Specifies whether the pump is in operation. If unchecked, the pump is
bypassed during simulation.
Measured depth Depth of the PCP in the wellbore (MD).
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the pump (from catalog).
Model Model of the pump (from catalog).
Diameter Diameter of the pump for the model selected (from catalog).
Nominal rate The actual volumetric flowrate that the pump would produce if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m3/sec or ft3/min).
Base speed The rotating speed at which the performance curve is defined.
Operating speed The actual operating speed of the pump in RPM (Revolutions Per Minute).
Top drive Specifies whether the drive is a top-drive or a bottom-drive. This is used for
torque calculations.
Rod diameter Specifies the rod diameter (top drive only). This property allows the pipe cross-
section area to be reduced, to account for the presence of a drive rod for a
pump.
Slip factor Allows the pump flowrate to be adjusted for downward fluid slippage between
the pump rotor and the stator (default = 1).
Head factor Allows the pump head to be adjusted to better match field performance data or
account for wear (default = 1).
Flowrate factor Allows the pump flowrate to be adjusted (default = 1).
Power factor Allows the pump power requirement to be adjusted (default = 1).
Viscosity correction Allows a viscosity correction factor to be applied to account for reduced
slippage.
Gas separator present Allows a gas separator to be modeled.
Separator efficiency Specifies efficiency of the gas separator (default = 100%).
Performance curve and variable speed curve tabs

• To change the data format from a chart to a table, click the table-shaped View data in a table
button beneath the plot or right-click the chart and click View table.
• To change the data format from a table to a chart, click the chart-shaped View data in a chart
button beneath the table or right-click the table and click View chart.

85
PIPESIM User Guide
Matching to field data

PCP’s, more so than ESP’s, will tend to deviate from catalog performance curves when in field
operations. This is due to the sensitivity of slip to fluid properties and operating conditions which
impact elastomer swelling. Therefore, PCP’s generally require some degree of calibration to match
field data.
Consider the Kudu 98k 1200EW PCP. A combination of rate, head and slip factors may be
adjusted to modify the performance curve. Generally, modification of the slip factor alone should be
sufficient to achieve a match.
As shown in the diagram below, the following adjustments are made to the catalog curve based on
the factors specified:
• The rate factor will shift the entire curve vertically along the rate axis (green)
• The head factor will shift the entire cure horizontally along the head axis (red)
• The slip factor controls the degree of deviation from the ideal (no leakage) curve (blue)
Note:
• Slip factors represent adjustment to slip effect only, relative to catalog and nominal rates.

86
PIPESIM User Guide
• slip factor of 0 = nominal rate (cannot solve model due to infinite head)
• slip factor of 1 = catalog rate
• Slip factor scales linearly.
• Slip factor is applied AFTER rate & head factors.
Related links:
Add a progressive cavity pump (PCP) (p.84)
Progressive cavity pump (PCP) (p.597)
Add a rod pump

The rod pump uses a surface power source to drive a downhole pump assembly. The beam pump
is the most popular rod pump system because of its simple structure, flexibility, and longevity. The
system consists of the pumping unit, sucker rod, and pump. The pump unit is the main surface
equipment of the rod pump system. The beam-balanced pumping unit transforms the circular
movement of the crank to the up and down swing of the horse head using the connection rod
between the beam and crank.
• Click New (+) at the bottom of the table and then click Rod pump as the Equipment to be
used for the artificial lift.
• Drag the Rod pump icon in the Artificial lift group to the well tubing in the schematic.
3. Click the row in the table for the artificial lift added in step 2 to display the properties for that
equipment.
Related links:
Rod pump properties (p.87)
Rod pump properties

The following tables explain the different rod pump properties.
General properties
Name Name of the rod pump.
Active Specifies whether the pump is in operation.
Measured depth Measured depth to the bottom of the rod pump.

87
PIPESIM User Guide
This is a required value. The value cannot be less than zero.
Nominal rate The actual volumetric flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge. This is an alternative to the more common
practice of specifying the stroke length and speed.
Maximum DP The maximum pressure rise the device is allowed to exhibit (psi or bar). This
property is used to prevent excess rod loading.
Maximum The maximum power the device is allowed to draw (hp or kw). This property is
power used to prevent excess rod loading.
Drive rod This property allows the pipe cross-section area to be reduced, to account for the
diameter presence of a drive rod for a pump.
Stroke per The pump speed, in strokes per minute. In conjunction with the swept volume of
minute the pump cylinder (its cross-section area multiplied by the stroke length), this is
an alternative to the nominal rate.
Stroke length Effective length of the stroke at the plunger location, NOT the polished rod. When
multiplied by the plunger diameter, stroke length defines the volume of liquid
moved with each stroke.
Plunger Diameter of the plunger which when multiplied by the stroke length, defines the
diameter volume of liquid moved with each stroke. The actual flowing volume will be less
due to leakage (see “Slip Coefficient”).
Slip A coefficient to specify the change inchange in flowrate with respect to Delta
coefficient pressure. This is used to compute the pressure rise across the device when the
actual flowrate is less than the specified nominal rate due to leakage (slip) across
the pump.
The slip coefficient essentially determines the volumetric efficiency of the rod
pump. The default slip coefficient (.0002 BPD/psi or .000461 sm3/d/bar) assumes
high efficiency (generally greater than 98%), though the efficiency will vary with
flowrate and pressure differential for a given slip coefficient.
Typical volumetric efficiencies in operations range from about 70-95% and
depend on operating conditions and wear factors. Over-pumping and gas
interference will lower the volumetric efficiency.
The slip coefficient may be increased (sometimes substantially) to lower the
volumetric efficiency of the rod pump and is suggested as a sensitivity variable to
match field data. See example below.
Pump Overall efficiency of the pump which is used to compute the power requirement.
efficiency

88
PIPESIM User Guide
Gas separator If checked, a gas separator is installed to remove free gas before the
present produced fluid enters the pump. Separated gas will be discarded to annulus
between tubing and casing strings.
Separator efficiency The efficiency of the gas separator if installed. A 90% separation efficiency
indicates that 90% of free gas available at pump intake condition will be
removed.
Recombine gas at If checked, the separated gas recombines with the produced fluid at the
wellhead wellhead.
Sensitizing on the slip coefficient

The default value of the slip coefficient will generally result in a very high volumetric efficiency. The
behavior of the slip coefficient may be examined by performing Nodal Analysis. As shown below,
the default slip coefficient of .002 BPD/psi results in a volumetric efficiency of about 99%. A slip
coefficient of .02 BPD/psi results in a volumetric efficiency of about 85% which is typical for field
conditions.
Using a slip coefficient in place of a specified volumetric efficiency allows you to vary operating
conditions for the rod pump which will produce slightly different volumetric efficiencies. While a
specific slip coefficient may be valid for a specific pump in operation, different pumping wells will
have different slip coefficients.
If we consider the ideal case where no leakage occurs (slip coefficient of zero), we would have a
vertical line on the nodal analysis plot as the rate produced by the well is fully defined by the stroke
length X area X frequency for the pump. This ideal assumption essentially defines the rate for the
well. By applying the slip coefficient (red and green curves), the rate vs. pressure relationship is
relaxed slightly though the range of flowrate still falls within a narrow band except for very low
pressures. Therefore, to avoid over-specification, simulation tasks performed on wells with rod
pumps should always be pressure specified rather than rate specified.

89
PIPESIM User Guide
Sensitizing on Speed
Rod Pump Stroke Speed is a typical sensitivity variable for simulation tasks as shown in the figure
below.

90
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Add a rod pump (p.87)
RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump (p.837)
2.1.5 Add heat transfer data

Heat transfer can be modeled by entering the single heat transfer coefficient (U value) or by
entering multiple values in a table.
1. To define the heat transfer data, in the Well editor, click the Heat transfer tab.
Note: The information in the Heat transfer tab changes based on the selected U Value input
method and the Ambient temperature input method.
2. Select the U Value input method and Ambient temperature input method.
Field Action
U Value input Perform one of the following actions:
method • Click Single, enter the value and select the appropriate units.
• Click Multiple, select the appropriate Depth option (MD or TVD) and
enter U Value at given depths. The U values at all other depths will be
interpolated based on measured depth (MD).

91
PIPESIM User Guide
Field Action
U Value U value or heat transfer coefficient
Ambient Perform one of the following actions:
temperature • Click Single, enter the soil temperature at wellhead with the appropriate
input method unit. The Ambient temperature (surrounding formation temperature) at
any point in the wellbore will be interpolated between the entered Soil
Temperature at wellhead and the known Reservoir temperature
specified in the Completions tab of Well editor based on depth (TVD).
• Click Multiple, select the appropriate Depth option (MD or TVD) and
enter Ambient temperature at given depths. The Ambient temperature at
all other depths will be interpolated based on true vertical depth (TVD) .
3. To add more rows to the table, click New (+).
Note: By default, the data appears in a plot. Click the button below the plot to switch between plot
format and tabular format.
For more information, see Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient (p.641).
Related links:
Measured depth and true vertical depth (p.63)
Measured depth and true vertical depth

This graphic shows the difference between Measured Depth (MD) and True Vertical Depth (TVD).
These are only equivalent when a well is completely vertical.

92
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
2.1.6 Add completions

In PIPESIM*, a completion refers to the point or interval of contact(s) between wellbore and the
reservoir. A completion includes a definition of an Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) and the
fluid that is associated with the producing reservoir as well as some of the mechanical wellbore
configuration (for example: gravel pack, etc.) to account for pressure drop between the reservoir
and the wellbore. Completion characteristics such as fracture geometry, gravel packing, perforation
parameters and so on, may be described as part of the IPR. A completion may contain perforations
(with casing) or be openhole (no casing). Only one set of perforations are allowed per completion.
Note:
• Any completion changes that you make while interacting with the Wellbore schematic will be
reflected in the Completions table, such as adding a completion or changing the depth of a
completion. Likewise, any changes that you make on the Completions tab appear in the
Wellbore schematic.
• After you complete a perforation design simulation, you can update the completion data in the
well model used in the simulation with the completion data results from the perforation design.

93
PIPESIM User Guide
1. Add a completion to the Wellbore schematic by performing one of the following actions:
• On the Insert tab in the Downhole equipment group, drag the Completion icon to the
appropriate position on the Wellbore schematic.
• On the Completions tab, click New (+) at the bottom of the table and select whether the
Geometry profile is a vertical or horizontal completion.
Note: By default, if the completion is created in a wellbore section within 10 degrees from
horizontal, PIPESIM creates a horizontal completion; otherwise, PIPESIM creates a vertical
completion. You can override this designation. Based on the designated completion (horizontal or
vertical), the list of selectable IPR models changes.
2. To reposition the Completion object, perform one of the following actions:

• On the Wellbore schematic, drag the Completion object to another location.
• On the Completions tab, define the completion depth.
• For Single point completions, enter the Middle MD.
• For Distributed completions, enter the Top MD and Bottom MD.
Note: The Type property displays the completion type (Perforated or Openhole). You
cannot change this value in the Completions tab.
3. On the Completions tab, define the completion.

To select the completion that you want to define, either click the completion on the Wellbore
schematic, or click the appropriate row in the Completions table.
Note: When defining completions, the selections available in the Completions tab change based
on whether the well completion is vertical or horizontal, and whether the fluid entry is single point or
distributed.
a. If the completion is active, ensure that the Active check box is selected.
An inactive completion will ignore the completion and there will be no contribution.
b. Select the IPR model.
The IPR models available for selection change based on the selection made for the Fluid
entry and the Geometry profile.
c. Define the completion properties, reservoir conditions, and fluid model associated with the
completion.
You define these properties on the tabs displayed beneath the Completions table.
Related links:
IPR options and applicability table (p.95)
Multilayer completions (p.146)
Associate zones with completions (p.149)

94
PIPESIM User Guide

Completion updates to well models
IPR options and applicability table

The IPR models that are available are based on the Geometry profile and the Fluid entry
selected.
Geometry Profile Fluid Entry IPR Model

Vertical Single Point • Well PI (gas, liquid)
• Vogel (liquid)
• Fetkovich (liquid)
• Jones (liquid, gas)
• Backpressure (gas)
• Darcy (gas, liquid)
• Forchheimer (gas)
• Hydraulic Fracture (liquid, gas)
Horizontal Single Point • Joshi (liquid, gas)
• Babu & Odeh (liquid, gas)
Horizontal Distributed • Distributed PI (liquid, gas)
• Joshi (liquid, gas)
• Babu & Odeh (liquid, gas)
Related links:
Vertical completions overview (p.95)
Horizontal completions overview (p.102)
Define the skin (p.107)
Multi-rate well test data (p.146)
Vertical completions overview

The vertical completion models flow between the reservoir and bottomhole using an Inflow
Performance Relationship (IPR).
The following wellbore schematic shows a vertical completion named VertComp.

95
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Inflow performance relationships for vertical completions (p.513)
Vertical completion options (p.96)
Well productivity index (PI) reservoir properties (p.97)
Vogel's reservoir properties (p.97)
Fetkovich's reservoir properties (p.98)
Jones' reservoir properties (p.98)
Backpressure's reservoir properties (p.99)
Darcy's reservoir properties (p.99)
Forchheimer's equation (p.100)
Hydraulic fracture reservoir properties (p.101)
Vertical completion skin table (p.110)
Vertical completion options

When the selected IPR model is Darcy and one of the Skin options is set to calculate, the following
vertical completion options are available:
Completion Type Description

OpenHole Does not have casing or liner cemented in place across the production zone.
Produced fluids flow directly into the wellbore. In some cases, the zone is left
entirely bare, but usually some sort of sand-control or flow-control method is
used.
Openhole with An openhole completion in which a slotted or perforated liner, often wire-
gravel pack wrapped and placed in the well, is surrounded by gravel. Gravel packs are
most commonly used for mitigating sand production.
Perforated Has a production casing or liner perforated to allow fluids to pass between
the wellbore and the producing formation.
Perforated with Uses a combination of gravel pack and perforation in cased-holes. The
gravel pack perforations allow passage of fluids between the wellbore and the producing
formation. Gravel packing the annulus and perforations prevents sand
production.
Frac Pack Process of creating a propped hydraulic fracture and an annular gravel pack
to increase well productivity and control sand production.

96
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Well productivity index (PI) reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the well PI equation for vertical
completions.
Reservoir pressure Static reservoir pressure
Reservoir Reservoir temperature
temperature
IPR basis Basis for IPR calculation (liquid or gas)
Productivity Index Productivity Index
Use Vogel below Available for Liquid PI for reservoirs where bottomhole pressure may be
bubble point below the bubble point.
Note: The Well PI option is intended for use when the reservoir pressure is
above the bubble point. The Vogel correction below the bubble point
accounts for presence of 2-phase as gas comes out of solution. An
alternate option is to use an IPR model that is intended for two-phase
fluids, such as Vogel or Fetkovich.
Use test data Input rate versus pressure data available from standard multipoint tests or
isochronal test. PIPESIM adjusts the IPR automatically to match the test
data and computes the resultant productivity index (PI).
For more information, see Productivity Index (PI) (p.514).
Related links:
Vogel's reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use Vogel's equation for vertical
completions.
temperature
IPR basis Basis for IPR calculation. Liquid is the only option for Vogel IPR model.
AOFP Absolute Open Flow Potential - the maximum liquid flowrate the well could
deliver if the bottomhole flowing pressure were set to 0.

97
PIPESIM User Guide
Vogel coefficient Coefficient used in Vogel's equation to adjust the degree of curvature of
the inflow performance curve. Curvature increases with an increasing
coefficient. A straight line is produced when the PI-coefficient is 0 (default
value = 0.8).
Use test data Input rate versus pressure data for a well test. PIPESIM* adjusts the IPR
automatically to match the test data.
Related links:
Vogel's equation (p.515)
Fetkovich's reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use Fetkovich's equation for vertical
completions.
Reservoir Static reservoir pressure
pressure
temperature
IPR basis Basis for IPR calculation (liquid is the only option for Fetkovich IPR model)
AOFP Absolute Open Flow Potential - the maximum liquid flowrate the well could
deliver if the bottomhole flowing pressure were set to 0
n exponent Exponent used in the Fetkovich equation to adjust the degree of curvature
of the inflow performance curve. Unlike the Vogel equation it is not possible
to produce a linear well inflow characteristic as a special case of the
Fetkovich equation. The default value is 1.0.
Use test data Input rate versus pressure data available from standard multipoint tests or
isochronal test. PIPESIM adjusts the IPR automatically to match the test
data and computes the resultant AOFP and n exponent.
Related links:
Fetkovich's equation (p.516)
Jones' reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the Jones' equation for vertical
completions.

98
PIPESIM User Guide
Reservoir temperature Reservoir temperature
A (turb) Turbulent flow coefficient. This value must be ≥ 0.
B (lam) Laminar coefficient. This value must be ≥ 0.
Use test data Input rate versus pressure data available from standard multipoint tests
or isochronal test. PIPESIM adjusts the IPR automatically to match the
test data and computes parameters A and B.
For more information, see Jones' Equation (p.517).
Related links:
Backpressure's reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the backpressure equation vertical
completions.
temperature
IPR basis Basis for IPR calculation (gas is the only option for Backpressure IPR
model).
Constant C C is the coefficient to pressure square differential term in back pressure
equation. C is influenced by reservoir and fluid parameters.
Slope n Slope n is the exponent to pressure square differential term in the
backpressure equation representing flow characteristics. Its value ranges
between 0.5 (for completely turbulent flow) to 1.0 (for pure laminar flow).
Use test data Input rate versus pressure data from a typical backpressure test. PIPESIM
adjusts the IPR automatically to match the test data and computes values
for C and n.
Related links:
Back pressure equation (p.518)
Darcy's reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the Darcy equation for vertical
completions.

99
PIPESIM User Guide
For more information, see Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Equation (p.519).
Use Vogel below Available for liquid-based IPR only
bubble point Use the Vogel equation to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble
point.
Reservoir thickness Average formation thickness
Borehole diameter Diameter of the wellbore (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement
The default value is 6 inches.
Reservoir permeability Average permeability of the formation
Use relative Available for liquid-based IPR only
permeability data Select this check box to specify a relative permeability table.
Reservoir shape Specify either a drainage radius or a shape factor
option
Drainage radius Radius of external boundary of drainage area
Shape factor Identifies the physical location of a well with respect to reservoir
boundaries
The typical value for a circular reservoir is 31.62.
Reservoir area Area of the reservoir
Use transient model Select the Transient model check box to model a well that has not
reached pseudo steady-state condition.
This displays following additional parameters:
Time
Time well has been producing
Porosity
Pore volume/bulk volume
Compressibility
Total compressibility of the reservoir rock
Related links:
Forchheimer's equation
This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the Forchheimer equation for vertical
completions.

100
PIPESIM User Guide
IPR basis Basis for IPR calculation (gas is the only option for Forchheimer IPR
model).
F (turb) Turbulent coefficient. This value must be ≥ 0.
B (lam) Laminar coefficient. This value must be ≥ 0.
Use test data Input rate versus pressure data available from standard multipoint tests
or isochronal test. PIPESIM adjusts the IPR automatically to match the
test data and computes parameters F and B.
Related links:
Forchheimer equation (p.518)
Hydraulic fracture reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the hydraulic fracture equation for
vertical completions.
Note: The Fractured Well IPR type uses a digitized, constant rate, finite-conductivity, closed
square, fractured well type-curve to calculate the effect of a vertically drilled well that has been
hydraulically fractured. This is the same method used in the Schlumberger FracCADE software.
• The well is assumed to be in the center of a square reservoir with an aspect ratio of 1:1.
• The type curves used in the calculation are taken from Reservoir Stimulation 2nd Edition by
Econimides and Nolte, Chapter 8 by Hai-Zui Meng and SPE paper 16435 and are best suited
for tight gas wells. Type curves are generated using single-phase, two-dimensional finite
difference simulators for ranges of system properties (permeability, porosity, fluid viscosity, total
system compressibility) and the characteristic length of the system, fracture half-length. These
are then used to compute Dimensionless time (valid range: 10e-5 - 10e3), Dimensionless
wellbore pressure, and Dimensionless fracture conductivity (valid range 0.1 - 500).
temperature
Use Vogel below (Available for liquid-based IPR only) Uses a type-curve equation for
bubble point calculating the productivity above the bubble point, and the Vogel
relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point. If the
watercut exceeds 60%, using Vogel's equation is not recommended.

101
PIPESIM User Guide
Reservoir thickness Average formation thickness.
Reservoir Average formation permeability. For a gas well, this is gas permeability. For
permeability an oil well, this is total liquid permeability.
Reservoir radius Radius of external boundary of drainage area. The default value is 2,000
feet.
Borehole diameter Diameter of the wellbore (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement.
The default value is 6 inches.
Fracture half length The length of the fracture extending out in one direction from the wellbore,
which is half of the total fracture length.
Fracture The effective permeability to the primary fluid of the fracture proppant under
permeability reservoir conditions.
Fracture width Average width of the fractures in a hydraulically fractured reservoir.
Use transient model Select the Transient model check box to model a well when the well has
not reached pseudo-steady-state conditions. When selected, the following
properties appear:
Time
Time well has been producing
Porosity
Pore volume/bulk volume
Compressibility
Total compressibility of the reservoir
Related links:
Horizontal completions overview

PIPESIM* uses the reservoir inflow and wellbore pressure drop equations to calculate the
production rate along the well length. PIPESIM supports the following completion types:
• Single point (infinite conductivity)
• Distributed (finite conductivity)
Single point completions

For single point completions, inflow is assumed to occur at the heel of the well only (no pressure
drop is calculated along the horizontal completion). The following IPRs are available:
• Pseudo-steady-state (oil reservoirs)
• Pseudo-steady-state (gas reservoirs)
• Steady-state (oil reservoirs)
• Steady-state (gas reservoirs)

102
PIPESIM User Guide
Distributed completions
For distributed completions, the inflow performance is expressed as a Productivity Index (PI) per
unit length that can be assigned explicitly (Distributive PI) or calculated using the following
equations:
• Steady-state (oil reservoirs)
• Steady-state (gas reservoirs)
• Pseudo-steady-state (oil reservoirs)
• Pseudo-steady-state (gas reservoirs) productivity equations.
In this mode, PIPESIM calculates the pressure drop along the horizontal completion.
These equations take account of the effect of the vertical/horizontal permeability ratio, completion
skin, and reservoir thickness.
Related links:
Joshi (steady state) (p.103)
Distributed productivity index (PI) reservoir properties (p.106)
Babu and odeh (pseudo-steady state) (p.104)
Joshi (steady state)

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the Joshi equation for oil and gas
horizontal completions.
The following reservoir data in the table is shared for Distributed and Single point.
For more information, see Pseudo-Steady State Productivity (p.554).

103
PIPESIM User Guide
Radius of reservoir extent External boundary radius of the drainage area
Reservoir thickness Reservoir thickness
Permeability perpendicular to well Permeability in the x-direction (perpendicular to the well)
Permeability parallel to well Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to the well)
Vertical permeability Permeability in the z-direction (Kv)
Well Radius Sandface radius (drilled-hole radius)
Well Eccentricity Offset of the well from the center of the pay zone
Note: These properties are only applicable to Joshi (Steady State) - Single point model.
Productivity Index Computed single point PI values from the data supplied
Horizontal section Effective length of the horizontal completion
length
Fluid OFVF or Gas Z Option changes based on selected IPR basis. For liquids, the Fluid OFVF
(Oil Formation Volume Factor value) field appears. For gas, the Gas Z
field appears.
Note: This fluid property will replace the values defined in the fluid model
for the completion calculations only.
Fluid viscosity Fluid viscosity.
Note: This fluid property will replace the values defined in the fluid model
Related links:
Babu and odeh (pseudo-steady state)

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the Babu and Odeh equation for oil
and gas horizontal completions.
The following reservoir data in the table is shared for Distributed and Single point.
For more information, see Pseudo-Steady State Productivity (p.554).

104
PIPESIM User Guide
Reservoir pressure static reservoir pressure
Reservoir X dim Drainage width perpendicular to the well
Reservoir Y dim Drainage width parallel to the well
Reservoir thickness Reservoir thickness
Permeability X (perpendicular to well) Permeability in the x-direction (perpendicular to the well)
Permeability Y (parallel to well) Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to the well)

105
PIPESIM User Guide
Permeability Z (Vertical) Permeability in the z-direction (vertical permeability)
Heel location (X position) x coordinate of the horizontal well trajectory
Heel location (Y position) y coordinate of the horizontal well trajectory
Heel location (Z position) z coordinate of the horizontal well trajectory
Horizontal section length Effective length of the horizontal completion.
Well Radius Sandface radius (drilled-hole radius).
Note: These properties are only applicable to Babu and Odeh (Pseudo-Steady State) - Single
point model.
Productivity Index Computes the single point PI values from the data supplied
Fluid OFVF or Gas Optional changes based on selected IPR basis. For liquids, the Fluid OFVF
Z (Oil Formation Volume Factor value) field appears. For gas, the Gas Z
(compressibility factor) field appears.
Note: This fluid property will replace the volumes defined in the fluid model
Fluid viscosity Fluid viscosity.
Note: This fluid property will replace the volumes defined in the fluid model
Related links:
Distributed productivity index (PI) reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the Distributed PI for oil and gas
horizontal completions.
Note: Distributed PI is the flowrate divided by drawdown divided by the unit wellbore length.

106
PIPESIM User Guide
Productivity Index Distributed Productivity Index
Related links:
Define the skin

The Skin tab is used to specify the completion properties used to calculate the skin factor. It can
be negative (enhanced inflow) or positive (reduced inflow).
In certain cases, especially the low permeability reservoir, well stimulation jobs like matrix
acidizing, hydraulic fracturing, etc may improve the near wellbore flow performance. Skin is
therefore the measure of damage/improvement from the original behavior and can have a positive
or negative value.
• A positive skin indicates damage to the near wellbore region.
• A negative skin indicates improved near wellbore flow performance.
• A zero skin indicates no damage or improvement.
Sometimes, especially in high-rate gas wells, another skin term is introduced due to turbulence
known as rate dependent skin.
These two terms are added to get the overall skin factor. For example, if the rate is 20 mmscf/d,
the constant skin is 3, and the rate dependent skin is 0.1/mmscf/d, then the total skin is 5. Both
mechanical and rate dependent skin terms can be entered or calculated. Horizontal completion has
only one skin type.
You can model skin for both vertical and horizontal wells when appropriate IPR models and
completion methods are selected. The skin option is available only for the models shown in the
table.
Geometry Profile Fluid Entry IPR Model

Vertical Single Point Darcy (gas, liquid)
Horizontal Single Point Joshi (liquid, gas)
Babu & Odeh (liquid, gas)
Distributed Joshi (liquid, gas)
Babu & Odeh (liquid, gas)
When the appropriate IPR model is selected, the Skin tab appears under property for the selected
completion.
1. Click the Skin tab.
You will notice applicable skin terms depending on geometry profile of the well.
• Horizontal geometry profile has a single term called Skin.
• Vertical geometry profile has a Mechanical skin term and a rate-dependent skin term.
2. Click Specify (to enter a value) or Calculate (to have PIPESIM* calculate the values).

107
PIPESIM User Guide
• If you selected Specify for the Mechanical skin or Rate dependent skin, enter the value.
• If you selected Calculate, complete the remaining steps.
Note: When the Calculate option is selected for any of the skin terms for vertical geometry profile
(mechanical or rate dependent terms) or horizontal geometry profile (a single skin term), you will
need to select an appropriate Completion method to display various skin component associated
with it.
3. Select the appropriate Completion method that is available depending on well geometry and
interval type.
Geometry Profile Interval type Completion method

Vertical Cased hole • Perforated
• Perforated and gravel packed
• Frac packed
Open hole • Open hole
• Open hole gravel packed
Horizontal Cased hole • Perforated
• Perforated and gravel packed
Open hole • Open hole
• Open hole gravel packed
4. Enter the required data for skin components exposed for the selected geometry profile and
interval type.
Related links:
Skin compacted/crushed zone properties
Darcy's skin properties - openhole (p.112)
Darcy's skin properties - openhole gravel packed (p.115)
Darcy's skin properties - perforated (p.118)
Darcy's skin properties - perforated and gravel packed (p.118)
Darcy's skin properties - frac packed (p.127)
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - perforated (p.112)
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - perforated and gravel packed (p.112)
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - openhole (p.139)
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - open hole gravel packed (p.115)
Skin components
The total skin is calculated by summing contributions from different components. The Skin factor
can be either negative (enhanced inflow) or positive (reduced inflow).

108
PIPESIM User Guide
The components comprising the skin factor depend on the completion type selected. The following
tables display skin components associated with various completion methods for horizontal and
vertical geometry profiles
Type Description
Openhole The skin factor calculation assumes the well is not cemented (no casing or
liner set across the reservoir formation). Openhole completions allow
produced fluids to flow directly into the wellbore.
Completion
vertical permeability, deviation
Damaged zone
diameter, permeability
Openhole Gravel Completion
Pack vertical permeability, deviation
Damaged zone
Perforated The skin factor calculation uses the McLeod or Karakas/Tariq model.
Completion
vertical permeability, deviation
Damaged zone
Compacted zone
Perforated with Completion
Gravel Pack vertical permeability, deviation
Damaged zone
Compacted zone
Frac Pack (a gravel Completion
packed hydraulic vertical permeability, deviation
fracture model)
Fracture
half length, width, proppant permeability
Fracture face skin and choke fracture skin options are available.
For more information, see Vertical Well Skin Factor (p.533), Gravel Pack Skin (p.538), Perforated
Well Skin (p.540), and Frac Pack Skin (p.543).

109
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Vertical Well Skin Factor (p.533)
Vertical completion skin table (p.110)
Horizontal completion skin table (p.111)
Partial penetration skin (p.537)
Vertical completion skin table

A vertical completion might be comprised of any of the following completion models. Based on the
information that you entered, skin components appropriate to each completion model are
calculated.
Completion Model Damaged Partial Gravel Perforated Compacted Frac

Model Assumptions Zone Penetration / Pack Skin Zone Skin Pack
Skin Deviation Skin Skin
Skin
Openhole The well is not X X
(p.112) lined or
cemented.
Openhole The wellbore X X X
Gravel Pack is openhole
(p.115) and has a
gravel pack.
Perforated The well is X X X X
(p.118) lined or
cemented and
is perforated.
Gravel The well is X X X X X
Packed and lined or
Perforated cemented, is
(p.118) perforated,
and has a
gravel pack.
Frac Pack The well is X X X X
(p.127) lined or
cemented, is
perforated,
and has been
fractured.
Based on the completion type, data is passed to the engines to calculate the IPR during simulation.
Related links:

110
PIPESIM User Guide
Horizontal completion skin table

A horizontal completion can use any of the following completion models. Based on the information
that you entered, skin components appropriate to each completion model are calculated.
Completion Model Assumptions Damaged Gravel Perforated Compacted

Model Zone Skin Packed Skin Zone Skin
Skin
Open hole The well is not lined or X
(p.139) cemented.
Openhole The wellbore is openhole X X
Gravel Pack and has a gravel pack.
(p.115)
Perforated The well is lined or X X X
(p.112) cemented and is
perforated.
Gravel Packed The well is lined or X X X X
and Perforated cemented, is perforated
(p.112) and has a gravel pack
Based on the completion type, data is passed to the engines to calculate the IPR during simulation.
Related links:
Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions (p.546)
Skin options properties

The skin value has two components, a mechanical (constant) term and a rate dependent term. (For
example, if the rate is 20 mmscf/d, the constant skin is 3, and the rate dependent skin is 0.1/
mmscf/d, then the total skin is 5). Both mechanical and rate dependent skin terms can be entered
or calculated.
Mechanical Used to represent friction terms arising from any departure from this idealized
skin model.
Specify
Enter the dimensionless constant skin factor.
Calculate
Model the completion and computes the skin factor using completion
options. If the skin is computed, sensitivity cannot be performed directly on
the skin value; however, sensitivities can be performed on any completion
description parameter (such as shots per foot or perforation depth).
Rate Flowrate dependent.
dependent skin Specify
Enter the dimensionless rate dependent skin factor.

111
PIPESIM User Guide
Calculate
Calculate the rate dependent skin terms for all the components specified in
the completion options description.
Related links:
Skin options properties - horizontal distributed

The skin terms can be entered or calculated.
Skin Used to represent friction terms arising from any departure from this idealized model.
Specify
Enter the dimensionless constant skin factor.
Calculate
Model the completion and computes the skin factor using completion options. If
the skin is computed, sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value;
however, sensitivities can be performed on any completion description parameter
(such as shots per foot or perforation depth).
Related links:
Darcy's skin properties - openhole

When the Open hole completion type is selected, the following skin components are calculated.
The perforation skin and compacted/crushed zone skin components are not calculated because
there are no perforations.
• Damaged zone skin: This is the skin component that accounts for the additional pressure
losses due to the fluid flow through the damaged zone; the region of reduced permeability
around the wellbore that results from the drilling and completion process. The thickness and
permeability of the damage zone kd or the damaged zone to unaltered reservoir permeability
ratio kd/k, must be provided to accurately calculate this skin. If not provided, a damaged zone
thickness of zero will be used and the damaged zone skin will be equal to zero.
• Partial penetration skin: This skin accounts for the additional pressure losses that occur when
the net pay is not completely penetrated or completed for a perforated completion; or when the
entire net pay is not left open hole, for the case of an open hole completion. The convergence
of the flow into the wellbore which is partial completed/penetrated, results in additional pressure
losses. This skin will be equal to zero if the entire length of net pay is left open hole.
• Deviation skin: This skin accounts for the additional pressure losses that occur from flow
convergence into a wellbore based on its deviation. The more deviated the wellbore, the greater
the surface flow area exposed to fluid flow, and the less the pressure losses and deviation skin.

112
PIPESIM User Guide
Mechanical skin This is the total mechanical or Darcy skin. It is the sum of the skin
components that apply, based on the completion method selected.
These include the damaged zone, perforation, partial penetration,
deviation, compacted/crushed zone, gravel pack and frac pack skins.
There are two options available:
• Specify: You may enter a mechanical skin determined from other
sources such as a pressure transient analysis interpretation.
• Calculate: You may calculate the mechanical skin by selecting the
completion method and entering all the parameters for the skin

113
PIPESIM User Guide
components that apply. The total mechanical skin, as well as the
individual skin components will be calculated and displayed.
Rate dependent skin This is the rate dependent, turbulent or Non-Darcy skin. There are two
options available:
• Specify: You may enter a rate-dependent skin determined from
other sources such as a pressure transient analysis interpretation.
• Calculate: You may calculate the rate dependent skin by selecting
the completion method and entering all the parameters for the skin
components that apply.
Parameter option This enables you to select how you would like to specify the skin input
parameters. The options are:
• Ratio: If this option is selected, you will be able to specify the
following ratio input parameters; Damaged zone permeability ratio
(kd/k), Open hole or Perforated interval ratio (lp/l) and Permeability
anisotropy (kv/k). This is the default option.
• Absolute: If this option is selected, you will be able to specify
absolute values for the following input parameters; Damaged zone
permeability (kd), Open hole or Perforated interval length (lp) and
Vertical permeability (kv).
DAMAGED ZONE
Permeability ratio (kd/k) Ratio of the near wellbore damaged zone permeability (kd) to the
undamaged reservoir permeability (k).
Permeability (kd) Damaged zone permeability.
Thickness Thickness of the damaged zone from the wellbore into the formation.
Damaged zone thickness has replaced damaged zone diameter, which
was used in older PIPESIM versions.
Damaged zone skin Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage.
PERFORATION,
PARTIAL
PENETRATION &
DEVIATION
Open hole or Perforated Fraction or percentage of the length of the pay zone that is completed
interval ratio (lp/l) "open hole" (or perforated).
Open hole or Perforated Length of the pay zone that is completed "open hole" (or perforated).
interval length (lp)
Permeability anisotropy Ratio of the vertical permeability to the horizontal permeability of the
(kv/k) reservoir. The typical reservoir permeability measured is the horizontal
permeability.
Vertical permeability (kv) Vertical permeability of the reservoir.

114
PIPESIM User Guide
Well deviation The wellbore deviation angle (from vertical) at the completion depth.
Perforation & partial The sum of the calculated perforation skin and partial penetration/
penetration skin completion skin. For the Open hole gravel packed completion, only the
partial penetration skin is calculated. The perforation skin will be equal
to zero.
Deviation skin Calculated skin due to the wellbore deviation.
Related links:
Mapping of skin components between PIPESIM Classic and the new PIPESIM (p.144)
Darcy's skin properties - openhole gravel packed

When the Open hole gravel packed completion type is selected, the following skin components are
calculated. The perforation skin and compacted/crushed zone skin components are not calculated
because there are no perforations.
losses. This skin will be equal to zero if the entire length of net pay is left open hole.
• Gravel pack skin: This skin accounts for the additional pressure losses due to the fact that the
fluid has to flow through an added barrier of the gravel pack proppant in the perforation tunnels
and in the annulus between the gravel pack screen and casing.

115
PIPESIM User Guide

116
PIPESIM User Guide
options available:
(kd/k), Open hole or Perforated interval ratio (lp/l) and Permeability
anisotropy (kv/k). This is the default option.
permeability (kd), Open hole or Perforated interval length (lp) and
Vertical permeability (kv).
DAMAGED ZONE
Damaged zone skin Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage.
PERFORATION,
PARTIAL
PENETRATION &
DEVIATION
Open hole or Perforated Fraction or percentage of the length of the pay zone that is completed
interval ratio (lp/l) "open hole" (or perforated).
Open hole or Perforated Length of the pay zone that is completed "open hole" (or perforated).
interval length (lp)
permeability.
Vertical permeability (kv) Vertical permeability of the reservoir.

117
PIPESIM User Guide
penetration skin completion skin. For the Open hole gravel packed completion, only the
partial penetration skin is calculated. The perforation skin will be equal
to zero.
GRAVEL PACK
Permeability Permeability of the gravel pack proppant.
Screen diameter Outside diameter of the gravel pack screen.
Gravel pack skin Calculated skin due to the gravel pack.
Related links:
Darcy's skin properties - perforated
When the Perforated completion type is selected, the following skin components are calculated:
• Perforation skin: This skin accounts for the additional pressure losses due to the convergence
of fluid flow into and through the perforation tunnels. It depends on the geometry of the
perforation tunnels; the perforation tunnel lengths and diameters, their phasing, the number of
perforation tunnels etc.
losses. This skin will be equal to zero if the entire length of net pay is perforated.
• Compacted/Crushed zone skin: A crushed or compacted zone is a region of reduced
permeability created around the perforation tunnels. This crushed zone forms because the
extreme force created by the explosives that are detonated during the perforation process,
pulverizes the rock around the tunnels. This crushed/compacted zone can be eliminated or
greatly reduced by perforating with dynamic underbalance conditions using the Schlumberger

118
PIPESIM User Guide
PURE (p.749) technology. Perforating underbalance means that the perforating is done at
conditions where the pressure within the wellbore is lower than the pressure in the reservoir,
which creates the suction required to clean out the perforation tunnels and remove the crushed
zone. The crushed zone skin is modeled with the following parameters; the crushed zone
thickness and the crushed zone permeability (kc) or crushed zone permeability to unaltered
reservoir permeability ratio (kc/k). With the PURE technology, a kc/k ratio of 0.8 to 1 can
typically be achieved.

119
PIPESIM User Guide
options available:
• Specify: You may enter a rate-dependent skin determined from other
(kd/k), Perforated or Open hole interval ratio (lp/l), Permeability
anisotropy (kv/k) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability ratio
(kc/k). This is the default option.
• Absolute:
If this option is selected, you will be able to specify absolute values
for the following input parameters; Damaged zone permeability (k d),
Perforated or Open hole interval length (lp), Vertical permeability (kv)
and Compacted/crushed zone permeability (kc).
DAMAGED ZONE
Damaged zone skin Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage. This value depends
on the skin method selected. When the Karakas/Tariq model is
selected, this value will be equal to zero, when the perforation length is
greater than the damaged zone thickness i.e. for this model, the effect
of the perforation tunnels exceeding the damaged zone thickness, is as
if there is no damaged zone.

120
PIPESIM User Guide
PERFORATION,
PARTIAL
PENETRATION &
DEVIATION
Skin method This enables you to select which model to use for the Perforation,
Compacted/crushed zone and Damaged zone skin components. The
options are:
• McLeod
• Karakas/Tariq
Perforation density Perforation shot density (number of perforation shots per unit length of
the gun system).
Diameter Average diameter of the perforation entrance holes created in the
formation.
Length Average penetration length of the perforation tunnels created in the
formation.
Phase angle The angle between the perforating charges. This parameter is displayed
only when the Karakas/Tariq model is selected.
Perforated or Open Fraction or percentage of the length of the pay zone that is perforated
hole interval ratio (lp/l) (or completed "open hole").
Perforated or Open Length of the pay zone that is perforated (or completed "open hole").
hole interval length (lp)
permeability.
Vertical permeability Vertical permeability of the reservoir.
(kv)
penetration skin completion skin. When the McCleod model is selected, only the partial
penetration skin is calculated. When the Karakas/ Tariq model is
selected, both a perforation skin and a partial penetration skin are
calculated. The perforation skin consists of the sum of the plane flow
effect, vertical converging effect and wellbore skin effects as defined by
Karakas & Tariq.
COMPACTED/
CRUSHED ZONE
SKIN
Permeability ratio (kc/k) Ratio of compacted/crushed zone permeability (kc) around the
perforation tunnels to the undamaged reservoir permeability (k).

121
PIPESIM User Guide
Permeability (kc) Compacted/crushed zone permeability.
Thickness Thickness of the compacted/crushed zone around the perforation
tunnels. Compacted/crushed zone thickness has replaced compacted/
crushed zone diameter, which was used in older PIPESIM versions.
Compacted/crushed Calculated skin due to the compacted/crushed zone. The value differs
zone skin based on the skin method chosen; because the McCleod and Karakas/
Tariq model use slightly different equations.
For more information, see Perforated Well Skin (p.540).
References
• Laboratory Experiments Provide New Insights into Underbalanced Perforating (SPE 71642).
(p.749)
• New Underbalanced Perforating Technique Increases Completion Efficiency and Eliminates
Costly Acid Stimulation (SPE 77364). (p. 0 )
Related links:
Darcy's skin properties - perforated and gravel packed
When the Perforated and gravel packed completion type is selected, the following skin
components are calculated:

122
PIPESIM User Guide

• Gravel pack skin : This skin accounts for the additional pressure losses due to the fact that the

123
PIPESIM User Guide
PERFORATION

124
PIPESIM User Guide
options available:
(kd/k), Perforated or Open hole interval ratio (lp/l), Permeability
anisotropy (kv/k) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability ratio
(kc/k). This is the default option.
permeability (kd), Perforated or Open hole interval length (lp), Vertical
permeability (kv) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability (kc).
DAMAGED ZONE
Damaged zone skin Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage. This value depends
on the skin method selected. When the Karakas/Tariq model is
selected, this value will be equal to zero, when the perforation length is
greater than the damaged zone thickness i.e. for this model, the effect
of the perforation tunnels exceeding the damaged zone thickness, is as
if there is no damaged zone.
PERFORATION,
PARTIAL
PENETRATION &
DEVIATION
Skin method This enables you to select which model to use for the Perforation,
Compacted/crushed zone and Damaged zone skin components. The
options are:

125
PIPESIM User Guide
• McLeod
• Karakas/Tariq
the gun system).
formation.
formation.
Phase angle The angle between the perforating charges. This parameter is
displayed only when the Karakas/Tariq model is selected.
permeability.
(kv)
penetration skin completion skin. When the McCleod model is selected, only the partial
penetration skin is calculated. When the Karakas/ Tariq model is
selected, both a perforation skin and a partial penetration skin are
calculated. The perforation skin consists of the sum of the plane flow
effect, vertical converging effect and wellbore skin effects as defined by
Karakas & Tariq.
COMPACTED/
CRUSHED ZONE SKIN
Compacted/crushed Calculated skin due to the compacted/crushed zone. The value differs
zone skin based on the skin method chosen; because the McCleod and Karakas/
Tariq model use slightly different equations.

126
PIPESIM User Guide
GRAVEL PACK
Tunnel length Length of the perforation tunnel through the casing and cement. This
value should be calculated as the sum of the thickness of the casing
and cement.
Casing ID Inside diameter of the casing at the completion depth.
Gravel pack skin Calculated skin due to the gravel pack.
For more information, see Perforated Well Skin (p.540).
References
(p.749)
Related links:
Darcy's skin properties - frac packed

Hydraulic fracturing is the process of using hydraulic pressure to create an artificial fracture in a
reservoir. It involves pumping fluid at an injection rate that is too high for the formation to accept,
without breaking. The fracture grows in length, height and width by pumping a mixture of fluid and
proppant at high pressure. The proppant is meant to "prop" or hold the fracture open when the
pumping stops, to ensure the fracture remains an open conduit for fluid flow.
When the Frac packed completion type is selected, the following skin components are calculated.
There is no damaged zone skin, because the fracture is assumed to extend far beyond any
damaged zone that exists. The perforation skin and compacted/crushed zone are also not
calculated because the flow path will primarily be through the fracture. Additionally, in PIPESIM,
the Frac Pack skin is calculated only in association with a cased hole gravel pack. If the gravel
pack is not defined, the Frac pack skin is equal to zero.

127
PIPESIM User Guide
• Frac pack skin: This skin accounts for the pressure losses that occur from fluid flow into the
various parts of the fracture. A hydraulic fracture increases the effective wellbore area and
typically results in a negative skin and a reduction in the pressure losses required to produce a
particular flow rate, when compared to a non-fractured (or perforated wellbore). The pressure
losses associated with a hydraulic fracture occur as fluid flows across the damaged zone on the
fracture face, through the choke (i.e. the narrow part of the fracture that connects the wellbore
to the main fracture), through the conductive fracture itself, through the proppant in the annulus
between the casing ID and the gravel pack screen and through the proppant in the tunnel
through the casing and cement thicknesses. A separate skin component is calculated to
account for each of these pressure losses and they are summed to get the frac pack skin.

128
PIPESIM User Guide

129
PIPESIM User Guide
options available:
following ratio input parameters; Perforated or Open hole interval ratio
(lp/l) and Permeability anisotropy (kv/k). This is the default option.
absolute values for the following input parameters; Perforated or
Open hole interval length (lp) and Vertical permeability (kv).
PERFORATION,
PARTIAL
PENETRATION &
DEVIATION
the gun system).
formation.
Permeability Ratio of the vertical permeability to the horizontal permeability of the
anisotropy (kv/k) reservoir. The typical reservoir permeability measured is the horizontal
permeability.
(kv)
penetration skin completion skin. For the Frac packed completion, only the partial
penetration skin is calculated. The perforation skin will be equal to zero.
Deviation skin Calculated skin due to the wellbore deviation

130
PIPESIM User Guide
GRAVEL PACK
value should be calculated as the sum of the thickness of the casing and
cement.
Casing ID Inside diameter of the casing at the completion depth.
Gravel pack skin The following gravel pack skin components are calculated: Skin for the
pressure losses through the proppant between the casing ID and gravel
pack screen OD; Skin for the pressure losses through the proppant in
the tunnel through the casing and cement thicknesses. These skin
components are summed and embedded in the Frac pack skin that is
displayed.
Fracture A hydraulic fracture in the rock next to the wellbore.
Fracture half length Length of the fracture extending out from the wellbore in one direction
i.e. half the total fracture length.
Fracture width Average fracture width.
Proppant permeability Effective permeability of the proppant in the fracture.
Choke A choke is the near wellbore narrowing of the fracture due to tortuosity
or other effects. The choke is the damaged connection between the
wellbore and the fracture. A fracture choke skin is calculated to account
for the additional pressure losses associated with the fluid flow through
this constriction.
Choke permeability Permeability of fracture choke.
Choke length Length of the fracture choke.
Damage zone The damaged zone is the damage that is left on the fracture face during
the fracture treatment. A fracture damage zone skin is calculated to
account for the additional pressure losses encountered as the fluid flows
through this region of damage. It is important to note that this is the
damaged zone around the fracture face itself, and differs from the
damaged zone created around the wellbore itself due to the drilling and
completion process.
Damage zone Permeability of the damaged zone around the fracture face. The default
permeabililty value is the formation permeability, i.e. no damage around the fracture
face.
Damage zone Thickness of the damage zone (normal to the fracture face). It is
thickness generally very thin (0.2 ft or less).
Frac pack skin Calculated total skin due to the frac pack. It is the sum of the following
skin components: fracture conductivity skin, fracture face skin, fracture
choke skin, fracture face damaged zone skin, gravel pack skin in the

131
PIPESIM User Guide
casing/screen annulus and gravel pack skin in the casing & cement
tunnel.
Related links:
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - perforated

The Joshi (Steady State) and Babu and Odeh (Pseudo-Steady state) IPR models have the same
skin input parameters.
When the Perforated completion type is selected, the following skin components are calculated:

132
PIPESIM User Guide
Mechanical skin* This is the total mechanical or Darcy skin. It is the sum of the skin

133
PIPESIM User Guide
individual skin components will be calculated.
Rate dependent skin* This is the rate dependent, turbulent or Non-Darcy skin. There are two
options available:
(kd/k) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability ratio (kc/k). This is
the default option.
permeability (kd) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability (kc).
DAMAGED ZONE
Permeability ratio Ratio of the near wellbore damaged zone permeability (kd) to the
(kd/k) undamaged reservoir permeability (k).
Damaged zone skin* Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage.
PERFORATION &
PARTIAL
PENETRATION
the gun system).
formation.
formation.
penetration skin* completion skin.

134
PIPESIM User Guide
COMPACTED/
CRUSHED ZONE
SKIN
Permeability ratio Ratio of compacted/crushed zone permeability (kc) around the
(kc/k) perforation tunnels to the undamaged reservoir permeability (k).
Compacted/crushed Calculated skin due to the compacted/crushed zone.
zone skin*
*These calculated skin values are currently not displayed in the PIPESIM interface for horizontal
completions.
References
(p.749)
Related links:
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - perforated and gravel packed
When the Perforated and gravel packed completion type is selected, the following skin
components are calculated:

135
PIPESIM User Guide
The Joshi (Steady State) and Babu and Odeh IPR models have the same parameters.

136
PIPESIM User Guide
Mechanical skin* This is the total mechanical or Darcy skin. It is the sum of the skin

137
PIPESIM User Guide
individual skin components will be calculated.
Rate dependent skin* This is the rate dependent, turbulent or Non-Darcy skin. There are two
options available:
(kd/k) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability ratio (kc/k). This is
the default option.
permeability (kd) and Compacted/crushed zone permeability (kc).
DAMAGED ZONE
Damaged zone skin* Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage.
PERFORATION &
PARTIAL
PENETRATION
the gun system).
formation.
formation.
penetration skin* completion skin.

138
PIPESIM User Guide
COMPACTED/
CRUSHED ZONE
SKIN
Compacted/crushed Calculated skin due to the compacted/crushed zone.
zone skin*
GRAVEL PACK
value should be calculated as the sum of the thickness of the casing and
cement.
Gravel pack skin* Calculated skin due to the gravel pack.
completions.
References
(p.749)
Related links:
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - openhole

When the Open hole completion type is selected, the following skin components are calculated.
The perforation skin and compacted/crushed zone skin components are not calculated because
there are no perforations.

139
PIPESIM User Guide
Mechanical This is the total mechanical or Darcy skin. It is the sum of the skin components
skin* that apply, based on the completion method selected. These include the
damaged zone, perforation, partial penetration, deviation, compacted/crushed
zone, gravel pack and frac pack skins. There are two options available:
• Specify: You may enter a mechanical skin determined from other sources
such as a pressure transient analysis interpretation.
completion method and entering all the parameters for the skin components

140
PIPESIM User Guide
that apply. The total mechanical skin, as well as the individual skin
components will be calculated and displayed.
Rate dependent This is the rate dependent, turbulent or Non-Darcy skin. There are two options
skin* available:
• Calculate: You may calculate the rate dependent skin by selecting the
that apply.
Parameter This enables you to select how you would like to specify the skin input
option parameters. The options are:
• Ratio: If this option is selected, you will be able to specify the following ratio
input parameters; Damaged zone permeability ratio (k d/k), Open hole or
Perforated interval ratio (lp/l) and Permeability anisotropy (kv/k). This is the
default option.
• Absolute: If this option is selected, you will be able to specify absolute
values for the following input parameters; Damaged zone permeability (kd),
Open hole or Perforated interval length (lp) and Vertical permeability (kv).
DAMAGED
ZONE
Permeability Ratio of the near wellbore damaged zone permeability (kd) to the undamaged
ratio (kd/k) reservoir permeability (k).
Permeability Damaged zone permeability.
(kd)
Thickness Thickness of the damaged zone from the wellbore into the formation. Damaged
zone thickness has replaced damaged zone diameter, which was used in older
PIPESIM versions.
Damaged zone Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage.
skin*
completions.
Related links:
Joshi & Babu and Odeh skin properties - open hole gravel packed

141
PIPESIM User Guide
When the Open hole gravel packed completion type is selected, the following skin components are
calculated. The perforation skin and compacted/crushed zone skin components are not calculated
because there are no perforations.

142
PIPESIM User Guide
Mechanical skin* This is the total mechanical or Darcy skin. It is the sum of the skin components
that apply, based on the completion method selected. These include the
damaged zone, perforation, partial penetration, deviation, compacted/crushed
zone, gravel pack and frac pack skins. There are two options available:
• Specify: You may enter a mechanical skin determined from other sources
such as a pressure transient analysis interpretation.
that apply. The total mechanical skin, as well as the individual skin
components will be calculated and displayed.

143
PIPESIM User Guide
Rate dependent This is the rate dependent, turbulent or Non-Darcy skin. There are two options
skin* available:
• Calculate: You may calculate the rate dependent skin by selecting the
that apply.
• Ratio: If this option is selected, you will be able to specify the following ratio
input parameters; Damaged zone permeability ratio (k d/k), Open hole or
Perforated interval ratio (lp/l) and Permeability anisotropy (kv/k). This is the
default option.
• Absolute: If this option is selected, you will be able to specify absolute
values for the following input parameters; Damaged zone permeability (kd),
Open hole or Perforated interval length (lp) and Vertical permeability (kv).
DAMAGED
ZONE
Permeability Ratio of the near wellbore damaged zone permeability (kd) to the undamaged
ratio (kd/k) reservoir permeability (k).
Damaged zone thickness has replaced damaged zone diameter, which was
used in older PIPESIM versions.
Damaged zone Calculated skin due to the near wellbore damage.
skin*
GRAVEL PACK
Gravel pack Calculated skin due to the gravel pack.
skin*
completions.
Related links:
Mapping of skin components between PIPESIM Classic and the new PIPESIM

144
PIPESIM User Guide
There are slight differences between the way the skin components are defined in PIPESIM Classic
(PIPESIM 2012.4 and older versions) and PIPESIM 2015.2 (and newer versions) as outlined in the
mapping below.
PIPESIM PIPESIM Changes

Classic 2015.2 (and
newer
versions)
Damaged Damaged zone None
zone skin skin
Gravel pack Gravel pack None
skin skin
Frac pack Frac pack skin None
skin
Perforation Compacted/ The perforation skin has been renamed to the compacted/
skin Crushed zone crushed skin, because the value is computed using either the
skin McCleod or Karakas/Tariq crushed zone skin equation,
depending on the selection.
Partial Perforation & The partial penetration/deviation skin has been split into:
penetration/ Partial • Perforation & Partial penetration* skin: This combines the
Deviation skin penetration skin partial penetration skin which is always calculated, and the
Deviation skin perforation skin, which are additional perforation skin
components, excluding the compacted/crushed zone skin
that are calculated only when the Karakas/Tariq model is
selected. These additional perforation skin components are
the skins due to the plane flow effect (Sh), the vertical
converging effect (Sv) and the wellbore skin effect (Swb).
• Deviation skin: The deviation skin is still calculated the same
way.
*Note: There will be a slight difference in the calculated partial
penetration skin value in PIPESIM Classic when compared with
PIPESIM 2015.2 (and newer versions), because a bug where
the perforated (or open hole) interval length was not being
correctly converted to TVD has been fixed in PIPESIM 2015.2
(and newer versions).
Related links:
Darcy's skin properties - openhole (p.112)
Darcy's skin properties - openhole gravel packed (p.115)
Darcy's skin properties - perforated (p.118)
Darcy's skin properties - perforated and gravel packed (p.118)
Darcy's skin properties - frac packed (p.127)

145
PIPESIM User Guide
Multi-rate well test data

In addition to the standard IPR equations, test data can be utilized so that the inflow can be
matched to actual measured data. A minimum of three data points is required. Two types of multi-
rate test are available:
Multipoint (default)
A flow-after-flow test sequence. Static pressure is taken as a constant throughout the test
period. The flowrate (Q) and corresponding flowing bottom hole pressure (Pwf) are
required. These are entered into the spreadsheet.
Isochronal
This type of test is normally performed in reservoirs with low permeability where the time
taken to reach stabilized flow conditions is unacceptably long (such as low permeability
sands). Isochronal testing is performed by periods of flowing followed by shutting-in of a
well (normally with increasing rate). The wellbore flowing pressure is recorded during each
flow period at a specific time (for example if the time is 4 hours, then the test is referred to
as a 4-hour isochronal test). Due to the long stabilization time normally associated with the
isochronal test, reservoir conditions need not return to the original static pressure. Hence a
different static reservoir pressure is recorded. The flowrate (Q), flowing bottom hole
pressure (Pwf) and static reservoir pressure (Pws) are required. These are entered into
the spreadsheet.
Once the test data has been entered, the IPR constants (for example PI, A and B, C and n, and so
on) will be computed and displayed.
Related links:
IPR options and applicability table (p.95)
Well productivity index (PI) reservoir properties (p.97)
Vogel's reservoir properties (p.97)
Fetkovich's reservoir properties (p.98)
Jones' reservoir properties (p.98)
Backpressure's reservoir properties (p.99)
Forchheimer's equation (p.100)
Multilayer completions
A multilayer reservoir model is easy to construct in PIPESIM by adding multiple layers to the
wellbore and specifying necessary data and inflow performance for each layer. These layers may
be connected to the same reservoir drawing same fluid with or without variation in phase ratios or
may be connected to separate reservoirs drawing different fluids. Constructing a multilayer well in
PIPESIM requires all these layers connected to the well and configured in such a way that a single
flow path is maintained and the fluids are commingled. Specific validation in PIPESIM will ensure
that single flow path is maintained in a multilayer well.

146
PIPESIM User Guide
Figure 1: Valid well with a linear flowpath and point connection at each intermediate layer and
commingled fluids.
Figure 2: Invalid well as top layer follows a separate flowpath; fluids are not comingled.
If the fluids from different layers are not commingled, the individual layers should be treated as part
of separate wells and be modeled as a network with the two wells connected at a common junction
representing the wellhead.
There is no limit to the number of layers/reservoirs that can be added in a well can be added to the
model. These layers can be either vertical completions, horizontal completions or a combination
and the flow path is controlled using downhole tools like packers, sliding sleeves and/or tubing
plugs.
Layers
A completion represents each layer. Each layer is independent with respect to the layer properties,
Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) and fluid model and are treated as separate source/
boundary for operations like Nodal Analysis and Network Simulation.
Note: Typical single branch operations like PT Profile and System Analysis treat the bottommost
layer as the inlet boundary for the well.
Crossflow
PIPESIM can model both Production and Injection wells. In a typical production well, all the layers
are intended to contribute fluid into the wellbore and the commingled fluid is expected to flow

147
PIPESIM User Guide
upward in the wellbore towards the wellhead. On the other hand, a typical injection well expects
injected fluid coming from the wellhead to flow downward with each layer receiving part of the
injected fluid.
Figure 3: Crossflow scenarios indicating cases that can be modeled using PIPESIM as Valid
cases.
However, the exact flow profile depends on the wellbore hydraulics and therefore crossflow may
exist in one of more layers. As shown above in Figure 3 (cases a, b, d and e), PIPESIM allows
crossflow as long as intended flow path in the wellbore (upward for a Production well and
downward for an Injection well) in all sections of wellbore. Cases c) and f) are in breach of intended
flow path in the wellbore and cannot be modeled.
For more information, see Associating Zones with Completions (p.149).
Inlet pressures
When you run a simulation, you must explicitly specify the pressures for each layer.
Note:

148
PIPESIM User Guide
• You cannot rate-specify multi-layer completions for network simulations.

• You cannot specify rates for individual completions.
Nodal analysis and Network simulation expose the boundary conditions for each completion.
However, PT profile and System analysis expose only the inlet pressure (lower-most completion).
For Network simulation, PT profile, and System analysis, when PIPESIM calculates the inlet
pressure, the lower-most completion inlet pressure is calculated while maintaining the same
relative pressure differential as specified in the model for the upper completions.
Related links:
Associate zones with completions

Associating zones is optional; however, it is useful for aggregating reservoir and fluid properties
shared by completions across a large number of wells that draw fluid from a common zone.
1. Select the Use zones check box.
The Zones table appears below the check box.
2. In the row below the headings, click New (+).
3. In the Zone column, select the zone name from the dropdown list. If the zone name does not
appear in the list, use the Zone manager on the Home tab to create it.
Note: To change the values for pressure, temperature, and fluid, use the zone manager on the
Home tab.
4. Enter the depth of the well that intersects zone depth information.
Top MD
Measured depth of the well where the top intersects the zone
Bottom MD
Measured depth of the well where the bottom intersects the zone
5. Ensure the selected zone displays remaining data: pressure, temperature and a fluid model
mapped to the zone.
Note: To add/edit the values for Pressure, Temperature, and Fluid, use the Zone manager on
the Home tab.
6. Repeat the previous steps to add more zones.

7. To remove a zone from a completion, click the row number of the zone that you want to delete
and press DELETE.

149
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: To remove all zones from the Completions tab, clear the Use zones check box. The Zones
section is no longer visible.
Related links:
Manage zones (p.460)
2.1.7 Add surface equipment using the well editor

When working with individual wells in Well-Centric Mode, you can add surface equipment on the
Surface equipment tab in the Well editor.
Note: To add subsurface equipment, use the Downhole equipment tab in the Well editor.
1. On the Surface equipment tab, select an equipment object from available internal node
objects.
2. Move the cursor to the schematic area of the surface equipment tab to a location where you
want to place the equipment.
The cursor will show the selected equipment with an add (+) sign over it.
3. Click the Add equipment arrow pointing to the right to place the equipment.
The equipment appears in the preview pane at the top.
4. To add a connection between the well and an equipment object or between 2 equipment
objects:
• Select one of the connections (connector, flowline or riser) and move to the schematic area.
The cursor will show a connection symbol and a sign (right or wrong) indicating validity of
the connection.
• Move the cursor to the first equipment object (with a connection port available) that you want
to connect and click. One end of the connector gets connected to the first equipment. The
cursor still shows the connection symbol.
• Click on the second equipment object (with a connection port available) that you want to
connect.
5. Repeat the steps above to add multiple equipment objects and connect them together.
Note: In the well-centric mode, well and surface equipment connections strictly maintain a linear
flow path by restricting every internal node object to two connection ports (inlet and outlet) only.
Additional ports for multi-outlet ports equipments such as 2-phase and 3-phase separators are
ignored.
Not all the equipment and connections added above form part of the well's surface equipment. The
end (or start in case of an injection well) of the well branch is controlled by the well stream outlet

150
PIPESIM User Guide
(or inlet for an injection well), which by default is at the wellhead. However, you can set any of the
above equipment or connection as a well stream outlet (or inlet for an injection well).
6. Define the properties for the equipments and connections added:
a. Select any equipment or connection on the surface equipment schematic (or from the list of
surface equipment objects and connections displayed at the top of well or from the property
pane schematic)
The property pane for the selected equipment or connection appears under the surface
equipment schematic.
b. Complete the required data for the selected equipment or connection.
c. Repeat this step for all equipment objects and connections.
Note: If you click the well instead of a surface equipment or connection, it will show the property
editor for the wellstream outlet (or inlet for an injection well) under the surface equipment
schematic.
See Configure wellstream outlet or inlet conditions (p.220) for more detail on these.
Related links:
Expander properties (p.167)
Flowline - simple model properties (p.168)
Generic equipment properties (p.177)
Generic pump properties (p.178)
Heat exchanger properties (p.180)
Injection point properties (p.181)
Source and junctions properties (p.217)
Generic multiphase booster properties
Multiplier/adder properties (p.207)
Riser - simple model properties (p.207)
Three phase separator (p.214)
Two phase separator (p.215)
Configure wellstream outlet or inlet conditions (p.220)
View surface equipment properties (p.223)

151
PIPESIM User Guide
2.1.8 Work with well tabs and ribbons

Use the well-centric mode or the Well editor to configure all properties for a well. The Well
tools context tab appears when a well-centric model is open. The well core tabs group related
features together within the Ribbon. The core tabs are Home, Insert, and Format.
Well Core Tabs
Tab Description
Workspace A common tab that appears in both Well-centric mode or Network-centric mode
where you can access high level controls (for example, open, close, save, etc.). You
can also access various Help resources.
Home Select well tasks (for example, selecting well-centric or single branch tasks) and
views, and access the well selector, manage Data (Catalogs, flowline, fluid and/or
zone), select Fluid mode, access to simulation settings, or configure layout options
including switching between well-centric and network-centric modes.
Insert By default, the Insert tab groups tubular, downhole equipment and artificial
equipment for inserting these and creating a well interactively on Well schematic.
However, the content of the tab changes to display surface equipment when you are
in Surface equipment tab of the well editor.
Format View the wellbore in 1D or 2D style and control the sectional view of the wellbore;
show or hide wellbore flow paths, schematic labels, and depth references. You can
also print, preview, or save the well as a template.
Well Insert Tab
Ribbon group Description

Tubulars Add tubing and casing to a wellbore schematic.
Downhole equipment Access the necessary equipment required to build a new wellbore
schematic.
Auxiliary Add a nodal point to the well.
Artificial lift Add a method to raise, or lift, fluid from a well.
Related links:
2.1.9 Interactive wellbore schematic

The Wellbore schematic, located in the Well editor, displays the well components - tubular,
downhole equipment and artificial lift equipment in a schematic view.
• Well geometry display : You can view a well in 1D (linear mode appropriate for a vertical well)
or 2D mode (to display well deviation from vertical to properly display a deviated well.

152
PIPESIM User Guide
• High resolution sectional display: You can visualize a well as built in various high resolution
sectional views.
Figure 2.1. Full sectional 2D view (left) and quarter sectional 1D view (right)
• Interactive Well Building: With drag and drop support, you can build the entire well (tubular,
downhole equipment including completions and artificial lift equipment). This is a quick and
easy way of building the well visually and interactively. You can right click any object to delete.
• Flow path indication: One of the significant features that allows you to visualize and model
simple to complex flow paths in the wellbore. The schematic visually indicates a valid flow path
(green) or an invalid flow path (red). An invalid flow path cannot be simulated.

153
PIPESIM User Guide
Figure 2.2. Valid flow path (left) and invalid flow path (right)
• Interaction with well editor tabs: You can select any object (tubular, downhole equipments,
artificial lift equipments) on the Well schematic to open property editors for the selected object.
• Data sync between a Well Schematic and the Well Editor tabs: All relevant data (name, status,
location, etc.) are synchronized between the well schematic and well editor tabs. Any object
added to/deleted from a well schematic gets updated to the well editor tab and vice versa.
• Surface equipment display: If a well has attached surface equipment objects (flowline, pump,
etc), they get listed at the top of well schematic. You can click any of the objects on the surface
equipment list to get to the property editor of selected surface equipment.

154
PIPESIM User Guide
Figure 2.3. Surface equipment listed on the well schematic

• Depth reference display: Locations of all equipment displayed on well schematic are referenced
to a reference depth that you set. However, the positioning of wellbore equipments are off scale
for better visualization. You can show/hide depth the reference display.
• Object label display: All equipment objects displayed on a well schematic also display the name
of the equipment that you set under the well editor tabs. You can move the position of
equipment labels (up/down) or show/hide the object labels for a cleaner display.
Related links:
2.2 Create or edit a network model

A network model is a diagrammatic representation of the pipeline network, showing all the nodes
and the connections between them. The model is displayed as a diagram on the Network viewer
tab. Each node or connection added to the network diagram also appears in the Inputs pane.
• To create a new network model, on the Workspace tab in the Network group, click New.
• To edit a network model, on the Workspace tab in the Network group, click Existing.
• To edit a network model, on the Workspace tab in the Recent workspaces group, click an
existing model name.
2. Select units.
3. Add wells and/or sources.
4. Add pipeline components and field equipment.
5. Create a meaningful title, and then click Save. The default title for new and imported models is
New workspace.pips.
Each network model is stored in a single input file. (It is not necessary to store each model in a
separate directory.) The models are stored in binary data files with the .pips extension.
Related links:
Navigate in the network diagram (p.156)
Units (p.7)

155
PIPESIM User Guide
Add wells (p.158)

Add sources and sinks (p.160)
Add sources and sinks (p.160)
Create a network model from a GIS shapefile automatically (p.53)
Improve network simulation performance (p.293)
2.2.1 Navigate in the network diagram

You can specify the viewable area of your network diagram by
• Panning and zooming to an area
• Centering the network around an object
You can change the appearance of the labels for objects on the network diagram by changing
display properties such as nodes labels and connections. You can also display flow and profile
direction. You can print the model from the network diagram.
Related links:
Pan and zoom in the network diagram (p.156)
Bring objects into view (p.157)
Change the model display properties (p.157)
Print the model from the network diagram (p.158)
Pan and zoom in the network diagram

There are several ways to move from one area to another on the network diagram and to change
the viewing area.
1. To open the network diagram for a well or network, on the Home tab, in the Viewers group,
click Network.
2. To change the zoom level incrementally, on the Format tab, in the Zoom group, click Zoom in
or Zoom out.
3. To zoom to an area of the network, on the Format tab, in the Zoom group, click Zoom area,
left-click a start point on the network diagram, and drag the box to encompass the area that you
want.
4. To zoom into the smallest area that will show all your defined objects, on the Format tab, in the
Zoom group, click Zoom to fit.
Both Zoom area and Zoom to fit are actions that allow you to navigate very quickly to specific
areas of the model.
Tip: Select F4 to zoom to fit.
5. To pan across the network diagram, press CTRL, left-click the network diagram, and drag
across the network.

156
PIPESIM User Guide
6. To use the Overview inset window to adjust the center of the map view, perform the
following actions:
a. On the Format tab, in the Show/hide group, select Overview.
The Overview inset window displays in the upper-right corner of the network diagram. A
box marks the area of the network diagram that you are viewing.
b. In the Overview inset window, left-click the mouse button and drag across the network
diagram before releasing.
A blue box marks the area of the network diagram that you selected. The map is re-centered
at that location.
c. To close the inset window: On the Format tab, in the Show/hide group, clear the Overview
check box.
Related links:
Bring objects into view

Selecting from the list of equipment for your model in the Inputs pane can change the view.
1. On the Home tab, in the Application options group, click a Layout that displays the Inputs
pane.
2. Select an object in the Inputs pane.
If the object was not already in view, the network diagram pans so that the view of the model is
centered at the selected object.
Related links:
Change the model display properties

You can change the appearance of the labels for objects on the network diagram by changing
display properties such as nodes labels and connections. You can also display flow and profile
direction.
click Network.
2. On the Home tab, in the Show/hide group, select the properties you want displayed for the
objects in your model.
Label or action Description

Flow direction Select or clear this check box to show or hide flow direction labels.
Annotations Select or clear this check box to show or hide annotation labels, and then click
which annotations you want for the objects in your model.
Hide results Hide flow direction and annotation labels.

157
PIPESIM User Guide
3. On the Format tab, in the Show/hide group, select the properties you want displayed for
labels.
Label Description
Node labels Select or clear this check box to show or hide the node labels.
Connection labels Select or clear this check box to show or hide labels for connectors, flowlines,
and risers.
Profile direction Select or clear this check box to show or hide profile direction labels.
Related links:
Print the model from the network diagram

You can print the model from the network diagram.
click Network.
2. To print the model, perform one of the following actions:
• On the Format tab, in the Print group, click Print.
• Right-click the network diagram, and then click Print.
3. Select print options, and then click OK.
Note: Labels, icon size changes, and annotations are displayed in the printed copy. However, grid
lines and the Overview inset window are not displayed.
Related links:
2.2.2 Add wells

Use the Well editor (which consists of the Wellbore schematic pane and the tabs that you
use to define the well properties) to create new wells and edit existing ones. A well is one of the
ways fluids can enter (via production well) or leave (via injection well) the network.
A well model is a schematic representation of a well. It contains complete information on the well
including wellbore construction, downhole equipment, artificial lift equipment, completion
information as well as surface equipment as applicable. A well can be created from scratch or
using a template well as starting point.
Important: You need to provide a unique name to all surface and downhole equipment to avoid
possible conflicts. A unique name also helps identify the object definitively when viewing or
analyzing results.

158
PIPESIM User Guide
1. Add a well using the Insert tab or the Inputs pane.

• In network-centric mode, on the Insert tab, in the Boundary nodes group, click Well and
then click on the network diagram to release the object.
A new boundary node object is added to the network diagram.
• In the Inputs pane, right-click Wells, and then click New.
A new well is added to the Wells object tree and to the network diagram.
• On the Contextbar, click the plus (+) sign next to the well selector. In the Inputs pane,
right-click Wells, and then click New. A new well is added to the Wells object tree and to the
network diagram.
Note: A well is the only new boundary node that you can create from the Inputs pane.
However, you can copy and paste a sink or source from the Inputs pane.
2. On the network diagram, double-click the node object to open the Well editor.
3. On the General tab, define the well type, its status, and the flow direction
Field Action
Well name Change the name of the well, if necessary.
Active Indicates whether the well is active.
Note: Simulation tasks cannot be performed on an inactive well. If a network

contains an inactive well, that well and the equipment in its branch are ignored
during network simulation.
Well type Select Production or Injection, based on the intended flow direction. The final
solution depends on system hydraulics.
Check Models a check valve for the well and therefore controls the direction of the flow.
valve Block reverse
setting
The most common setting, Block reverse, ensures that flow is always as
intended; i.e., upward for a production well and downward for an injection well.
Block forward
Block forward blocks flow in the intended direction.
None
No flow block exists, so the flow can go in either direction based on system
hydraulics.
4. Add tubular data.
5. Add a deviation survey.
6. Add downhole equipment, if applicable.
7. Add artificial lift equipment, if applicable.

159
PIPESIM User Guide
8. Add heat transfer data.

9. Add completions.
10. Add surface equipment.
11. Create a meaningful title and Save.
The default title for new and imported models is New workspace.pips.
Each well-centric or network-centric model is stored in a single input file. (You do not need to store
each model in a separate directory.) The models are stored in binary data files with the .pips
extension.
Related links:
Add tubular data (p.55)
Add artificial lift (p.73)
2.2.3 Add sources and sinks

Boundary nodes set the beginning and end point of the fluid flow. The following are boundary
nodes: well, source, and sink.
1. Add boundary nodes using the Insert tab or the Inputs pane.
• In network-centric mode, on the Insert tab, in the Boundary nodes group, click the
appropriate boundary node and then click on the network diagram to release the object.
A new boundary node object is added to the network diagram.
2. On the network diagram, double-click the source or sink to open its editor.
Related links:
Sink properties
A sink is a point where the fluid leaves the system. Normally, it is used to represent a surface
outflow point (for example, separator), not an injection well. A model can have any number of
sinks. See Source, Sink, and Boundary Conditions.
The following table describes the properties.

160
PIPESIM User Guide
Pressure Outlet pressure.
Flowrate Liquid, Gas, or Mass flowrate in corresponding units at stock tank conditions.
Table 2.5: Sink Properties
2.2.4 Add surface equipment using the network diagram

In network-centric mode, you can drag equipment directly to the network diagram from the Insert
tab on the Internal nodes group. This topic covers how to add surface equipment using the
network diagram.
1. In network-centric mode, click the Insert tab.
2. In the Internal nodes group, drag the appropriate equipment icon to the network diagram.
3. Define the properties for the selected surface equipment object by completing one of the
following actions:
• On the network diagram, double-click the equipment object to open its editor.
• On the network diagram, right-click the equipment object and click Edit to open its editor.
• On the network diagram, double-click a well to open the Well editor and select the
Surface equipment tab. You may then select Node objects to insert in the Surface
equipment schematic and use connection objects to connect the node objects together.
Related links:
Check valves (p.65)
Expander properties (p.167)
Generic equipment properties (p.177)
Generic pump properties (p.178)
Heat exchanger properties (p.180)
Injection point properties (p.181)
Source and junctions properties (p.217)
Generic multiphase booster (p.183)
Multiplier/adder properties (p.207)

161
PIPESIM User Guide
Configure wellstream outlet or inlet conditions (p.220)

View surface equipment properties (p.223)
Choke properties
A choke is a device that limits flow by mechanically constricting the cross-sectional area through
which fluid flows. The fluid velocity increases through the constriction and a pressure loss occurs.
Important: Downhole chokes and surface chokes use the same properties, although they are
created differently and appear differently in the Well schematic.
A surface choke is not part of wellbore schematic. It appears on surface schematic as below:
Choke properties
Name Unique name of the choke.
Active Select this check box to activate the choke so that it will be used during simulation.
Clear the check box to deactivate and the choke will be bypassed during simulation.
General choke properties
Subcritical Select a correlation from the list. (All correlations except Mechanistic and
Correlation API14B require hydrocarbon liquids at Stock tank conditions.)
Critical Select a correlation from the list. Can be used to set the critical flowrate. This
Correlation may not match the subcritical flow at the critical pressure ratio, so the
subcritical flow correlation is adjusted to ensure that the flow is correct at the
critical pressure.
Bean size Enter the diameter of the choke bean. The bean size represents the diameter
of the available flow area assuming that the constriction is circular.
Critical pressure Used to determine the downstream pressure when critical flow occurs in the
ratio choke. You can specify a value or have it calculated. If you select Calculate,
the calculations are performed using the Ashford-Pierce method.
Tolerance Tolerance for identification of critical flow conditions (given as a percentage or
fraction)
Upstream pipe ID Enter the inside diameter of the pipe upstream of the choke.
Measured depth Downhole location of the choke

162
PIPESIM User Guide
Advanced choke properties
Gas Phase flow (Used in the Mechanistic correlation) Flow coefficient for the gas
Liquid Phase flow (Used in the Mechanistic correlation) Flow coefficient for the liquid
Table 2.6: Flow coefficients
Discharge Used to calculate the flow coefficients.
coefficient
Fluid heat capacity Normally calculated, but can be specified. The valid range is 0.7 to 2.
ratio (Cp/Cv) Typically it is 1.26 for a natural gas, 1.4 for a diatomic gas. It is used to
calculate the Critical pressure ratio if that is set to 0.
Y at critical point Gas expansion factor at critical flow. Normally, it is calculated, but it can be
specified. The valid range is 0.5 to 1. It is used to modify the pressure drop
equation to allow for gas compressibility.
Table 2.7: Choke parameters
Flowrate Flowrate to identify critical flow.
Pressure ratio Pressure ratio to identify critical flow.
Sonic upstream velocity Sonic upstream velocity to identify critical flow.
Sonic downstream velocity Sonic downstream velocity to identify critical flow.
Table 2.8: Identification of Critical and Supercritical Flow
The choke model calculates the pressure ratio across the choke for the current flowrate. The
pressure ratio calculated is then categorized as subcritical, critical, or supercritical based on criteria
defined by the user. Use the check boxes to define the criteria for identification of critical and
supercritical flow. Note the following behaviors:
• Clearing all the check boxes prevents identification of critical and supercritical flow, so flow is
always subcritical. Do this for API14B compatibility.
• If more than one check box is selected, critical flow will be identified by any of the selected
criteria that are met.
Adjust sub-critical Adjust subcritical correlation to match flowrate predicted by critical
correlation correlation.

163
PIPESIM User Guide
Print detailed calculations Detailed choke calculation output. It appears on your terminal
screen and on the primary output page.
Table 2.9: Miscellaneous options
For more information, see Choke (p.562).
Related links:
Check valves
You may block the flow at any point in the surface network by using check valves.
Note: Blocking flow in wells do not require a check valve, instead this setting is defined in the
General tab in the well editor.
1. To create a check valve, use the surface equipment toolbar in the network diagram view to
insert a check valve in the model. Connect both ends using a flowline, riser or connector.
2. Double-click the check valve to define the direction flow will be blocked which will be relative to
the orientation of the yellow arrow on the check valve.
Icon name Icon

Block none
Block reverse
Block forward
Block both

164
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
Compressor properties
Built-in or user-developed compressor curves can be used to describe the relationship between
differential pressure, flowrate, and efficiency for a range of compressor speeds. If compressor
curves are used, the compressor speed and number of stages become additional factors.
Compressor properties
Name Name of the compressor.
Active Select this check box to activate the compressor so that it will be used during
simulation. Clear the check box to deactivate.
Operation parameters
Discharge pressure Pressure at the compressor outlet.
Pressure differential Pressure increases (positive) across the compressor.
Pressure ratio Discharge pressure/suction pressure ratio. This is Pout/Pin.
Power The horsepower of the compressor.
Route Adiabatic
The compressor follows an adiabatic (no heat transfer) compression
process. This is available for modeling with both black oil and
compositional fluid.
Polytropic
The compressor follows a polytropic compression process. This is
available for modeling with both black oil and compositional fluids.
Mollier
The compressor follows an isoentropic (no change in entropy)
compression process. This is available only for compositional models.
Efficiency Compressor efficiency.
Honor stonewall Specifies whether the centrifugal compressor honors the Stonewall
limit operating limit.
Use curves Specifies whether to use data from the Compressor catalog. When
selected, the Performance data properties section appears so you can
select a compressor from the catalog.
Reciprocating Specifies that the compressor is a reciprocating compressor. This property
compressor is visible only when the Use curves check box is selected.

165
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: The four basic compressor parameters (discharge pressure, pressure differential, pressure
ratio, and power) indicate upper limits for these whenever more than one of these parameters is
supplied. Compressor performance will be controlled by the most limiting of these parameters.
Use curves
When you select the Use curves check box, the Performance data properties section appears.
You can select the manufacturer and a model from the catalog; all other values are populated
frrom the catalog.
Performance data has the following tabs:
General
editable properties are display units, Operating frequency, Operating speed, and Head
factor
Table
displays calculated performance data in a tabular format
Curve
graphically displays the catalog performance data
Performance data - general tab
Manufacturer Selectable from the catalog.
Model (Catalog value) Compressor model name.
Centrifugal Compressor (Catalog Values)
Min flowrate Minimum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be
constructed below this, but warning messages are shown.
Max flowrate Maximum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be
constructed above this, but warning messages are shown.
Base speed Speed at which the performance curve is defined. To change the
value for simulation purposes, enter an operating speed.
Reciprocating Compressor (Catalog Values)
Abs. min. suction pressure Absolute minimum suction pressure.
Base speed Speed at which the performance curve is defined. To change the
value for simulation purposes, enter an operating speed.
Inter-stage temperature Temperature of the gas between stages.
Stages Number of stages used.
Operating and Tuning Parameters (editable properties)

166
PIPESIM User Guide
Operating frequency (Both) Specify one of these; the other is calculated.
Operating speed
Head factor (Centrifugal compressor) Allows the compressor head to be factored.
Performance data - table tab
Centrifugal compressor Displays a table with flowrate, head, and efficiency taken from the
(catalog performance catalog.
table)
Flowrate Fluid flowrate measured at actual pressure and temperature
conditions.
Head Specifies the compressor head.
Efficiency (Catalog value) Specifies the efficiency of the compressor.
Reciprocating For a selected discharge pressure, displays a performance table with
compressor (catalog flowrate, suction pressure and efficiency (or power). Performance
performance table) tables for multiple discharge pressure can be stored and displayed.
Discharge pressure (Reciprocating compressor) Pressure at the compressor outlet. For
each discharge pressure, there is a dedicated performance table.
Flowrate Gas flowrate measured at standard conditions.
Suction Pressure (Reciprocating compressor) Pressure at the compressor inlet.
Efficiency Power Performance data can have either efficiency or power. The unknown
parameter will be calculated during simulation.
Note: If the model has two or more reciprocating compressors in a series (for example, field
compressors followed by a plant compressor) any downstream compressor must have a greater
capacity than the upstream compressor, even if only fractionally greater. For example, 10.00
mmscf/d followed by 10.01 mmscf/d.
For more information, see Compressor (p.836) keyword.
Related links:
Add centrifugal compressors to the catalog (p.22)
Add reciprocating compressors to the catalog (p.22)
Expander properties
An expander is used to recover energy from waste gas. The energy recovered can be used to
drive other equipment or to produce electricity. The gas passes over the nose cone of the
expander and into its stator blades, impacting the rotor blades resulting in a temperature drop in
addition to recovery of the pressure energy.

167
PIPESIM User Guide
Expander properties
Name Name of the expander.
Active Select this check box to activate the expander so that it will be used during simulation.
Clear the check box to deactivate.
Discharge Pressure at the expander outlet.
pressure
Pressure Pressure decrease across the expander (negative number).
differential
Pressure ratio Ratio of inlet pressure to discharge pressure. This is Pin/Pout.
Power Power of the expander.
Route Adiabatic
Adiabatic expansion is performed. For black oil models the heat capacity
ratio (Cp/Cv) is used as the adiabatic exponent (assumed to be constant with
a value equal to 1.26). For compositional models the heat capacity ratio is
calculated (using the relationship: Cp = Cv - R). The heat capacity is
obtained as the average of the expander suction and discharge conditions.
Polytropic
Polytropic expansion is performed. The heat capacity ratio (Cp/Cv) is
calculated in a similar manner to that outlined above for Adiabatic expansion.
Mollier
Expansion is based on the Mollier method, isentropic expansion from suction
to discharge pressures. This option is valid for compositional models only.
Efficiency Efficiency of the expander
For more information, see Expander (p.841) keyword.
Related links:
Flowline - simple model properties

You can define a flowline in a simple model (with basic minimum data) or detailed model (to
capture detailed profile as well as heat transfer calculations). The property pane and the parameter
displayed will depend on the options that you choose.

168
PIPESIM User Guide
Simple model
Use this mode if the flowline is relatively linear (horizontal pipe, vertical pipe, or inclined
pipe with constant inclination angle) and you want to perform a simplistic heat transfer
calculation using the known heat transfer coefficient and a constant ambient temperature.
Detailed model
Allows you to capture complex flowline geometry and at the same time, you will be able to
perform detailed heat transfer calculation including pipeline coating, variation in
environmental conditions, pipe burial data, etc.
Flowline properties
Name Name of the flowline.
Environment Sets the type of flowline to Land (air data used) or Subsea (metocean data
used). In the network diagram, land flowlines are displayed in black while
subsea flowlines are displayed in dark blue.
Mode Based on data availability and need, you can switch between Simple and
Detailed mode. To switch to the detailed model, click Detailed. Click Simple
to return to the simple model (the detailed data will be deleted). Detailed
mode has an additional tab for detailed heat transfer modeling.
Override global Defines environmental data such as local ambient temperature.
environmental data
Pipe data properties
Inside diameter Inside diameter for the flowline. Only one diameter can be configured per
flowline.
Wall thickness Select and specify either wall thickness or outside diameter (excluding any
Outside diameter coatings).
Roughness Enter the typical value for the absolute pipe roughness based on the material
type. The default value is 0.001 inches (0.0254 mm).
Note: If there is any change in flowline inside diameter, wall thickness, or roughness along the
flowpath, add a second flowline object.
Profile data properties
Rate of An artificial factor used to introduce undulations into the flowline (specific to
undulations simple mode only). Undulation is typically used for a horizontal pipe to capture
terrain effects (unevenness of the underlying surface) and result in a higher
overall pressure drop due to the fact that liquid holdup is higher in inclined

169
PIPESIM User Guide
sections and lower in declined sections resulting in less pressure recovery.
Enter the total change in elevation for every 1,000 units of length. (To model a
totally flat flowline, enter 0.) Undulations capture terrain effects and result in a
higher overall pressure drop.
Horizontal Select either the horizontal distance or length to specify the distance covered by
distance the flowline from start to end.
Measured
distance
Elevation Change in elevation between the start and end of the flowline object. Enter a
difference negative value for a downhill flowline, or a positive value for an uphill flowline.
Elevation changes are relative to the object itself and not influenced by adjacent
flowlines.
Heat transfer data properties
Ambient Ambient temperature for the fluid surrounding the flowline.
temperature
U Value type Heat transfer coefficient (U Value) is a measure of thermal property of pipe
(with/without coating) and surrounding material. In simple mode, a known
overall heat transfer coefficient is used. Available options are: Insulated,
Coated, Bare (in air), Bare (in water), and User supplied.
Heat transfer Based on selected U value type, the corresponding pre-defined heat transfer
coefficient coefficient is filled in. Enter a value if you have selected U value type as User
supplied.
Inside film Click the appropriate option to either Include the Inside film coefficient (within
coefficient the supplied heat transfer coefficient above) or Calculate separately.
Calculation is performed based on selected methods (under Home »
Simulation settings » Heat transfer tab)
Flowline schematic
Geometry For a typical land flowline, the geometry profile is a plot of horizontal distance
profile (plot) versus elevation, where horizontal distance is the primary axis (X-axis).
However, if you select a subsea flowline, the configuration changes to depth as
primary axis (Y axis) versus horizontal distance.
Ambient Similar to a geometry profile, for a land flowline, ambient temperature is plotted
temperature against horizontal distance (X axis). For a subsea flowline, the ambient
(plot) temperature is plotted against depth (Y axis).
Data view By default, the flowline geometry and ambient temperature profile is displayed
button (plot) graphically. A table control button at the bottom right of the plot allows you to

170
PIPESIM User Guide
switch to a tabular view of data. When in tabular view, a chart shaped button
allows you to switch back to plot view
Flowline start This is a read only field that indicates the starting point of the flowline in the
at model and thus indicates the orientation (profile direction) of the flowline in the
network.
Flip geometry Flipping the geometry will swap the start and end nodes for flowlines. The start
node defines the flowline orientation and is also indicated by a triangular arrow
situated on the flowline object on the network diagram or well surface equipment
tab.
The flipping behavior is slightly different depending on whether the survey data
is populated from GIS or not. If the survey data is manually specified, flipping
the geometry enables a convenient means of swapping the start and end nodes
for a given profile, saving the user from having to invert the order of entries in a
survey table if the original direction was incorrect. If the GIS mode is selected, in
addition to swapping the start and end nodes, the survey is inverted as well
such that the elevations associated with the geographic locations defined are
correctly preserved. For cases where flowlines are created by importing
shapefiles, the flowline orientations are arbitrarily assigned. Thus, when the
Populate from GIS map option is enabled, flipping the geometry will not
change the numerical simulation results (in contrast to flipping manually defined
profiles).
Note: The pipe geometry should not be confused with flow direction reported by
the simulation results. The flow direction (forward or reverse) is reported relative
to the branch inlet-outlet, not relative to the pipeline orientation. Branches may
contain multiple flowlines (with potentially different geometries and by
convention, the branch inlet-outlet is reflected in the name (eg. J1_J2) where J1
is in the inlet. For boundary nodes that contain the name of the boundary, source
and production well branch inlets are always at the fluid entry whereas for sinks
and injection wells the branch outlets are always at the fluid delivery.
For more information, see Typical Values (p.725) and Heat Transfer Coefficient (p.641).
Related links:
Environmental properties (p.277)
Flowline - detailed model properties - general tab (p.171)
Pipeline comparison: land, subsea, and riser (p.176)
Flowline - detailed model properties - general tab

Detailed mode allows modeling complex variation in flowline geometry and also exposes detailed
heat transfer calculation including modeling for pipe coatings, and so forth. One of the most

171
PIPESIM User Guide
important features of detailed flowline is populating data directly from the GIS map elevation
services.
Detailed mode properties
Name Name of the flowline.
Environment Sets the type of flowline to Land (atmospheric data used) or Subsea
(oceanic data used). In the network diagram, land flowlines are displayed in
black. Subsea flowlines are dark blue.
Mode To switch to the detailed model, click Detailed. Click Simple to return to the
simple model (the detailed data will be deleted).
Override global Defines environmental data such as local ambient temperature.
environment data
General tab - pipe data properties
Inside diameter Inside diameter for the flowline. Only one diameter can be configured per
flowline
Wall thickness Select the appropriate property, and then enter either the wall thickness or the
Outside diameter outside diameter of the flowline, excluding any coatings.
Note: If there is any change in flowline inside diameter, wall thickness, or roughness along the
flowpath, add a second flowline object.
General tab - profile data properties
Populate Values for Measured distance and elevation are populated directly from the map
from GIS data, if the model is configured accordingly on the map.
map
Distance Click to calculate Horizontal distance or Measured distance to enter data. The
unknown will be calculated geometrically. The distance here refers to the
cumulative distance as you go along the flowline in the direction of its orientation
Vertical Absolute elevation of each flowline profile data point. For a land flowline, elevation
distance is the only option. These elevation/depth values are relative to the flowline starting
node and are not influenced by any other data. The vertical distance selection
option is available for subsea flowline only. It allows you to choose either elevation
or depth.

172
PIPESIM User Guide
Profile table The table column options appear based on selected distance options. Specify
cumulative data in the direction of profile in the increasing order of horizontal/
measured distance and the corresponding elevation/depth at each point
Flowline schematic
As you enter flowline data, you will notice a set of plots displaying geometric profile (distance vs.
elevation/depth) and the profile of ambient temperature (against distance/depth). The plot
orientation changes based on the flowline environment (land/subsea).
Geometry For a typical land flowline, the geometry profile is a plot of horizontal distance
profile (plot) vs. elevation, where horizontal distance is the primary axis (X-axis). However, if
you select a subsea flowline, the configuration changes to depth as primary axis
(Y axis) vs. horizontal distance.
Ambient Similar to the geometry profile, for a land flowline, ambient temperature is
temperature plotted against horizontal distance (X axis). For a subsea flowline, the ambient
(plot) temperature is plotted against depth (Y axis).
Data view By default, flowline geometry and ambient temperature profile are displayed
button (plot) graphically. A table control button at the bottom right of the plot allows you to
switch to tabular view of data. When in tabular view, a chart shaped button
allows you to switch back to plot view.
Flowline start This is a read only field that indicates the starting point of the flowline in the
at model and thus indicates the orientation (profile direction) of the flowline in the
network.
Flip geometry Flipping the geometry will swap the start and end nodes for flowlines. The start
node defines the flowline orientation and is also indicated by a triangular arrow
situated on the flowline object on the network diagram or well surface equipment
tab.
The flipping behavior is slightly different depending on whether the survey data
is populated from GIS or not. If the survey data is manually specified, flipping
the geometry enables a convenient means of swapping the start and end nodes
for a given profile, saving the user from having to invert the order of entries in a
survey table if the original direction was incorrect. If the GIS mode is selected, in
addition to swapping the start and end nodes, the survey is inverted as well
such that the elevations associated with the geographic locations defined are
correctly preserved. For cases where flowlines are created by importing
shapefiles, the flowline orientations are arbitrarily assigned. Thus, when the
Populate from GIS map option is enabled, flipping the geometry will not
change the numerical simulation results (in contrast to flipping manually defined
profiles).
Note: The pipe geometry should not be confused with flow direction reported by
the simulation results. The flow direction (forward or reverse) is reported relative

173
PIPESIM User Guide
to the branch inlet-outlet, not relative to the pipeline orientation. Branches may
contain multiple flowlines (with potentially different geometries and by
convention, the branch inlet-outlet is reflected in the name (eg. J1_J2) where J1
is in the inlet. For boundary nodes that contain the name of the boundary, source
and production well branch inlets are always at the fluid entry whereas for sinks
and injection wells the branch outlets are always at the fluid delivery.
Related links:
Flowline - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab (p.174)
Flowline - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab

After you enter the detailed properties on the General tab, enter the detailed properties on the
Heat transfer tab.
Heat transfer tab properties (multiple U value input method)
U Value input Overall heat transfer coefficient (U value)
method Specify
Select this option to enter a single U value if it is known.
Calculate
Select this option when the heat transfer coefficient of the surrounding
medium is not known. A heat balance is performed using heat transfer
coefficients calculated from supplied data describing coatings, burial
conditions, and ambient fluid properties.
U Value type Select the pipe type: Insulated, Coated, Bare (in air), Bare (in water), or User
supplied.
Heat transfer Based on selected U value type, a corresponding pre-defined heat transfer
coefficient coefficient is supplied. Enter a value if you have selected U value type as User
supplied.
Inside film Click the appropriate option to either Include the inside film coefficient (within
coefficient the supplied heat transfer coefficient above), or choose to Calculate
separately. Calculation is performed based on selected methods (under
Home » Simulation settings » Heat transfer tab).

174
PIPESIM User Guide
Ambient This table appears only if the override global environmental data is checked.
temperature Depending on the flowline environment, the column option changes. For a
typical land flowline, you get a table of horizontal distance vs. ambient
temperature but for a subsea flowline the table option is depth vs. ambient
temperature.
Heat transfer tab - thermal data properties (calculate U value input method)
Pipe conductivity Thermal conductivity of the pipe material
Ground conductivity Thermal conductivity of the ground. Used when pipe is partially or fully
buried in the ground.
Pipe burial depth The burial depth refers to the depth of the centerline of the pipe with
respect to ground surface. Burial data takes into account pipe as well as
coating layers (if any). If left blank, pipe is assumed to be elevated above
ground. A zero depth indicates half-buried pipe.
Wind speed (land Wind speed is populated from global environment data but can be
environment) overridden here.
Environmental data This table appears only if the override global environmental data is
table checked. For a land environment, you can enter ambient temperature
against horizontal distance. However, for a subsea flowline, an additional
column to specify current velocity appears.
Heat transfer tab - pipe coating details properties (calculate U value input method)
Pipe coating You can add multiple layers of coating. For each coating layer, following data is
details needed:
• Thermal conductivity of the coating layer
• Thickness of the coating layer
• Description (for reference purposes only)
Overall outside Outside diameter of pipe and coating layers. This value is used to display pipe
diameter cross section schematic underneath
Pipe cross- This schematic underneath the coating table displays:
section • Pipe cross-section showing pipe and coating layers in different colors
schematic
• Pipe burial display (for a partially buried pipe, it will display sections of pipe
below and above ground)
• Environment (sky blue for a land environment and dark blue for subsea
environment).

175
PIPESIM User Guide
For more information, see Heat Transfer Coefficient (p.641) and Internal Fluid Film Heat Transfer
Coefficient (p.644).
Related links:
Manage flowlines and risers (p.458)
Pipeline comparison: land, subsea, and riser

This table describes the attributes for each type of pipeline.
Attribute Riser Subsea flowline Land flowline

Geometry Cannot be flipped. A Can be flipped. Can be flipped.
check box is available to
mark downcomers.
GIS Cannot use GIS to Cannot use GIS to capture Can use GIS to capture the
capture pipeline pipeline geometry profile.The geometry profile. The
geometry profile. ambient temperature and ambient temperature data on
current velocity table on the the Heat transfer tab does
Heat transfer tab does not not change. Ambient
change. Ambient temperatures temperatures for the GIS
and current velocities for the profile points are calculated
GIS profile points are by interpolation based on
calculated by interpolation available data using the
based on the available data interpolation method for land
using the interpolation method flowline (see interpolation
for subsea flowline (see method).
interpolation method).
Ambient Indexed on depth/ Indexed on depth/elevation. Indexed on horizontal
temperature elevation. The table has The table has to be monotonic distance. The table has to be
and current to be monotonic on on depth. Use of depth is monotonic on horizontal
velocity data (if depth. Use of depth is recommended. distance.
applicable) recommended.
Interpolation of Interpolation linearly Interpolation linearly between Interpolation linearly
ambient between two points two points provided. between two points
temperature provided. Interpolation Interpolation linearly outside the provided. Interpolation with
and current linearly outside the range of points provided. the constant last value
velocity data (if range of points provided. outside the range of points
applicable) provided.
Related links:

176
PIPESIM User Guide
Riser - detailed model properties - general tab (p.210)
Generic equipment properties

You can use generic equipment properties to model any object that imparts a pressure and/or
temperature change to the flowing stream at any point in the model.
Name Name of the generic equipment object
Active Select the Active check box to activate the generic equipment so that it will be used
during simulation. Clear the check box to deactivate and it will be bypassed during
simulation.
General properties
Route Select one of the following thermodynamic routes to calculate fluid temperature
change resulting from changes in pressure:
Isenthalpic
constant enthalpy (the default option)
Isentropic
constant entropy
Isothermal
constant temperature
Pressure Select one of the following pressure change options:
Discharge Pressure
A fixed flowing fluid discharge pressure. Pressure at the outlet. Specifying the
discharge pressure is discouraged, particularly in network simulations, as this
specification often creates pressure discontinuities. It is intended to be used
only when the downstream branch is a terminating branch and not pressure
specified.
Pressure differential
Pressure gain (positive) or loss (negative). In a network model, this is assumed
to follow the branch's flow direction, so if the branch flow reverses, this
property changes sign.
Pressure ratio
Ratio of discharge pressure to the inlet pressure.
Temperature Select one of the following temperature change options:
Temperature differential
Temperature increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the equipment.
Discharge Temperature
Fixed flowing fluid outlet temperature.

177
PIPESIM User Guide
Duty
Power required to change the temperature and/or pressure of the fluid. If this is
specified, the corresponding fluid enthalpy change is calculated and added to
that resulting from any pressure change using the Route. The outlet
temperature is then adjusted accordingly.
Note: If Delta Pressure or Pressure Ratio is specified without the Discharge properties,
PIPESIM* uses the thermodynamic Route to calculate the fluid outlet temperature. Isenthalpic is
the most appropriate route when you want to simulate chokes, predict Joule-Thompson cooling
across pressure reduction valves, and so on.
Related links:
Generic pump properties

The basic pump model uses centrifugal pump equations to determine the relationship between
inlet pressure and temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, hydraulic
power, and efficiency.
Name Name of the pump.
Active Select this check box to activate the pump so that it will be used during simulation.
Clear the check box to deactivate.
Discharge Pressure at the outlet. Specifying the discharge pressure is discouraged,
pressure particularly in network simulations, as this specification often creates pressure
discontinuities. It is intended to be used only when the downstream branch is a
terminating branch and not pressure specified.
Pressure Pressure change across the pump.
differential
Pressure ratio Discharge pressure/suction pressure ratio (Pout/Pin).
Power Shaft power required to increase the pressure of the fluid.
Route Adiabatic (default)
The pump follows an adiabatic (constant enthalpy) process. This is available
for modeling with both black oil and compositional fluid.

178
PIPESIM User Guide
Mollier
The pump follows an isentropic (no change in entropy) process. This is
available only for compositional models.
Isothermal
The pump follows an isothermal (no change in temperature) process. This is
available for modeling with both black oil and compositional fluids.
Efficiency Efficiency of the pump.
Use curves Specifies whether to use data from the Pump catalog. When selected, the
performance data properties section appears so you can select a pump from the
catalog.
Note: The four basic pump parameters (discharge pressure, pressure differential, pressure ratio,
and power) indicate upper limits. Whenever more than one of these parameters are supplied,
Pump performance will be controlled by the most limiting of these parameters.
Use curves
When you select the Use curves check box, the Performance data properties section appears.
You can select the manufacturer and a model from the catalog; all other values are populated from
the Pump catalog.
Performance data has the following tabs:
General
selection from catalog, operating data and tuning
Table
displays catalog performance data in tabular format
Curve
graphically displays the catalog performance data
Performance data properties - general tab
Manufacturer Selectable from the catalog.
Model (Catalog value) Pump model name.
Min flowrate (Catalog value) Minimum recommended flowrate. The performance curve
can be constructed below this value, but warning messages are shown.
Max flowrate (Catalog value) Maximum recommended flowrate. The performance curve
can be constructed above this value, but warning messages are shown.
Base speed (Catalog value) Speed at which the performance curve is defined. To
change the value for simulation purposes, enter the operating speed or
operating frequency.

179
PIPESIM User Guide
Base stages (Catalog value) Number of stages for which the performance curve is
defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
Number of stages (Catalog value) A discreet set of stages is stored in the catalog. The pump
performance curve is adjusted based on the actual number of stages and
speed used during simulation.
Operating frequency Specify one of these values (the other value is then calculated).
Operating speed
Head factor Multiplier that adjusts the pump head (pressure differential) to account for
wear and other inefficiencies.
Viscosity correction Catalog performance data are typically generated with water as test fluid.
The Viscosity correction takes into account the correction applied to the
performance curve based on actual fluid being pumped.
Performance data properties - table tab
Flowrate (Calculated value) Fluid flowrate measured at actual pressure and temperature
conditions
Head (Calculated value) Specifies the pressure differential across the pump in units of
length of fluid column.
Efficiency (Catalog value) Specifies the efficiency of the pump.
Related links:
Add items to the pump catalog (p.25)
Heat exchanger properties

Use a heat exchanger to model a device that transfers heat from one liquid to another without
allowing them to mix. This results in a fluid temperature change and sometimes a small pressure
change.
Name Name of the heat exchanger.
Active Select this check box to activate the heat exchanger so that it will be used during
Pressure Select one of the following pressure change options:

180
PIPESIM User Guide
Discharge pressure
Pressure at the outlet. Specifying the discharge pressure is discouraged,
particularly in network simulations, as this specification often creates pressure
Pressure differential
Pressure change across the heat exchanger
Temperature Select one of the following temperature change options:
Temperature differential
Temperature increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the heat
exchanger
Discharge temperature
A fixed flowing fluid outlet temperature
Duty
Power required to achieve the desired change in fluid temperature and
pressure.
Related links:
Injection point properties

You can use a fluid injection point to inject fluid anywhere in the system. Injectors are commonly
used to model chemical injection (for example, methanol) or riser-based gas.
Name Name of the injection point.
Active Select this check box to activate the injection point so that it will be used during
General properties
Temperature Temperature of the incoming fluid at the injection point. Injected fluid will mix with
the flowing fluid and resultant temperature will be calculated.
Flowrate Incoming liquid, gas or mass flowrate for the injection stream

181
PIPESIM User Guide
Fluid model properties
Fluid model Select a predefined fluid to be injected. You can also edit selected fluid or
create a new fluid.
Override phase ratios You can override phase ratio for selected fluid.
Gas ratio Select the appropriate gas ratio type and enter a value.
Water ratio Select the appropriate water ratio type and enter a value.
Note: The injected fluid type must be consistent with the main fluid type (black oil or compositional)
set in the model.
Related links:


3. Click Register.
6. Click Open.


182
PIPESIM User Guide

Related links:
Plugins (p.8)
Generic multiphase booster

For the purposes of simulation, the generic multiphase booster model treats the multiphase pump
as a single-phase liquid pump and gas compressor operating in parallel.
The power calculations are based on splitting the multiphase fluid into its constituent liquid and gas
phases at booster suction and calculating the shaft power required to raise the pressure of the
liquid phase using conventional pump theory and the shaft power required to raise the pressure of
the gas phase using conventional compressor theory. The total shaft power required by the
multiphase booster is the sum of the two computed shaft powers. Due to the limiting assumptions
of this approach, the use of the generic multiphase pump model is recommended only for
preliminary analysis and to benchmark the multiphase booster power requirement.
The generic booster uses pump and compressor efficiencies to calculate the shaft power.
Generally, even when realistic values for pump and compressor efficiency are used, the calculated
power from the generic booster model will be underestimated. The generic booster will provide a
'best case' estimate for the multiphase boosting power which will typically be lower than the power
requirement for a specifically designed multiphase booster (up to 100% lower is possible). This is
why the generic booster model should be used for initial screening purposes only; and with
recommended pump and compressor efficiency values of 75% or values obtained from the field.
Refer to the Guide to multiphase booster efficiencies (p.596) for general recommendations for
booster efficiencies.
Add a generic multiphase booster

1. In network-centric mode, click the Insert tab. (In well-centric mode, click the Surface
equipment sub-tab, and then click the Insert tab).
2. In the Internal nodes group, drag the Multiphase booster icon to the location on the
schematic where you want to place it.
3. Double-click the multiphase booster object to open its editor (or right-click on it, and then click
Edit).
4. Enter the name of the booster.
5. Select or clear the Active check box to indicate if the booster is turned on or off during the
simulation.
6. Select the Booster type as Generic multiphase booster.
7. Enter the upper limits for one or more of the Operation Parameters described below.

183
PIPESIM User Guide
Discharge Pressure at the booster outlet
pressure Specifying the discharge pressure is discouraged, particularly in network
simulations, as this specification often creates pressure discontinuities. It is
intended to be used only when the downstream branch is a terminating branch
and not pressure specified (when left blank, the default is 20,000 psia).
Pressure Pressure differential across the multiphase booster (when left blank, default is
differential 10,000 psia)
Pressure ratio Ratio of discharge pressure to suction pressure (when left blank, default is
1,000)
Power Power available for the multiphase booster (when left blank, default is
unlimited)
Note:
• The four basic booster parameters (Discharge pressure, Pressure differential, Pressure
ratio, and Power) indicate their upper limits for scenarios where more than one of these
parameters is supplied.
You may enter any combination of these parameters or none at all. The simulation will
determine the most limiting of these parameters and this will control the booster
performance.
• When Discharge pressure, Pressure ratio, or Pressure differential is specified, PIPESIM
calculates the required power for multiphase boosting. Alternatively, when Power is
specified, PIPESIM calculates the pressure differential (or pressure ratio or discharge
pressure) that can be developed by the booster. When more than one of these parameters
are specified, PIPESIM determines the most limiting one (i.e. the one which gives the
smallest pump differential pressure) during the course of the simulation, and recalculates
the other parameters based on the limiting parameter.
• The default values for all parameters are unrealistically high; this ensures that each
parameter will not be the limit on pump performance, unless the user supplies a lower, more
realistic value. If none of the parameters are specified, the limit of pump performance will
usually be the speed, and which will in this case be 100%. If not, then the differential
pressure (DP) will be the limit for the specific pump model.
8. Modify the pump and compressor efficiencies preferably using appropriate field values. In the
absence of field efficiencies, use the recommended values in Guide to multiphase booster
efficiencies (p.596).
Pump efficiency Efficiency of the pump
The default value is 100%.
Compressor efficiency Efficiency of the compressor
The default value is 100%.

184
PIPESIM User Guide
Generic multiphase booster simulation results

The table below outlines the results that can be generated from running the most common
simulation tasks on a model that includes one or multiple generic multiphase boosters.
Task Results Steps to view results Result details

P/T profile, Profile Profile results » Show plot Pressure profile showing the pressure
Nodal results boost provided by the generic
analysis, and (plot) multiphase booster
System Profile Row details showing simulation results
Profile results » Show
analysis results for each generic multiphase booster
grid » Expand all » Scroll
(row including:
to multiphase booster
details) • Limiting variable
rows
• Pressure ratio (discharge pressure/
suction pressure)
• Differential pressure
• Power
• Outlet/discharge pressure
• Differential temperature
• Route
• Compressor power
• Compressor efficiency
• Pump power
• Pump efficiency
• Gas volume fraction (GVF)
• Total volumetric flowrate
Note: The row details for route are

typically polytropic which implies that a
polytropic compression was
performed. A polytropic compression
follows the polytropic route,
and can be used to model constant

pressure
, constant temperature
, constant enthalpy

185
PIPESIM User Guide
, and constant volume changes
, as well as intermediate routes.

PIPESIM uses a value of
that is a function of the efficiency
and the specific heat ratio
System P/T profile and System System results plot can be configured
results Analysis to show the following generic
(plot) multiphase booster system variables, if
System results » Show
available:
plot » Double-click on the
• Average fluid density
plot » Select any axis to
display any of the generic • Delta (differential) pressure
multiphase booster • Delta (differential) enthalpy
system variables
• Delta (differential) temperature
Nodal analysis
• Discharge pressure
System results » Double- • Pump Efficiency
click on the plot » Select • Compressor Efficiency
any axis to display any of
the generic multiphase • Pump power
booster system variables • Compressor power
• Total power
• Suction GVF (Gas Volume
Fraction)
• Suction pressure
• Suction Total Vol. Flowrate
System P/T profile and System System results grid can be configured
results Analysis to show the same generic multiphase
(grid) booster system variables as System
results (plot) above
grid » Branch » Select
columns to add any of the
generic multiphase
booster system variables

186
PIPESIM User Guide

Nodal analysis
System results » Select
generic multiphase
System P/T profile and System Row details showing simulation
results Analysis results for each generic multiphase
(row booster. Same variables as Profile
details) results (row details) above
grid » Node » Expand
all » Scroll to multiphase
booster rows
Nodal analysis
Not applicable
Output To generate the output Scroll through the report to the node
summary summary report, go to position(s) for the generic multiphase
Workspace » Options » booster(s) in your model and view the
Advanced » Select Show same row detail information as Profile
results (row details) and System
engine output files check
results (row details) above
box » Run the task » Click
the Output summary tab
details details report, go to position(s) for the generic multiphase
Workspace » Options » booster(s) in your model and view the
Advanced » Select Show same row detail information as Profile
results (row details) and System
results (row details) above
box » Run the task » Click
the Output details tab
Network Profile Profile results » Show Pressure profile showing the pressure
Simulation results boost provided by the generic
plot » Select branches
(plot) multiphase booster
with the generic
multiphase boosters
Profile Profile results » Show Row details showing simulation
results grid » Select branches results for each generic multiphase
(row booster. Same variables as Profile
with the generic
details) results (row details) for P/T profile,
multiphase boosters » Nodal analysis and System analysis
Expand all » Scroll to tasks above
multiphase booster rows
Node/ Node/branch results » System results grid can be configured
branch Branch » Select columns to show the same generic multiphase

187
PIPESIM User Guide

results to add any of the generic booster system variables as System
(grid) multiphase booster results (plot) for P/T profile, Nodal
system variable analysis and System analysis tasks
above
Node/ Node/branch results » Row details showing simulation
branch results for each generic multiphase
Node » Expand all »
results booster. Same variables as Profile
Scroll to multiphase
(row results (row details) for P/T profile,
booster rows
details) Nodal analysis and System analysis
tasks above
Output Same as P/T profile, Nodal analysis, and System analysis tasks
summary
Output Same as P/T profile, Nodal analysis, and System analysis tasks
details
Related links:
Multiphase boosters
Guide to multiphase booster efficiencies (p.596)
OneSubsea multiphase booster (p.188)
Multiphase boosting technology (p.582)
OneSubsea wet gas compressor (p.197)
OneSubsea multiphase booster

The OneSubsea multiphase booster (formerly called FRAMO 2009 Multiphase Booster) is based
on helico-axial Multiphase boosting technology (p.582), which involves kinetic energy being added
to the fluid as it flows horizontally through a series of pump stages consisting of a rotating helical-
shaped impeller and a stationary diffuser. The helico-axial booster is a rotodynamic pump that is a
hybrid between a centrifugal pump and an axial compressor. It is able to pump larger fluid volumes
than positive displacement pumps (e.g. twin screw pumps), which is one of the reasons it is
deployed in a majority of offshore and subsea applications.
There are 13 oneSubsea multiphase booster models available in PIPESIM.
Each OneSubsea booster model is classified based on its nominal capacity and the maximum
pressure differential it can achieve. The nominal capacity is the theoretical volumetric rate that the
booster can deliver when operating at 100% speed, 0% gas volume fraction (GVF) and zero
differential pressure (i.e. there is no internal leakage). The nominal capacity depends on the
suction pressure and fluid properties.
The most efficient way to determine the appropriate OneSubsea multiphase booster is to first
model the system using a Generic multiphase booster (p.183) based on expected operating

188
PIPESIM User Guide
conditions. You may inspect the summary or output file to determine the total volumetric flowrate at
the suction. The next step is to select the OneSubsea booster model that can handle this rate and
desired pressure differential and replace the generic multiphase booster with the OneSubsea
model.
OneSubsea Booster Models
Pump Impeller Diameter Nominal Capacity Maximum DP

mm in m3/hr m3/day BBL/d bar psi
OneSubsea Helico-Axial 310 12.2 250 6000 37739 180 2611
310-250/180
310-400/180
310-500/45
310-500/180
310-600/120
310-700/45
310-800/120
310-900/45
310-1100/45
310-1100/120
360-1200/38
360-1500/38
360-1800/38
Note: The numbers in the booster model name refer to the impeller diameter (mm), nominal
capacity (m3/hr), and Max. dP (bar), respectively.

189
PIPESIM User Guide
Add a OneSubsea multiphase booster

1. In network -centric mode, click the Insert tab. (In well-centric mode, click the Surface
equipment tab, and then click the Insert tab).
2. In the Internal nodes group, drag the Multiphase booster icon to the location on the
schematic where you want to place it.
Edit).
simulation.
5. Select the Booster type as OneSubsea multiphase booster and specify properties as
described in the tables below.
Discharge Pressure at the booster outlet
pressure Specifying the discharge pressure is discouraged, particularly in network
simulations, as this specification often creates pressure discontinuities. It is
intended to be used only when the downstream branch is a terminating branch
and not pressure specified (when left blank, the default is 20,000 psia).
Pressure Pressure differential across the multiphase booster (when left blank, default is
differential 10,000 psia)
1,000)
Power Power available for the multiphase booster (when left blank, default is unlimited
but may be constrained by the selected pump model)
Note:
performance.
calculates the required power for multiphase boosting. Alternatively, when Power is
specified, PIPESIM calculates the pressure differential (or pressure ratio or discharge
pressure) that can be developed by the booster. When more than one of these parameters
are specified, PIPESIM determines the most limiting one (i.e. the one which gives the
smallest pump differential pressure) during the course of the simulation, and recalculates
the other parameters based on the limiting parameter.
parameter will not be the limit on pump performance, unless the user supplies a lower, more

190
PIPESIM User Guide
realistic value. If none of the parameters are specified, the limit of pump performance will
usually be the speed, and which will in this case be 100%. If not, then the differential
pressure (DP) will be the limit for the specific pump model.
Model OneSubsea multiphase booster model
Tuning factor Model linear multiplier on calculated pump differential pressure used to
match field operating conditions
Allowable range is from 0.7 to 1.5.
Number of pumps Number of identical OneSubsea multiphase boosters operating in parallel
in parallel (equal flow split between pumps)
Allowable range is from 1 to 7
Speed limit Maximum speed limit for the pump
Allowable range is from 0 to 100%
Recirculation flow Quantity of flow in recirculation to maintain the required minimum flowrate
rate through the booster
Note: If the flowrate through the booster is below the minimum

recirculation flowrate specified, PIPESIM automatically calculates the
difference and adds it to the pump flowrate to ensure that the minimum
recirculation flowrate constraint for the pump is honored and it can operate
safely.
Add new OneSubsea booster performance curves

The data files for the pump performance curves are stored in the Framo® pump folder in the
PIPESIM installation directory. You may add a new OneSubsea multiphase booster model based
on a data file provided to you by OneSubsea.
1. Copy the data files provided by OneSubsea to the Framo folder in the PIPESIM installation
directory (for a default installation, C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM
\Data\framo09).
2. Open the file pipesim_framo.xml in the same directory with a text editor and follow the
instructions in the file to update the index of the booster data files to reference the new files.
3. Add a OneSubsea multiphase booster to your model and select one of the new boosters from
the updated model list.
OneSubsea Multiphase Booster Simulation Results

While all simulation tasks will model the multiphase booster, the following tasks produce detailed
results useful for design and optimization purposes:
• PT Profile
• System Analysis

191
PIPESIM User Guide
• Nodal Analysis
• Network Simulation
After running the simulation, booster performance plots are generated and displayed on the
Auxiliary results tab within the simulation task window. The performance plot is generated
dynamically and depends on in-situ operating conditions including fluid properties, suction pressure
and gas volume fraction. It is important to note that a given performance plot is valid only for the
operating conditions it was generated for.
The operating point shows the total flowrate through the unit, pressure differential, speed and
power required per unit. If there are multiple units in parallel the total power and total flowrate for all
units will be shown in the results table to the right of the plot.
The grey lines represent booster operating speed and the dashed light green lines represent
power.
Dark blue lines represent any operating limits that are defined for the booster.
The solid green lines represent the minimum and maximum rate lines. The net flow through the
unit is shown by a dashed red vertical line. If the net flow is less than the minimum rate, fluid will be
recirculated in an amount that achieves a total flowrate operating point at the minimum flowrate
line. If recirculation is not required, the operating point will lie on the net flow line.
Note:
The flow rate shown in the plot title is in stock-tank liquid units, all other flowrates are reported in
in-situ (flowing) conditions and include both gas and liquid phases.

192
PIPESIM User Guide
The table below outlines various ways of reporting OneSubsea multiphase booster results that may
be useful in designing and operating the equipment.

P/T profile, Profile Profile results » Show plot Pressure profile showing the
Nodal results pressure boost provided by the
analysis, (plot) OneSubsea multiphase booster
and System Profile Row details showing simulation
Profile results » Show grid »
analysis results results for each OneSubsea
Expand all » Scroll to
(row multiphase booster including:
multiphase booster rows
details) • Selected OneSubsea booster
model
• Speed
• Limiting variable (differential
pressure, power, or speed)
• Pressure ratio (discharge
pressure/suction pressure)
• Total power (power per booster *
no. of boosters in parallel)

193
PIPESIM User Guide

• Total volumetric flowrate for all
pumps in parallel (includes any
recirculation)
System P/T profile and System System results plot can be configured
results Analysis to show the following OneSubsea
(plot) multiphase booster system variables,
System results » Show plot »
if available:
Double-click on the plot »
• Delta (differential) pressure
Select any axis to display any
of the OneSubsea multiphase • Delta (differential) temperature
booster system variables • Discharge pressure
Nodal analysis • Error number
System results » Double-click • Maximum delta (differential)
on the plot » Select any axis pressure limit
to display any of the • Maximum discharge (Outlet)
OneSubsea multiphase pressure limit
• Maximum pressure ratio limit
• Maximum speed limit (%)
• Minimum flowrate
• Number of parallel pumps
• Total Power (for all pumps in
parallel)
• Recirculating flow
• Speed
• Suction gas density
• Suction gas flowrate
• Suction GVF (Gas Volume
Fraction)
• Suction liquid density
• Suction liquid flowrate
• Suction total vol. flowrate (for all
pumps in parallel)
System P/T profile System Analysis, System results grid can be configured
results Network Simulation to show the same OneSubsea
(grid) multiphase booster system variables
System (Node) results »
as System results (plot) shown above
Show grid » Branch » Select

194
PIPESIM User Guide

OneSubsea multiphase
Nodal analysis
System results » Select
OneSubsea multiphase
System P/T profile System Analysis, Row details showing simulation
results Network Simulation results for each OneSubsea
(row multiphase booster
System (Node) results »
details) Same variables as Profile results
Show grid » Node » Expand
(row details) shown above
all » Scroll to multiphase
booster rows
Nodal analysis
Not applicable
summary summary report, go to positions for the OneSubsea
Workspace » Options » multiphase boosters in your model
Advanced » Select Show and view the same row detail
information as Profile results (row
details) and System results (row
box » Run the task » Click details) shown above
the Output summary tab
Output To generate the output details Scroll through the report to the node
details report, go to Workspace » positions for the OneSubsea
multiphase boosters in your model
Options » Advanced » Select
and view the same row detail
Show engine output files
information as Profile results (row
check box » Run the task » details) and System results (row
Click the Output details tab details) above
Auxiliary To view the auxiliary results for The following auxiliary results are
results one or more OneSubsea available.
(p.302) multiphase boosters: OneSubsea performance plot
1. Ensure that the OneSubsea The OneSubsea performance plot is
booster is active by double- a plot of differential pressure versus
clicking on it and selecting its total volumetric flowrate for the
Active check box. specific OneSubsea multiphase
2. Run (with sensitivities, if booster selected, operating at the
desired). specific conditions defined in the
model which include suction
pressure, gas volume fraction (GVF),

195
PIPESIM User Guide

The Auxiliary results liquid density, and liquid viscosity. It
tab is automatically displays the following information.
generated. • Operating point
3. Click on the Auxiliary • Limiting variable (could be
results tab. differential pressure, power or
4. Under Case, click on a speed)
sensitivity case. • Speed lines and their annotations
5. Under Report object, Click a • Power lines and their annotations
OneSubsea booster.
• Min. speed line
The booster performance plot
and row details will display if the • Max speed line
simulation was successful. • Min. power line
Click on each sensitivity case • Max. power line
and each booster to cycle • Min. flowrate line
through the simulation results.
OneSubsea Operating Point Row
Details
The following booster operating point
details are displayed to the right of
the performance plot.
• Selected OneSubsea booster
model
• Speed
• Limiting variable (Differential
pressure, power, or speed)
• Pressure ratio (discharge
pressure/suction pressure)
• Total power (Power per booster *
no. of boosters in parallel)
Related links:
Generic multiphase booster properties
Auxiliary results tab (p.302)
Multiphase boosters

196
PIPESIM User Guide

Generic multiphase booster (p.183)
FRAMO 2009 (Optional) (p.843)
OneSubsea wet gas compressor

Wet Gas Compressors (WGC) increase recovery rates, extend plateau production, and cost-
effectively increase tieback distances of subsea gas fields. They also contribute with increased
compression efficiency due to the higher suction pressure. The topside installation scope is
drastically reduced as is the topside risk level.
Wet Gas Compressors (WGC) are a category of multiphase boosters, characterized by a contra-
rotating machine, targeting flows with high gas volume fractions. Well streams serviced by WGC's
are might also be found in marginally economic fields where optimizing production and minimizing
costs are critical.
The same principles that are used to design multiphase pumps apply for wet gas compression.
Special attention must be paid to ensure the device can handle thermal expansion and high
equipment temperature due to compression heat generated. The heat generated by the
compression process of mostly gas in the well stream often necessitates the installation of one or
more coolers which may be positioned either upstream or downstream of the WGC. The upstream
location of coolers reduces fluid temperature and renders a higher mix density. The higher mix
density allows for increased dP across the compressor and the lower temperature increases the
maximum pressure ratio that can be applied.
Benefits of the OneSubsea Wet Gas Compressor include:
• Continuous operation on all liquid fractions (0 – 100%)
• Operable in all flow regimes
• Conventional lubricated bearing technology as applied for MPPs
• Surge-free operation so no anti-surge system is required
• Sand and solids tolerant
• Low speed allows for long step-outs without subsea VSDs
• Low module weight (approx. 60 tons) allows for light vessel intervention
The most efficient way to determine the appropriate OneSubsea WGC is to first model the system
using a Generic multiphase booster based on expected operating conditions. You may inspect the
summary or output file to determine the total volumetric flowrate at the suction. The next step is to
select the OneSubsea WGC model that can handle this rate and desired pressure differential and
replace the generic multiphase booster with the OneSubsea model.
Compressor Impeller Diameter Capacity @ BEP Maximum dP

mm in Am 3 /h Am 3 /d abpd bar psi
OneSubsea CRC385-2400/51 385 15.2 2 400 57 600 362 300 51 740

197
PIPESIM User Guide
OneSubsea CRC385-3600/51 385 15.2 3 600 86 400 543 400 51 740

OneSubsea CRC385-4800/51 385 15.2 4 800 115 200 724 600 51 740
OneSubsea CRC385-5800/51 385 15.2 5 800 139 200 875 500 51 740
OneSubsea CRC385-6900/51 385 15.2 6 900 165 600 1 041 600 51 740
OneSubsea CRC385-8400/51 385 15.2 8 400 201 600 1 268 000 51 740
Table 2.10: OneSubsea Wet Gas Compressor Models
where,
• BEP = Best Efficiency Point
• CRC = Counter-Rotating Compressor
• dP = Differential Pressure
Note: The numbers in the booster model name refer to the impeller diameter (mm), nominal
capacity (m3/hr), and Max. dP (bar), respectively.
Add a OneSubsea wet gas compressor

1. In network -centric mode, click the Insert tab. (In well-centric mode, click the Surface equipment
tab, and then click the Insert tab).
2. In the Internal nodes group, drag the Multiphase booster icon to the location on the schematic
where you want to place it.
Edit).
simulation.
5. Select the Booster type as OneSubsea wet gas compressor and specify properties as
described in the tables below.
Operation Description
Parameters
Discharge Pressure at the booster outlet Specifying the discharge pressure is
pressure discouraged, particularly in network simulations, as this specification often
creates pressure discontinuities. It is intended to be used only when the
downstream branch is a terminating branch and not pressure specified,
which is rare (when left blank, the default is 20,000 psia).
Pressure Pressure differential across the multiphase booster (when left blank, default
differential is 10,000 psia).
1,000).
Total Power Total power available for the wet gas compressor station. If multiple units
are in parallel, the total power will be divided evenly among each unit

198
PIPESIM User Guide
(when left blank, default is unlimited but may be constrained by the

selected pump model).
Note:
performance.
calculates the required power for the compressor. Alternatively, when Power is specified,
PIPESIM calculates the pressure differential (or pressure ratio or discharge pressure) that
can be developed by the compressor. When more than one of these parameters are
specified, PIPESIM determines the most limiting one (i.e. the one which gives the smallest
compressor differential pressure) during the course of the simulation, and recalculates the
other parameters based on the limiting parameter.
parameter will not be the limit on compressor performance, unless the user supplies a lower,
more realistic value. If none of the parameters are specified, the limit of compressor
performance will usually be the specified speed or the maximum differential pressure (DP)
for the specific compressor model.
Model OneSubsea wet gas compressor model
Tuning factor Model linear multiplier on calculated pump differential pressure used to
match field operating conditions. Allowable range is from 0.7 to 1.5.
Units in parallel Number of identical OneSubsea wet gas compressors operating in parallel
(equal flow split between compressors). Operating Allowable range is from
1 to 7
Maximum Speed Wet gas compressor speed target. The WGC will operate at this speed
unless another limit is encountered which will cause the speed to be
reduced
Recirculation Quantity of flow in recirculation to adjust the flowrate through the wet gas
mass rate compressor. The specified recirculation rate applies to all units that may
be in parallel. If left blank and the flowrate through the wet gas
compressor is below the minimum recirculation flowrate specified,
PIPESIM automatically calculates the difference and adds it to the
compressor flowrate to ensure that the minimum recirculation flowrate
constraint for the compressor is honored and it can operate safely.
Max. temperature Maximum temperature for the wet gas compressor
6. Modify the Cooler configuration, upstream and downstream, as needed.

199
PIPESIM User Guide
Cooler Type Description

None No cooler is installed
User specified User specifies the cooler duty. If multiple units are in parallel, specify the duty
for a single cooler. Each unit will then have the specified cooler duty.
Cooler-6m-8b Standard OneSubsea cooler. If multiple units are in parallel, each unit will
have its own cooler.
Note: In calculating the cooler duty (or temperature change if duty is supplied), ambient fluid
properties (temperature and velocity) are taken from the pipe connected to the WGC.
Modeling wet gas compressors in series and parallel

To model multiple wet gas compressors in series, simply insert an additional multiphase booster
object and connect them together. When running tasks that involve sensitizing on pressure ratio or
speed, you may apply the sensitivity values to all stations in series by selecting the "apply all"
option in the sensitivity menu.
To model multiple wet gas compressors units operating in parallel for a single station, specify the
number of units in parallel in the properties editor. All operation parameters and properties will
apply equally to each unit in the station except for the Total power and Total recirculation rate
which will apply to the station as a whole.
As an example, consider two wet gas compressor stations connected in series as follows:
• Station 1: 2 parallel units each equipped with upstream and downstream coolers
• Station 2: Single unit with an upstream cooler only
Figure 2.4. Schematic of desired configuration
This may be setup in PIPESIM as follows:

200
PIPESIM User Guide
The stations may be configured to account for the number in parallel and coolers:
Add new OneSubsea wet gas compressor performance curves

You may add a new OneSubsea wet gas compressor model based on a data file provided to you
by OneSubsea. You will need to save this data file in the OneSubsea wet gas compressor folder in
the PIPESIM installation directory (for a default installation, C:\Program Files\Schlumberger
\PIPESIM\Data\oss_wgc).
After doing this, you may now select the newly added model (named by the filename) in the Wet
Gas Compressor list from within PIPESIM.
OneSubsea Wet Gas Compressor Simulation Results

While all simulation tasks will model the wet gas compressor, the following tasks produce detailed
results useful for design and optimization purposes:
• PT Profile
• System Analysis

201
PIPESIM User Guide
• Nodal Analysis
• Network Simulation
After running the simulation, wet gas compressor performance plots are generated for each case
and station and are displayed on the Auxiliary results tab within the simulation task window. The
performance plot is generated dynamically and depends on in-situ (compressor inlet) operating
conditions including fluid properties, suction pressure and gas volume fraction. It is important to
note that a given performance plot is valid only for the operating conditions it was generated for.
The operating point shows the total flowrate through the unit, pressure differential, speed and
power required per unit. If there are multiple units in parallel the total power and total flowrate for all
units will be shown in the results table to the right of the plot.
The grey lines represent booster operating speed and the dashed light green lines represent
power.
Dark blue lines represent any operating limits that are defined for the wet gas compressor.
The solid green lines represent the minimum and maximum flow rate lines. The net flow through
the unit is shown by a dashed red vertical line. If the net flow is less than the minimum rate, fluid
will be recirculated in an amount that achieves a total flowrate operating point at the minimum
flowrate line. If recirculation is not required, the operating point will lie on the net flow line.
Note: The flow rate shown in the plot title is in stock-tank gas units, all other flowrates are reported
in in-situ (flowing) conditions and include both gas and liquid phases.
Figure 2.5. Wet gas compressor performance plot
The table below outlines various ways of reporting OneSubsea multiphase booster results that may
be useful in designing and operating the equipment.

202
PIPESIM User Guide
Results Steps to view results Result details

Profile Profile results » Show plot Pressure profile showing the pressure
results increase provided by the OneSubsea wet
(plot) gas compressor
Profile Profile results » Show grid » Expand Row details showing simulation results for
results all » Scroll to wet gas compressor each OneSubsea wet gas compressor
(row rows including:
details) • Selected OneSubsea wet gas compressor
• Speed (%)
• Speed (absolute)
• Limiting variable (differential pressure,
power, or speed)
• Pressure ratio (discharge pressure/suction
pressure)
• Total power (power per wet gas
compressor unit* no. of units in parallel)
System P/T profile, System Analysis System results plot can be configured to
results Network Simulation show the following OneSubsea wet gas
(plot) System (node) results » Show plot » compressor system variables, if available:
Select any axis to display any of the • Cooler duty (downstream)
OneSubsea wet gas compressor • Cooler duty (upstream)
system variables
• Cooler temperature out (downstream)
Nodal analysis
• Cooler temperature out (upstream)
System results » Select any axis to
display any of the OneSubsea wet • Delta (differential) pressure
gas compressor system variables • Delta (differential) temperature
• Discharge pressure
• Error number
• Maximum delta (differential) pressure limit
• Maximum discharge (Outlet) pressure limit
• Maximum power limit
• Maximum pressure ratio limit
• Maximum speed limit (absolute)

203
PIPESIM User Guide
• Maximum speed limit (relative)

• Minimum flowrate
• Number of parallel compressors
• Power
• Pressure ratio
• Recirculating mass flow
• Recirculating volume flow
• Speed (relative)
• Suction gas density
• Suction gas flowrate
• Suction GVF (Gas Volume Fraction)
• Suction liquid density
• Suction liquid flowrate
• Suction total vol. flowrate
System P/T profile, System Analysis System results grid can be configured to
results Network Simulation show the same OneSubsea wet gas
(grid) System (node) results » Show grid » compressor system variables as System
Branch » Select columns to add any results (plot) shown above
of the OneSubsea wet gas
compressor system variables
Nodal analysis
System (node) results » Select
OneSubsea wet gas compressor
system variables
System P/T profile, System Analysis Row details showing simulation results for
results Network Simulation each OneSubsea wet gas compressor
(row System (node) results » Show grid » Same variables as Profile results (row
details) Node » Expand all » Scroll to details) shown above
OneSubsea wet gas compressor rows
Nodal analysis
Not applicable
Output To generate the output summary Scroll through the report to the node
summary report, go to Workspace » Options » positions for the OneSubsea wet gas
Advanced » Select Show engine compressor in your model and view the
output files check box » Run the same row detail information as Profile results
task » Click the Output summary tab

204
PIPESIM User Guide
(row details) and System results (row details)

shown above
Output To generate the output details report, Scroll through the report to the node
details go to Workspace » Options » positions for the OneSubsea wet gas
Advanced » Select Show engine compressor in your model and view the
output files check box » Run the same row detail information as Profile results
task » Click the Output details tab (row details) and System results (row details)
above
Auxiliary To view the auxiliary results for one or The following auxiliary results are available.
results more OneSubsea wet gas OneSubsea performance plot
compressor:
The OneSubsea performance plot is a plot of
1. Ensure that the OneSubsea wet differential pressure versus total volumetric
gas compressor is active by flowrate for the specific OneSubsea wet gas
double-clicking on it and selecting compressor selected, operating at the
its Active check box. specific conditions defined in the model
2. Run a P/T profile, Nodal analysis which include suction pressure, gas volume
or System analysis task (with fraction (GVF), and fluid properties. It
sensitivities, if desired). displays the following information.
The Auxiliary results tab is • Operating point
automatically generated. • Limiting variable (could be differential
3. Click on the Auxiliary results tab. pressure, power or speed)
4. Under Case, click on a sensitivity • Speed lines and their annotations
case. • Power lines and their annotations
5. Under Report object, Click a • Min. speed line
OneSubsea wet gas compressor.
• Max speed line
The compressor performance plot
and row details will display if the • Min. power line
simulation was successful. • Max. power line
Click on each sensitivity case and • Min. flowrate line
each wet gas compressor to cycle
• Max. flowrate line
through the simulation results.
• Net flow line
OneSubsea Operating Point Row Details
The following wet gas compressor operating
point details are displayed to the right of the
performance plot.
• Selected OneSubsea wet gas compressor
model
• Speed (%)
• Limiting variable (Differential pressure,
power, or speed)

205
PIPESIM User Guide
• Pressure ratio (discharge pressure/suction

pressure)
• Total power (Power per compressor unit*
no. of units in parallel)
OneSubsea wet gas compressor performance plot

A wet gas compressor performance plot is created for each OneSubsea wet gas compressor and
for each sensitivity case, if the simulation of the task was successful. It is a plot of differential
pressure versus total volumetric flowrate for the specific OneSubsea wet gas compressor selected,
operating at the specific operating conditions calculated during the simulation which include suction
pressure, gas volume fraction (GVF) and fluid properties. The plot displays the actual operating
point from the simulation and enables you to understand where the wet gas compressor is
operating in the envelope and evaluate opportunities for optimizing the compressor performance. It
is important to note that a given performance plot is valid only for the operating conditions it was
generated for.
A generalized performance plot is shown below, illustrating several potential operating points
depending on the defined limits and operating conditions.
• A – The WGC is operating unconstrained. WGC speed is 100%.

• B – The WGC is limited by a defined speed.
• C – The WGC is limited by a constraint on pressure differential. WGC speed is reduced.
• D – The WGC is limited by minimum flow with some fluid being recirculated. Net flow is
indicated by vertical red dashed line.
Note: The vertical red line represents net flow. If there is no-recirculation, it will intersect the
operating point, otherwise it will be offset from the operating point by an amount equal to the rate of
fluid recirculated.
Related links:

206
PIPESIM User Guide
Multiplier/adder properties
A Multiplier/Adder device increases or decreases the flowrate, but does not change the fluid
properties.
Name Name of the multiplier or adder.
Active Select this check box to activate the multiplier or adder so that it will be used during
General properties
Function Add
This is the default option. Increases or decrease the flowrate, but does not change
the fluid properties.
Select a flowrate type from the Flowrate list.
Multiply
Click this option to multiply, rather, than add. Multipliers are typically used to model
the effect of identical parallel lines in single branch tasks.
Enter a multiplication factor in the Multiplier field.
Flowrate Options for flowrate types are Liquid, Gas, and Mass. You can add (a positive value)
or remove (a negative value) liquid, gas or mass. However, an added (or removed)
phase does not change phase ratio of the fluid as all three phases are added/removed
in the same proportion.
Multiplier The multiplication factor is always positive. A factor above 1 indicates increased flow
while below 1 indicates decreased flow.
Related links:
Riser - simple model properties

You can define a riser in a simple model (with basic minimum data) or a detailed model (to capture
detailed profile as well as heat transfer calculations). The property pane and the parameter
displayed will depend on the options that you choose.
Simple model
Use this default mode if the riser has a simple geometry (a vertical pipe or inclined pipe
with constant inclination angle) and you want to perform a simplistic heat transfer
calculation using the known heat transfer coefficient.

207
PIPESIM User Guide
Detailed model
Allows you to capture complex riser geometry and at the same time, you will be able to
perform detailed heat transfer calculation including pipeline insulation.
Riser properties
Name Name of the riser
Detailed mode. Detailed mode has an additional tab for detailed heat
transfer modeling.
To switch to the detailed model, click Detailed. Click Simple to return to the
Override global By default, a riser uses global environment data (e.g., ambient temperature,
environmental data wind, and current data, etc). If checked, it will use environmental data
configured locally to the selected riser.
Pipe data properties
Inside diameter Inside diameter for the riser
Wall thickness Select and specify either wall thickness or outside diameter (excluding any
Outside diameter coatings)
Note: If there is any change in the riser inside diameter, wall thickness, or roughness along the
pipeline, add a second riser object.
Platform data properties
Platform height (above Platform height above the water surface. A vertical pipe section will be
waterline) created with air as the ambient fluid.
Profile data properties
Horizontal distance Select the appropriate property to specify the distance covered by the riser.
Measured distance
Seabed depth Distance from water surface to seabed.

208
PIPESIM User Guide
Use as downcomer Select this check box if the riser is to be used as a downcomer in which case
fluids are transported from the platform to the seabed. This selection will set
the start point of the profile at the top of the air section as indicated by a
large blue circle on the riser schematic.
Note: Typically a riser is assumed to start from the seabed and end at the platform. Total height of
the riser is calculated by adding the platform height (section of riser in air) and the seabed depth
(section of the riser in water). For modeling purposes, if a riser is completely under water, specify 0
for platform height. Similarly, if a riser is fully in air, specify 0 for seabed depth.
Heat transfer data properties
Surface temperature Ambient air temperature (a fixed temperature used for air section only)
Seabed temperature Seabed water temperature. Variable temperature used for water
section
U Value type air section Overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) for air section. Available
options are: Insulated, Coated, Bare (in air) and User supplied.
U Value air section Used to calculate heat transfer for the riser section above the water
surface.
U Value type water Overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) for water section. Available
section options are: Insulated, Coated, or User supplied.
U Value water section Used to calculate heat transfer for the riser section in the water.
Inside film coefficient You can include the Inside film coefficient (within the supplied heat
transfer coefficient above), or choose to calculate separately.
Calculation is performed based on selected method (under Home »
Simulation settings » Heat transfer tab ).
Note: The water section temperature profile will be a linear gradient between Seabed
temperature and Surface temperature.
Riser schematic
Geometry profile For a riser, the geometry profile is a plot of riser depth versus horizontal
distance.
Ambient Similar to geometry profile, ambient temperature is also plotted against
temperature (plot) depth.
Data view button By default the riser geometry and ambient temperature profiles are displayed
(plot) graphically. A table control button at the bottom right of the plot allows you to

209
PIPESIM User Guide
switch to a tabular view of the data. When in tabular view, a chart shaped
button allows you to switch back to plot view.
Riser starts at This is a read only field that indicates the starting point of the riser in the
model and thus indicates the orientation (profile direction) of the riser in the
network. The riser schematic in the editor will display a large blue circle to
indicate the starting point in the profile data.
For more information, see Typical Values (p.725), Heat Transfer Coefficient (p.641), and Internal
Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient (p.644).
Related links:
Riser - detailed model properties - general tab

Detailed model allows modeling complex variations in riser geometry and also exposes detailed
heat transfer calculations including modeling for pipe insulation.
Simple model
Use this default mode if the riser has a simple geometry (a vertical pipe or inclined pipe
with constant inclination angle) and you want to perform a simplistic heat transfer
calculation using the known heat transfer coefficient.
Detailed model
Allows you to capture complex riser geometry and at the same time, you will be able to
perform detailed heat transfer calculation including pipeline coating.
Riser properties
Name Name of the riser
Detailed mode. Detailed mode has an additional tab for detailed heat
transfer modeling.
To switch to the detailed model, click Detailed. Click Simple to return to the
Override global By default, a riser uses global environment data (for example, ambient
environmental data temperature, wind, and current data, etc). If checked, it will use
environmental data configured locally to the selected riser.

210
PIPESIM User Guide
General tab - pipe data properties
Inside diameter Inside diameter for the riser.
Wall thickness Select and specify either wall thickness or the outside diameter of the riser,
Outside diameter excluding any coatings.
Note: If there is any change in riser inside diameter, wall thickness, or roughness along the
flowpath, add a second riser object.
General tab - platform data properties
Platform height (above Platform height above the water surface. A vertical pipe section will be
waterline) created with air as the ambient fluid.
General tab - profile data properties
Use as Select this check box if the riser is to be used as a downcomer in which case
downcomer fluids are transported from the platform to the seabed. This selection will set the
start point of the profile at the top of the air section as indicated by a large blue
circle on the riser schematic.
Distance Select either Horizontal distance or Measured distance based on data that you
want to enter. The unknown will be calculated geometrically.
Depth MSL Mean sea level depth of each riser profile data point
Profile Table Based on selected distance, enter the appropriate data for distance and depth
in each row. The distance here refers to the cumulative distance as you go
along the riser in the direction of its orientation.
Riser schematic
Geometry profile For a riser, the geometry profile is a plot of riser depth vs horizontal distance.
(plot)
Ambient Similar to geometry profile, ambient temperature is also plotted against
temperature (plot) depth.
Data view button By default riser geometry and ambient temperature profile are displayed
(plot) graphically. A table control button at the bottom right of the plot allows you to
switch to a tabular view of data. When in tabular view, a chart shaped button
allows you to switch back to plot view.

211
PIPESIM User Guide
Riser start at This is a read only field that indicates the starting point of the riser in the
model and thus indicates the orientation (profile direction) of the riser in the
network. The riser schematic in the editor will display a large blue circle to
indicate the starting point in the profile data.
Related links:
Riser - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab (p.212)
Riser - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab

You can model a simple heat transfer using a known single value of heat transfer coefficient that is
applied over the entire length of riser. However, if you choose to calculate heat transfer coefficient,
you can model the effect of insulation and heat transfer with the surrounding water.
Heat transfer tab - heat transfer properties (multiple U value input method)
U Value input Overall heat transfer coefficient (U value)
method Specify
Select this option to enter a single U value if it is known.
Calculate
Select this option when the heat transfer coefficient of the surrounding
medium is not known. A heat balance is performed using heat transfer
coefficients calculated from supplied data describing coatings, burial
conditions, and ambient fluid properties.
Inside film You can either Include the Inside film coefficient (within the supplied heat
coefficient transfer coefficient above), or choose to calculate separately. Calculation is
performed based on selected methods (under Home » Simulation settings »
Heat transfer tab).
Heat transfer tab - thermal data - air section properties (multiple U value input method)
Surface temperature Ambient temperature (air section)
U Value type air section Overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) for the riser section above the
water surface. Options are: Bare (in air), Coated, Insulated, or User
supplied.

212
PIPESIM User Guide
U Value air section Used to calculate outside heat transfer for the riser section above the
water surface.
Heat transfer tab - thermal data - (specify U value option)
U Value type water section Overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) for the riser section in the
water. Options are: Bare (in water), Coated, Insulated, or User
supplied.
U Value water section Used to calculate heat transfer for the riser section in the water.
Depth MSL Mean sea level depth.
Ambient water temperature Surrounding water temperature for the riser at the entered Depth
MSL.
The heat transfer coefficient is calculated from entered pipe and conductivity data. Enter the
following information to compute the overall heat transfer coefficient.
Properties associated with calculate U option
Pipe conductivity Thermal conductivity of the pipe material
Surface temperature Ambient air temperature
Wind speed Average velocity of the surrounding air
Heat transfer tab - thermal data (specify U value option)
Depth MSL Mean sea level depth.
Ambient water temperature Surrounding water temperature for the riser at the entered Depth
MSL.
Current velocity Average velocity of the surrounding water at each Depth MSL.
Thermal data table for water This table appears only if you have checked the option to override
section global environmental data.
Heat transfer tab - pipe coating details (calculate U value option)
Pipe coating You can add multiple layers of pipe coatings. For each coating layer, specify
details the following:
• Thermal conductivity of the coating material
• Thickness of the coating layer

213
PIPESIM User Guide
• Description (for reference purposes only)
Overall outside The outside diameter of the pipe and coating layers. This value is calculated
diameter based on user supplied pipe diameter and coating thicknesses.
Pipe cross section This schematic underneath the coating table displays a Pipe cross-section
schematic showing pipe and coating layers in different colors.
For more information, see Heat Transfer Coefficient (p.641) and Internal Fluid Film Heat Transfer
Coefficient (p.644).
Related links:
Manage flowlines and risers (p.458)
Three phase separator

A separator is a cylindrical or spherical vessel used to separate oil, gas, and water phases from the
incoming mixed fluid stream.
In a 3-phase separator all three phases (oil, gas, and water) are separated and discharged from
three separate outlets and thus these separated streams follow different branches in a network. On
the other hand, in a typical well-centric mode, only one of the outlet streams can be considered for
onward flow modeling and assigned as product stream; the remaining streams cannot be
configured and are discarded.
Graphical representation
A 3-phase separator has 4 ports; one for the feed stream (left) and three for the separated outlet
streams (right). All three outlet ports must be connected in a valid network. The outlets of the
separator icon on the network diagram are color coded.
Output Product stream

Red Gas (the top outlet port of 3-phase separator)
Green Oil (the middle outlet port of 3-phase separator)

214
PIPESIM User Guide

Blue Water (the bottom outlet port of 3-phase separator)
Table 2.11: Key to Outputs
The editor displays all available properties.
Three-phase separator properties
Name Name of the three-phase separator.
Active Select this check box to activate the three-phase separator so that it will be used
during simulation. Clear the check box to deactivate. An inactive separator does not
separate and acts like a simple junction.
Three-phase separator general properties
Product stream Select the phase to keep.
Gas/Oil Amount of gas removed from the incoming stream. For example, a 90% gas/oil
Efficiency efficiency indicates that 90% of the free gas at the separator condition (pressure
and temperature) will be removed from the separator and sent to the gas outlet
branch.
Water/Oil Amount of water removed. For example, 90% water/oil efficiency indicates that
Efficiency 90% of the water will be removed from the separator and sent to the water
outlet branch.
Separator Operating pressure refers to pressure set at the separator. If this is not set, it
pressure will be calculated. Specifying the separator pressure is discouraged, particularly
(optional) in network simulations, as this specification often creates pressure
Note: For network separators, there will be a pressure discontinuity between the separator and the
separated branch inlet. This represents the pump, compressor, or choke required to adjust the
stream's pressure to that pressure necessary to balance the remainder of the network.
Related links:
Two phase separator

A separator is a cylindrical or spherical vessel used to separate phases from the incoming mixed
fluid stream. A two-phase separator separates gas from liquid or water from the hydrocarbons (gas
and/or oil). To split all three phases, use a three-phase separator instead.

215
PIPESIM User Guide
A two phase separator can be used in either single branch or network models. In a single branch,
one of the outlet streams is discarded as waste. In a network model, the second outlet stream
forms a second branch in a network.
Graphical representation
A two-phase separator has three ports; one for the feed stream (left) and two for the separated
outlet streams. If only one of the outlet ports of a 2-phase separator is connected to a branch
exiting separator, it is treated as a single-branch separator. However, if both outlet ports are
connected, it becomes a network separator. The outlets of the separator icon on the network
diagram are color-coded.

Red Gas (always takes the top outlet port)
Yellow Hydrocarbons (gas and oil) (always takes the top outlet port)
Aqua Liquid (oil plus water) (always takes the bottom outlet port)
Blue Water (always takes the bottom outlet port)
Table 2.12: Key to Outputs
The editor displays all available properties.
Two-phase separator properties
Name Name of the two-phase separator
Active Select this check box to activate the two-phase separator so that it will be used during
simulation. Clear the check box to deactivate. An inactive separator does not separate
and acts like a simple junction.
Two-phase separator general properties (single branch model)
Production Select the phase that you want to keep (the continuous stream).
Stream
Discarded Stream Select the phase to remove (if a 2-phase separator is used in a single branch
like well stream).
Discontinuous Phase that is separated from the production stream and branched out from
stream the main branch. However, network simulation tracks this phase to the
connected branch and sink. The discontinuous stream is indicated by a
dashed line exiting the separator.
Efficiency Amount of material removed from the production stream. For example, 90%
efficiency indicates that 90% of the discarded/discontinuous stream is
separated.

216
PIPESIM User Guide
Separator Operating pressure refers to pressure set at the separator. This parameter
pressure appears only if a two-phase separator is part of a network with both
(optional) production and discontinuous branches connected. Specifying the separator
pressure is discouraged, particularly in network simulations, as this
specification often creates pressure discontinuities. It is intended to be used
only when the downstream branch is a terminating branch and not pressure
specified.
Note: For network separators, there will be a pressure discontinuity between the separator and the
separated branch inlet. This represents the pump, compressor, or choke required to adjust the
stream's pressure to that pressure necessary to balance the remainder of the network. The
discontinuous stream is indicated by a dashed line exiting the separator.
Related links:
Source and junctions “treated as source” properties

A source is a point where fluid enters the network. It represents a generic fluid entry point such as
a tie-in to a separate pipeline or field and should be placed upstream of other components. You
can add multiple sources in a network to model multiple entry points.
On the other hand, a junction is a simple node that is used to connect multiple branches in a
network. A junction itself has no associated physical characteristics such as pressure drop and
temperature change. However, junction allows mixing of multiple fluids at a common pressure and
the temperature at the junction represents the combined stream temperature.
While source can be added only at the boundary of a network, a junction can be converted as a
source anywhere in a network to simulate (single branch operations) and analyze a branch in the
middle of the network. When converted as a source, a junction represents all the properties that
are used to model a source. Treating a junction as a source does not affect the network simulation
tasks.
Use the Source object to specify explicit upstream boundary conditions of pressure and
temperature. For example, use Source to emulate input boundary flow conditions for the following:
• Wellhead or manifold conditions in a subsea production flowline system
• Export flow conditions from an offshore platform
The following table describes the properties for sources and junctions treated as sources.
Source properties for sources and junctions treated as sources
Name Name of the source or junction that is being treated as a source.

217
PIPESIM User Guide
Treat as Applies to junctions only. Select this check box to treat the junction as a source.
source When checked, the property editor adds parameters to model source properties.
Also, the junction appears on the network as a bigger circle with a dark blue color.
Active Indicates whether the source is active. An inactive source blocks the source and
connected branch in the network. Note that the active check box does not appear
for a junction or a junction treated as a source.
Pressure/flowrate boundary conditions
PQ curve (check By default a source requires a fixed pressure and/or fixed flowrate boundary
box) condition. When you select the PQ curve option, you can model a PQ curve
(typically wellhead performance curve). Additional tabs appear to record PQ
table (Table tab) and display PQ-curve (Curve tab).
Temperature Temperature at the source. (Always required)
Pressure Fluid pressure at the source. (Appears when PQ curve is unchecked)
Flowrate Fluid flowrate at the source. (Appears when PQ curve is unchecked)
PQ curve
When you select the the PQ curve check box, the Table and Curve tabs appear.
PQ type (Table tab) Flowrate basis for the PQ curve. The options are liquid flowrate, gas
flowrate, or mass flowrate.
PQ Table (Table tab) Enter pressure vs. flowrate relationship in the table.
PQ Curve (Curve tab) Graphically displays the PQ curve.
Note: The unknown solution point (pressure or flowrate) will be interpolated or extrapolated during
iteration based on nearest supplied data points, provided the extrapolation does not lead to a
negative pressure. It is recommended to supply enough data points to cover the expected solution
and solution accuracy.
Fluid model Define a fluid model for the source by using one of the following ways:
• Selecting a predefined fluid from the fluid dropdown list
• Creating a new fluid specific to the selected source
You can edit a selected fluid to change properties or simply override the phase
ratio.

218
PIPESIM User Guide
Override phase Select this check box if you want to override the phase ratio of a selected fluid.
ratios
Gas ratio If you have checked override, select the gas phase ratio type and specify a
value.
Water ratio If you have checked override, select the water phase ratio type and specify a
value.
Note: You can also create a new fluid or edit the properties of a defined fluid.
Configure junctions as sources

Treating a junction as a source allows the junction to act as a source for a single branch simulation
task performed on any branch exiting the junction. For the purpose of network simulation, this
junction (converted to source) will continue to function like a junction.
1. Identify the branch that you want to simulate and select the appropriate junction upstream of
intended flow path.
2. Display the junction properties by completing one of the following actions:
• On the Surface equipment tab of the well editor, click on the junction object on the surface
schematic.
• Click the junction object name listed at the top of the Wellbore schematic.
• Double-click the junction object name in the Inputs pane for network centric mode.
• Right-click the junction object name in the Inputs pane and click Edit.
• On the network diagram, double-click the junction object.
The junction properties display on the Surface equipment tab or in the appropriate editor
window.
3. Select the Treat as source check box.
4. Configure the source properties as needed.
5. Click Close.
Convert junctions to wells, sources, sinks, and equipment
Note: PIPESIM provides the ability to convert junctions to wells, sources, sinks, and other
equipment. This feature is to support to process of automatically creating networks from shapefiles,
due to the current limitation that wells and other equipment cannot be imported from the shapefile.
1. To convert a junction, click it in the network in the GIS map view, logical view or in the Inputs
pane.
2. Use the Right-mouse-button (RMB) on the selected junction and select Convert from the option
list.

219
PIPESIM User Guide
An additional context-sensitive option list displays with the possible objects that could be placed
at the selected junction based on the number of flowlines connected to it. It is based on the
logic below.
Junction Context
Conversion options 1 junction 1 junction connected 1 junction 1 junction
connected to 1 to 2 flowlines connected to 3 connected to 4
flowline flowlines flowlines
Source x
Sink x
Well x
Heat Exchanger x
Compressor x
Expander x
Generic Equipment x
Injection Point x
Multiplier/Adder x
User Equipment x
Choke x
Generic Pump x
Multiphase Booster x
Two-Phase Separator x x
3. Choose the object you would like to convert the junction to from the list. Repeat this process for
individual junctions in your network until it is a correct representation of what you would like to
simulate.
The PIPESIM junction conversion feature is irreversible (for example, after converting a junction
to a well, source, sink or other equipment), you cannot convert the object back to a junction. To
forestall any issues that may arise from this, make a copy of the model before converting the
junctions or exit the workspace without saving, after you have converted the junctions.
Related links:
Configure wellstream outlet or inlet conditions

Within the Well editor, use the Wellstream outlet conditions tab to specify boundary
conditions for the wellstream outlet. You may optionally provide boundary conditions for use in
network simulations with boundary conditions specified at the surface (wellstream outlet). The fluid
model defined represents the full wellstream fluid mixture to account for gas lift injection, multiple
completions, and so forth.

220
PIPESIM User Guide
Often with a large network, a facility engineer focused on analyzing the network may not be
interested in modeling the entire well for multiple reasons (uncertainty of well data, faster
simulation, simplified network, etc.) and may want to simulate the network using the surface
measurements at the wells (typically at wellhead) as the boundary. By assigning a Wellstream
Outlet (for a production well) and/or Wellstream Inlet (for an injection well), you can perform such
analysis.
This wellstream outlet (or wellstream inlet in case of an injection well), virtually replaces the entire
well upstream (or downstream, for an injection well) of this point and uses a representative
condition (pressure, temperature and fluid) to simulate the resultant simplified network, and is
typically located at the point of measurement. In case of a single branch involving an injection well,
you can use the Wellstream Inlet conditions to define the boundary conditions and fluid associated
with the surface injection source.
By default, the wellstream outlet/inlet is placed at the wellhead, but you can change the location to
any other point on the well branch where surface measurements are available. A small orange
block shown below indicates the location of the wellstream outlet for a production well.
Wellstream outlet at wellhead
Wellstream outlet at choke outlet
Wellstream outlet at end of flowline
Wellstream outlet/inlet requires all the parameters you would specify to a generic source in
PIPESIM. These are:
Wellstream outlet and inlet conditions properties
PQ Curve By default a source requires a fixed pressure and/or fixed flowrate boundary
(check box) condition. When you select the PQ curve option, you can model a PQ curve
(typically wellhead performance curve). Additional tabs appear to record PQ
table (Table tab) and display PQ-curve (Curve tab).
Note: PQ Curves are used to represent the deliverability of a wellstream outlet/

inlet for network simulation tasks only. For single-branch simulation tasks, the

221
PIPESIM User Guide
PQ curve is ignored and the single-value source pressure and/or rate defined
in the simulation task is used instead.
Temperature The fluid temperature at the wellstream outlet/inlet.

Pressure Fluid pressure at the wellstream outlet/inlet.
( Appears when PQ curve is unchecked)
Flowrate Fluid flowrate (liquid, gas or mass) at the wellstream outlet/inlet. (Appear when
PQ curve is unchecked)
PQ curve properties - table tab
PQ type Flowrate basis for the PQ curve. Options are liquid flowrate, gas flowrate
or mass.
PQ Table (Table tab) Enter pressure and flowrate relationship in the table.
PQ Table (Curve tab) Graphically displays the PQ curve
Fluid model Define a fluid model for the wellstream outlet/inlet to represent the fluid
mixture at this point.
Override phase Select this check box if you want to override the phase ratio of selected fluid.
ratio
Gas ratio If you have checked override, select the gas phase ratio type and specify a
value.
Water ratio If you have checked override, select the water phase ratio type and specify a
value.
Set wellstream outlet

This wellstream outlet (applies to a production well) virtually replaces the entire well upstream of
this point and uses a representative condition (pressure, temperature and fluid) to simulate the
resultant simplified network. By default wellhead is treated as wellstream outlet. However, you can
assign any other surface equipment or connection as wellstream outlet.
1. Perform one of the following tasks:

222
PIPESIM User Guide
• In the well-centric mode, go to surface equipment tab and on the surface schematic right
click on any object (wellhead, other equipment or connection except junction) and select Set
as Wellstream Outlet.
• In the network-centric mode, right click on any object (wellhead, other equipment or
connection except junction) in the well branch and select Set as Wellstream Outlet.
Your wellstream outlet is now set and is displayed on the object with a orange box attached
to the object.
2. To view and configure the properties of wellstream outlet, open well editor and select the
wellhead at the surface schematic under surface equipment tab of well editor.
Property pane for wellstream outlet appears underneath the surface schematic.
3. Configure wellstream outlet conditions and assign a fluid model.
Note: The Wellstream outlet conditions tab properties are optional, except when running a network
simulation with boundary conditions associated with surface conditions.
Set wellstream inlet

This wellstream inlet (applies to an injection well), virtually replaces the entire well downstream of
this point and uses a representative condition (pressure, temperature and fluid) to simulate the
resultant simplified network. In case of a single branch operation, you can use the Wellstream Inlet
conditions to define the boundary conditions and fluid associated with the surface injection source.
1. Perform one of the following tasks:
• In the well-centric mode, go to surface equipment tab and on the surface schematic right
click on any object (wellhead, other equipment or connection except junction) and select Set
as Wellstream Inlet.
• In the network-centric mode, right click on any object (wellhead, other equipment or
connection except junction) in the well branch and select Set as Wellstream Inlet.
Your wellstream outlet is now set and is displayed on the object with a orange box attached to
the object.
2. To view and configure the properties of wellstream inlet, open the well editor and select the
wellhead at the surface schematic under the surface equipment tab of well editor.
Property pane for wellstream inlet appears underneath the surface schematic.
3. Configure wellstream inlet conditions and assign a fluid model.
Related links:
View surface equipment properties

You can view properties for the various surface equipment objects associated with a well.
1. To view properties for a surface equipment object, complete one of the following actions:

223
PIPESIM User Guide
• On the Surface equipment tab of the well editor, click on an equipment object or
connection within the surface schematic.
• Click an object name listed at the top of the Wellbore schematic.
• (Network-Centric Mode) Double-click an object name in the Inputs pane.
• (Network-Centric Mode) Right-click an object name in the Inputs pane and click Edit.
• (Network-Centric Mode) On the network diagram, double-click an equipment object.
• On the network diagram, right click an object and click Edit.
The specific equipment properties display on the Surface equipment tab or in the appropriate
editor window.
Related links:
Engine Keyword Tool

You can insert the engine keywords tool in a well or as surface equipment. The Engine Keyword
Equipment writes to the engine input file the keywords inline and entered by you. Engine keywords
may also be entered for all single branches or for the entire network under Home » Simulation
settings » Advanced » Engine keywords. Refer to the Advanced properties (p.8) topic for more
details.
To use the Engine keywords tool, perform the following steps:
1. Double click a well to open the Well Editor.
2. Drag and drop the Engine keywords equipment on the well.
The Downhole equipment tab is active to include the engine keywords parameters.
3. Click the Downhole equipment tab and update (if necessary) the engine keywords
parameters.
Name Name of the engine surface equipment
Active You can specify if the unit is active or not
Measured depth The depth of the equipment in the well
Note: The Measured depth parameter is only available in the Well Editor.
Engine keywords Enter the keyword used by the engine

4. For more information, see Keyword Reference (p.751).

224
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
2.2.5 Create a network model from a GIS shapefile automatically
Note:
• PIPESIM currently only supports shapefiles with coordinates referenced to EPSG:4326, known
as the World Geodetic System (WGS) 1984 or WGS84. Shapefiles with coordinates referenced
to other coordinate reference systems must be de-projected to EPSG:4326 coordinates using
standard desktop GIS software such as ArcGIS for Desktop or QGIS, before importing them
into PIPESIM to create networks.
• PIPESIM currently only supports the automatic creation of flowlines from polyline shapefile
features. Wells and other equipment cannot yet be automatically created from point and
polygon shapefile features. However, PIPESIM will automatically add junctions between
flowlines when the network is created and provides the ability to convert these junctions to
wells, sources, sinks and other equipment. Refer to the topic Converting Junctions to Wells,
Sources, Sinks and Equipment for additional details.
• PIPESIM supports the creation of networks by importing additional shapefiles (incremental
updates). However, it is important to ensure that incremental updates contain only new
flowlines and not flowlines already existing in the network. Otherwise, duplicate flowlines will be
imported and will appear on top of existing flowlines.
• Prior to creating a network from a shapefile, it is strongly recommended to pre-process the
shapefile using the Seaweed Shapefile Pre-Processing Utility that installs in the PIPESIM Labs
directory (..\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM20xx.x\PIPESIM Labs\Seaweed ShapeFile
Utility). This utility will reduce redundant flowlines and remove unnecessary nodes which might
otherwise dramatically slow performance.
1. Go to the Home tab, in the Viewers and results group, select GIS map.
2. From the active Insert tab, click Import network and browse to the location of the shapefiles.
3. Select the main shapefile with the *.shp extension and click Open.
The *.dbf and *.prj files must also be present in the same location. For more information,
refer to GIS Shapefile Basics (p.465).
The Import network dialog box opens where you can map the attributes in the shapefile (if
available) to the PIPESIM properties required for simulation. They are the Flowline name, Pipe
Inside Diameter, Pipe wall thickness and Pipe roughness. The Import dialog box also enables
you to define other global environmental and flowline settings for the entire network that will be
imported. This is to speed up the facilitate network creation and process.
4. In the Shapefile property column, Map the available flowline name attribute in the shapefile to
the PIPESIM flowline name by selecting it from the Options list. If there is no Flowline name

225
PIPESIM User Guide
attribute in the shapefile, leave the default [Create New] option. PIPESIM will automatically
create new names for each imported flowline.
The attribute options available in the options list for each Shapefile property are type-specific
(for example, Flowline name) will display only the text attributes in the shapefile, while Pipe ID,
wall thickness and roughness will display only numeric attributes.
5. Map the Shapefile property attributes for Pipe Inside Diameter, Pipe wall thickness, and Pipe
roughness, if available. If any one or all of these properties are unavailable in the shapefile,
check the Override box and manually enter these values. The manual values will be assigned
to every flowline created from the shapefile.
6. The Air temperature, Wind speed, Soil type and Soil conductivity values in the Global
environment settings are the default values under Home in the Data group, select Simulations
settings and click the Environmental tab in the workspace itself. You may leave the default
values or change them by checking the Update global environment settings and entering your
preferred values. All flowlines created will be assigned these values and the global
environmental settings under Simulation settings will also be updated with these values.
7. The Flowline settings section also displays the default values. You may modify the heat
transfer properties for the flowlines, if desired.
The recommendation is to limit the use of the feature to automatically create networks from
shapefiles, to onshore environments only, because risers cannot currently be created from
shapefile features.
8. Click OK to complete the import network process. The created network appears on the GIS
map layer. PIPESIM will create a flowline for every polyline feature and automatically insert
junctions between consecutive polylines, where they share an endpoint.
9. Capture the elevation profiles for the imported network by using the steps from Capturing
Elevation (p.477). Alternatively, you can manually enter the elevation profiles for each flowline
in the Logical view of the Flowline editor by unchecking the Populate from GIS map box.
10. Complete the network creation process by manually converting individual junctions to wells,
sources, sinks and other equipment. For more information, see Converting Junctions to Wells,
Sources, Sinks and Equipment.
Related links:
Use the GIS map (p.471)
2.2.6 Add connections

In network-centric mode, the connection objects are contained in the Connections group located
on the Insert tab. Connection objects are used to connect two node objects. The node objects
must have already been added to the model to be connected. Use a connector (a zero-length
flowline) to connect two equipment objects that have no significant pressure or temperature
change between them.
• On the Insert tab in the Connections group, click Connector.

226
PIPESIM User Guide
• On the Insert tab in the Connections group, click Flowline.

• On the Insert tab in the Connections group, click Riser.
2. On the network diagram, hover the mouse pointer over the first object to be connected. A small
square appears on the object.
3. Click the object, and then click the second object (representing the end point).
Note: A small
appears when the pointer is near the target; a small
appears when it is not close enough.
Either a connector (
), a flowline, or riser appears, connecting the two objects.

4. Double-click either the flowline or the riser, and then enter the properties in the corresponding
editor to define the flowline or riser profile (distance and elevation) by using either the simple
model or the detailed model.
Note: A connector has no configurable properties.
Related links:
Flowline - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab (p.174)
Flowline overview
Riser - detailed model properties - heat transfer tab (p.212)
Riser overview

227
PIPESIM User Guide
3
Create or edit fluid models
Fluid modeling is a fundamental aspect of multiphase flow simulation. Before running any
simulations, you need to create one or more fluid models. Fluid models are used to describe phase
behavior and provide physical and transport properties of the fluid required for any simulation run.
PIPESIM* supports several types of fluids. After you select a fluid type on the Home tab, all the
objects within the model automatically use that fluid type. Even though you can store multiple types
of fluids within an object, PIPESIM only displays the one you selected on the Home tab and uses it
in simulation. These fluid types are currently available:
Fluid Type Description

Black Oil Black oil fluids are modeled as three phases: oil, gas, and water. The amount of
each phase is defined at stock tank conditions by specifying gas and water
phase ratios, typically the gas/oil ratio (GOR) and the watercut. Properties at
pressures and temperatures other than stock tank are determined by
correlations. Water is assumed to remain in the liquid phase. The key property
for determining the phase behavior of hydrocarbons is the solution gas/oil ratio,
which is used to calculate the amount of the gas dissolved in the oil at a given
pressure and temperature.
Compositional Compositional fluid refers to a fluid made up of a number of components. These
fluid can be real molecules, such as methane, ethane, or water, known as library
components, or user-defined pseudo-components that represent the properties
of several molecules known as petroleum fractions. The Flash packages
available in PIPESIM include ECLIPSE 300, GERG, and Multiflash.
Note: When the Multiflash package is chosen in the Compositional fluid mode,
the fluid definition is done using the PIPESIM interface (Multiflash "native").
However, when the MFL File mode is chosen, the fluid definition is done using
files generated by launching the Multiflash interface (Multiflash MFL file). Refer
to the section Multiflash in Compositional Fluid mode ("native") vs Multiflash
MFL files (p.228) for more details on these two options.
A compositional fluid can be defined within PIPESIM and written to a PVT file.

228
PIPESIM User Guide
Fluid Type Description

PVT File PVT files are generated from a third-party PVT simulator such as Calsep's
PVTSim, KBC's Multiflash™, GUTS, and OLI's ScaleChem. The PVT simulator
writes a data file that is stored externally to PIPESIM in an ASCII file. When
properties are required at a specific pressure and temperature (PT), the data file
will be interrogated, and interpolation (or extrapolation) used to find the
properties at the required PT point. You may define only one PVT fluid per
model.
MFL File MFL files are generated from KBC's Multiflash software, a 3rd-party PVT flash
package available as a separate licensed module in PIPESIM. Multiflash
enables full phase behavior modeling of multiphase fluids and solids using
standard models with petroleum fluid characterization. You may define a new
MFL fluid (p.238) or edit existing MFL fluid files (p.238) by launching the
Multiflash interface from PIPESIM or simply use existing MFL files (p.238) by
pointing to their locations. Multiple MFL files can be defined in one PIPESIM
model and mapped to different sources and wells in the Fluid Manager,
however care must be taken to ensure that the models and components are
consistent across all MFL files. Refer to the section Ensuring consistency
among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network model (p.246), for more details.
Related links:
Define black oil fluids (p.229)
Define compositional fluids (p.238)
Create/define a new MFL fluid (p.238)
Display phase envelopes for compositional fluid or mfl file (p.260)
Override fluid phase ratios (p.263)
Import a PVT file (p.264)
3.1 Define black oil fluids

Black oil fluids are modeled as three phases: oil, gas, and water. The amount of each phase is
defined at stock tank conditions by specifying gas and water phase ratios, typically the gas/oil ratio
(GOR) and the watercut. Properties at pressures and temperatures other than stock tank are
determined by empirical correlations. Water is assumed to remain in the liquid phase. The key
property for determining the phase behavior of hydrocarbons is the solution gas/oil ratio, which is
used to calculate the amount of the gas dissolved in the oil at a given pressure and temperature.
You can create a new fluid using the global Fluid manager or using the Fluid model tab that
appears whenever source properties (completions, injection points, and generic sources) are
defined.
1. On the Home tab, click Fluid manager and select Black oil fluid from the options list as the
global fluid option in the model.

229
PIPESIM User Guide
The Fluid manager opens.

2. On the Fluids tab, click New (+) at the bottom left corner of the fluid table.
• To initialize a fluid description using an existing template, click Template and select the one
of the predefined fluids from the list, and then click OK. The new fluid is added to the fluid
table.
• To create a new fluid model without a template, click New, and then click OK.
The Fluid editor window opens.
4. Edit the fluid Name, and enter a Description.
5. Double-click on the appropriate row in the fluid table to open the Fluid editor window, and
define the fluid properties.
6. Perform one of the following actions to save the fluid:
• Click Close and the fluid is saved in the Fluid manager.
• To save the fluid as a template, create a meaningful title and click Save as template, and
then click OK.
Note: The fluid template option is useful when other fluid sources have similar fluids with little or no
variation in properties, correlations, or calibration. The fluid is added to the Fluid templates
catalog and is available in the New fluid window the next time you create a new fluid.
If only the phase ratios (such as watercut/GOR) vary by source, you do not need to create a fluid
template. Instead, change the phase ration overrides on the Fluid mapping tab.
7. To map the defined fluid to one or more fluid sources, click the Fluid mapping tab, and
associate fluids and sources.
8. On the Fluid mapping tab, you may optionally override phase ratios for specific fluid sources
by selecting the Override Phase Ratios check box and specifying the phase ratio type and
value for individual sources.
This method is convenient to reuse defined fluid models for wells or completions associated
with a common fluid, but exhibit different phase ratios due to effects such as coning or exposure
of perforations across contact depths.
Related links:
Properties tab (p.146)
Calibration properties (p.236)
Thermal properties (p.237)
3.1.1 Properties tab

This topic describes the stock tank properties and contaminant fractions properties for black oil
fluids.

230
PIPESIM User Guide
Stock tank properties
Watercut The following options are available to define water content:
GWR Watercut
WGR
Volume % aqueous phase in the total liquid phase at standard
conditions. Typically used when the fluid is predominantly liquid.
GWR
Gas/water ratio at stock tank conditions. Typical for a Gas-water system
when water is the primary phase.
WGR
Water/gas ratio at stock tank conditions. Typically used for fluid where
gas is the predominant phase.
GLR Total gas ratio of the fluid (includes associated and free gas)
GOR The following options are available to define a gas phase in a typical
LGR petroleum fluid:
OGR
GLR
Gas/liquid ratio at stock tank conditions
GOR
Gas/oil ratio at stock tank conditions
LGR
Liquid/gas ratio at stock tank conditions. Typically used when gas is the
predominant phase.
OGR
Oil/gas ratio at stock tank conditions. Typically used when gas is the
predominant phase.
Gas specific Stock tank gas specific gravity (MWt/28.97)
gravity Default value is 0.64.
Water specific Stock tank water specific gravity (default value: 1.02).
gravity
APl gravity Oil phase density at stock tank condition can be defined as API gravity
DOD (141.5/SGL)-131.5. The API gravity default is 30.
Or, you may enter the dead oil density (DOD). The DOD default is 54.7 lb/ft3
or 876 kg/m3.
Contaminant mole fractions

Contaminants are used to improve the accuracy in calculating the compressibility factor (Z factor)
used in the gas equation of state (PV=ZnRT). The CO2 fraction is also used for corrosion
calculations.

231
PIPESIM User Guide
You can add and track the following gas contaminants in a black oil fluid:
Contaminant Description
CO2 fraction Carbon dioxide
H2S fraction Hydrogen sulfide
N2 fraction Nitrogen
H2 fraction Molecular hydrogen
CO fraction Carbon monoxide
Related links:
3.1.2 Viscosity properties

Viscosity is a measure of the fluid's internal resistance to flow. The viscosity of a crude oil is
impacted by several factors like composition, pressure and temperature conditions as well as
presence of dissolved gas.
• Presence of dissolved gas lightens the crude oil and reduces its viscosity.
• As the oil is compressed, viscosity increases.
Below the bubble point, the effect of gas dissolving in oil dominates, and the saturated viscosity
decreases with pressure. However, at the bubble point pressure, all the available gas has
dissolved in the oil.
For pressures above the bubble point, the oil is undersaturated (no more free gas is available).
With increasing pressure, viscosity increases.
Undersaturated oil viscosity

For pressures above the bubble point, there is no vapor phase. The oil is undersaturated because
more gas could be dissolved in the oil, if the gas were available.
Correlation Correlations available for calculating undersaturated oil viscosity are:
• None
• Vasquez & Beggs
• Kouzel
• Khan
• De Ghetto
• Hossein
• Elsharkawy
• Bergman & Sutton

232
PIPESIM User Guide
• Petrosky-Farshad
These correlations cover a wide range of crude oil types. For more detail on these
including formulation and applicability, see the Technical Description section of the
PIPESIM Online help.
Note: If you select None as the undersaturated oil viscosity method, the
undersaturated oil viscosity is assumed to be the same as the saturated live oil
viscosity at the same temperature and pressure.
Par A The Kouzel correlation exposes these parameters for tuning. The default values
Par B (0.239 and 0.01638) are suggested.
For more information, see Undersaturated Oil Viscosity. (p.681)
Live oil viscosity

Live oil is above stock tank pressure and contains dissolved gas.
Correlation Correlations available for calculating live oil viscosity are:
• Beggs & Robinson
• Chew & Connally
• Khan
• De Ghetto
• Hossein
• Elsharkawy
These correlations cover a wide range of crude oil types. For more detail on these
including formulation and applicability, see the Technical Description section of the
For more information, see Live Oil Viscosity Correlations. (p.679)
Dead oil viscosity

Dead oil is oil at stock tank pressure or oil with no dissolved gas; for example, an oil in which gas
has been removed by a separator and pumped through an export line.
Correlation Correlations available for calculating dead oil viscosity are:
• Beggs & Robinson

233
PIPESIM User Guide
• Glaso
• Kartoatmodjo
• De Ghetto
• Hossein
• Elsharkawy
• User 2-point
• User Table
These correlations cover a wide range of crude oil types. For more detail on
these including formulation and applicability, see the technical section of
Note: To display dead oil viscosity calculated by any of these correlations,

specify two measured temperatures from the correlation drop-down selector.
Viscosities calculated by the selected correlation will be displayed.
User 2 Point Instead of using one of the listed correlations, you can enter measured viscosity
viscosity lab data at two temperatures.
Temperature (1st), Temperature (2nd) measured temperature points
Viscosity (1st), Viscosity (2nd), corresponding measured viscosities
Note: Viscosities at all other temperatures will be calculated by the curve fitting
between these two data points.
User-defined Similar to 2-point viscosity data; however ,a viscosity table is used when you
table have three or more lab measurement data points.
For more information, see Dead Oil Viscosity. (p.676)
Oil-water mixtures
An emulsion is a mixture of two immiscible liquids. One phase (the dispersed phase) is carried as
droplets in the other (the continuous phase). In oil/water systems at low watercuts, oil is usually the
continuous phase. As watercut increases, there is a point where phase inversion occurs, and water
becomes the continuous phase. This point is the watercut cutoff, and it typically occurs between
55% and 70% watercut. The viscosity of the mixture is usually highest at and just below the cutoff.
Emulsion viscosities can be many times higher than the viscosity of either phase alone.

234
PIPESIM User Guide
Emulsion Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions methods. Based on the method you
Viscosity selected, you might need to enter values for some properties. Examples:
method Set to viscosity of the continuous phase
The liquid viscosity equals the oil viscosity when the watercut is equal to or less
than the cutoff; otherwise, it equals the water viscosity.
Volume ratio of oil and water viscosities
The mixture viscosity equals the volume ratio of the oil and water viscosities.
PIPESIM* Original Woelflin 1942 Loose Emulsion
Use the original Woelflin Loose Emulsion correlation when the watercut is equal
to or less than the cutoff; otherwise, set it equal to the water viscosity above.
Woelflin (p.738) 1942 Loose Emulsion
Use the Loose Emulsion correlation at watercuts below the cutoff; otherwise, set
it to the water viscosity above it.
Woelflin 1942 Medium Emulsion
Use the Medium Emulsion correlation at watercuts below the cutoff; otherwise,
set it to the water viscosity above it.
Woelflin 1942 Tight Emulsion
Use the Tight Emulsion correlation at watercuts below the cutoff; otherwise, set
Brinkman (p.738) 1952
Use Brinkman 1952 correlation. This method generally predicts elevated liquid
viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
Vand (p.738) 1948, Vand coefficients
Use Vand correlation with Vand's coefficients. This method generally predicts
elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
Vand (p.738) 1948, Barnea & Mizrahi coefficients
Use Vand correlation with Barnea & Mizrahi coefficients. This method generally
predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
Vand (p.738) 1948, user-defined coefficients
Use Vand correlation with coefficients that you selected for tuning. This method
predicts liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff. Based on your choice of
coefficients, the results can yield elevated or depressed viscosities.
Richardson (p.738) 1958
Enter two coefficients, one is for oil in water and the other is for water in oil. This
method predicts liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff. Based on your
choice of coefficients, the results can yield elevated or depressed viscosities.
Leviton and Leighton (p.738) 1936
Use Leviton and Leighton correlation. This method generally predicts elevated
liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.

235
PIPESIM User Guide
User-defined table
Enter a table of the Watercut and Viscosity ratio or emulsion viscosity.
Watercut Perform one of the following actions:
cutoff • Click Calculate to use the Brauner-Ullman (p.738) method.
• Click Specify and enter a watercut cutoff percent (%) or fraction (fract.).
The default method is Specify. A typical value is between 55% and 70%; the
default value is 60%.
Related links:
Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions (p.717)
3.1.3 Calibration properties

Black Oil fluid models use a set of empirical correlations to calculate various properties like
viscosity, bubble-point pressure, density, and so forth. In many cases, these calculated properties
do not match the values measured at lab. Calibration is required to improve the accuracy of the
fluid property calculations by adjusting the correlations to match measured data obtained by
laboratory analysis.
The bubble-point pressure is one of the most important parameters in black oil fluid modeling as
most of the fluid properties and choices of correlation change above and below this point. The
bubble point refers to the pressure and temperature conditions at which all the available gas are
fully dissolved in the oil. A slight drop in pressure (assuming constant temperature) will result in the
first bubble of gas coming out of oil phase and as pressure drops further, more and more gas will
come out of solution. Oil above the bubble point is referred as under-saturated oil as the amount of
gas dissolved is always less than what it could dissolve. On the other hand, oil below the bubble
point is referred to as saturated oil. Oil with no dissolved gas is referred to as dead oil.
If the calibration data is omitted, PIPESIM will calibrate on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone.
To calibrate a black oil fluid, add measured data and corresponding pressure and temperature
conditions.
Density Property above the bubble point.
OFVF Density
Mass per unit of volume
OFVF (Oil formation volume factor)
Ratio of the liquid volume at reservoir conditions to that at stock tank
conditions
Pressure Measured pressure
Temperature Measured temperature

236
PIPESIM User Guide
Correlation Fixed correlation
Table 3.1: Calibration Above the Bubble Point
Sat. Gas Quantity of gas that dissolves in the oil and saturates it at a given
pressure and temperature, such as reservoir conditions.
Pressure Pressure at the bubble point
Temperature Temperature at the bubble point
Solution Gas correlation List of available correlations
Table 3.2: Calibration at the Bubble Point
Density Property at or below the bubble point.
OFVF Density
Mass per unit of volume
OFVF (Oil formation volume factor)
Ratio of the liquid volume at reservoir conditions to that at stock tank
conditions
Live Oil Viscosity Viscosity of oil containing dissolved gas
Gas viscosity Viscosity of free gas
Gas Z gas compressibility factor
Pressure Measured pressure
Temperature Measured temperature
Correlations List of available correlations
Table 3.3: Calibration At or Below the Bubble Point
For more information, see Gas Compressibility (p.683), Oil Formation Volume Factor for Saturated
Systems (p.673), and Live Oil Viscosity Correlations (p.679).
Related links:
Oil formation volume factor (p.673)
Gas viscosity (p.686)
3.1.4 Thermal properties

The following table describes the thermal property options which primarily influence heat transfer
calculations.

237
PIPESIM User Guide
Specific heat Specific heat capacity data is required for the calculation of fluid
capacity enthalpies. Application has default values of specific heat capacities for all
three phases (oil, gas and water). You can override these.
Thermal conductivity
Enthalpy calculation Method to use for the enthalpy calculation:
method • Method1983
• Method2009
The black oil fluid model makes some approximations in the entropy
balance, based on the thermodynamic behavior of typical hydrocarbon
fluids.
Specific latent heat of (Only available with Method2009) Amount of heat required to convert unit
vaporization mass of a liquid into the vapor without a change in temperature.
For more information, see 2009 Method (p.687) and 1983 Method (p.688).
Related links:
3.2 Define compositional fluids

Compositional fluid modeling involves defining mole fractions for each individual molecular
component or petroleum fraction. Equations of state are used to flash the fluid (calculate vapor-
liquid equilibrium) and determine thermodynamic and transport properties. Compositional fluid
modeling is generally regarded as the most accurate approach, especially for wet gas, condensate
and volatile oil systems which require more rigorous heat transfer calculations and more accurate
phase fractions.
Creating a compositional fluid is a two-stage process.
• Define (or update) the global component list and model settings.
• Specify the composition for each individual fluid source.
1. Define (or update) the global component list and model settings.
a. On the Home tab, click Fluid manager and select Compositional fluid from the option list
as the global fluid option in the model.
b. Select the components that are present by selecting the check boxes next to the component
names.
c. To define petroleum fractions (p.710) (pseudo-components), click New and specify the
name and properties of the pseudo-component.
Depending on the flash package, certain minimum properties are required (as indicated with
the red boxes). Once these properties have been supplied, all other properties are

238
PIPESIM User Guide
calculated. Additional properties may be entered unless the field is marked as read only in
which case this value is always calculated.
d. To specify user-defined binary interaction coefficients, check the Override binary
interaction coefficients in the Models section. This will display a tabular view of the binary
coefficients for the default BIP set for the PVT package, which can then be edited for
example, Oil and gas 4 for Multiflash. If you would like to override the values of another BIP
set, uncheck the Override binary interaction coefficients box, change the BIP set and
then check the Override box again.
Note: The only binary interaction coefficients you can modify are for the ECLIPSE 300 and
Multiflash PVT packages. The GERG-2008 flash package uses NIST-REFPROP for calculation of
transport properties, and REFPROP limits certain components from being used in combination.
You may switch flash packages even after fluid models have been defined. However, due to
differences in component libraries, petroleum fraction definitions, and limitations with component
combinations (GERG-2008), some aspects of the fluid definition may not fully convert. Please refer
to the Message center to view any issues encountered during the conversion process.
2. Specify the composition for each individual fluid source.

You may define compositional fluid models for individual sources once the global component
list and model properties has been specified. You may apply these fluid models to one or more
fluid sources entering at each sources that supply flow to the system. Each fluid consists of a
set of mole fractions that specify the composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase
split the composition may exhibit at any pressure and temperature.
You can create a new fluid using the global Fluid manager or using the Fluid model tab that
appears whenever source properties (completions, injection points, and generic sources) are
defined.
a. On the Home tab, click Fluid manager and select Compositional fluid from the option list.
b. To create a new compositional fluid, perform one of the following actions:
• In the Fluid manager , on the Fluids tab, click New (+).
• On the Inputs pane, right-click Fluids, and then click New.
• From within a completion, injection point, or generic source properties editor, on the
Fluids tab, click New.
The Fluid editor window opens.
c. Edit the fluid Name, and enter a Description.
d. Specify the mole fractions for the fluid.
As you enter the mole fractions, a phase envelope representing the fluid displays the fluid
properties at standard conditions.
e. To view the phase compositions and properties at conditions of interest, enter Pressure and
Temperature in the Flash/Tune fluid section.
f. To calculate a composition to match measured phase ratios, click Specify and enter the
observed gas and water ratios.

239
PIPESIM User Guide
• Compare the phase envelope of the tuned fluid relative to the original one. Also, look at
the phase compositions and properties associated with the tuned fluid.
• To update the fluid composition to the values calculated to achieve the match, click
Apply tuned results to fluid.
Notes:
• The methods used to match phase ratios require that components be initially present in
some amount to achieve the match. For example, if no water is present in the fluid, a
composition corresponding to a non-zero watercut cannot be calculated. Likewise, if
hydrocarbon liquid is present, no solution will be calculated if, for example, the only
hydrocarbon component defined is methane. Also, consider that there is no unique
phase composition to match specified gas and water ratios. The method PIPESIM uses
minimizes the sum residual errors for all components present. This approach is generally
satisfactory for fine-tuning phase ratios to match observed data so long as the original
composition is based on the laboratory analysis of a representative fluid sample obtained
in the field.
• If you are using Multiflash and have a Multiflash Hydrates license and water and light
gases in your composition, the Hydrate formation curve will automatically appear on the
phase diagram
g. Click Close to save the new fluid.

h. To map the defined fluid to one or more fluid sources, click the Fluid mapping tab, and
associate fluids and sources.
i. On the Fluid mapping tab, you may optionally override phase ratios for specific fluid
sources by selecting the Override Phase Ratios check box and specifying the phase ratio
type and value for individual sources.
This method is convenient to reuse defined fluid models for wells or completions associated
with a common fluid, but exhibit different phase ratios due to effects such as coning or
exposure of perforations across contact depths. The same method used to tune individual
compositional fluid models is automatically applied.
For more information, see the list of REFPROP and GERG-2008 component restrictions and
Compositional Fluid Modeling (p.696) in the Technical Description.
Related links:
Salinity models (p.232)
Binary interaction parameter (BIP) sets (p.99)
3.2.1 Viscosity properties

Viscosity is a measure of the fluid's internal resistance to flow. The viscosity of a crude oil is
impacted by several factors like composition, pressure and temperature conditions as well as
presence of dissolved gas.

240
PIPESIM User Guide
• Presence of dissolved gas lightens the crude oil and reduces its viscosity.
• As the oil is compressed, viscosity increases.
Below the bubble point, the effect of gas dissolving in oil dominates, and the saturated viscosity
decreases with pressure. However, at the bubble point pressure, all the available gas has
dissolved in the oil.
For pressures above the bubble point, the oil is undersaturated (no more free gas is available).
With increasing pressure, viscosity increases.
Oil-water mixtures
An emulsion is a mixture of two immiscible liquids. One phase (the dispersed phase) is carried as
droplets in the other (the continuous phase). In oil/water systems at low watercuts, oil is usually the
continuous phase. As watercut increases, there is a point where phase inversion occurs, and water
becomes the continuous phase. This point is the watercut cutoff, and it typically occurs between
55% and 70% watercut. The viscosity of the mixture is usually highest at and just below the cutoff.
Emulsion viscosities can be many times higher than the viscosity of either phase alone.
Emulsion Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions methods. Based on the method you
Viscosity selected, you might need to enter values for some properties. Examples:
method Set to viscosity of the continuous phase
The liquid viscosity equals the oil viscosity when the watercut is equal to or less
than the cutoff; otherwise, it equals the water viscosity.
Volume ratio of oil and water viscosities
The mixture viscosity equals the volume ratio of the oil and water viscosities.
PIPESIM* Original Woelflin 1942 Loose Emulsion
Use the original Woelflin Loose Emulsion correlation when the watercut is equal
to or less than the cutoff; otherwise, set it equal to the water viscosity above.
Woelflin (p.738) 1942 Loose Emulsion
Use the Loose Emulsion correlation at watercuts below the cutoff; otherwise, set
Woelflin (p.738) 1942 Medium Emulsion
Use the Medium Emulsion correlation at watercuts below the cutoff; otherwise,
set it to the water viscosity above it.
Woelflin (p.738) 1942 Tight Emulsion
Use the Tight Emulsion correlation at watercuts below the cutoff; otherwise, set
Brinkman (p.738) 1952
Use Brinkman 1952 correlation. This method generally predicts elevated liquid
viscosities on either side of the cutoff.

241
PIPESIM User Guide
Vand (p.738) 1948, Vand coefficients
Use Vand correlation with Vand's coefficients. This method generally predicts
elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
Vand (p.738) 1948, Barnea & Mizrahi coefficients
Use Vand correlation with Barnea & Mizrahi coefficients. This method generally
predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
Vand (p.738) 1948, user-defined coefficients
Use Vand correlation with coefficients that you selected for tuning. This method
predicts liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff. Based on your choice of
coefficients, the results can yield elevated or depressed viscosities.
Richardson (p.738) 1958
Enter two coefficients, one is for oil in water and the other is for water in oil. This
method predicts liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff. Based on your
choice of coefficients, the results can yield elevated or depressed viscosities.
Leviton and Leighton 1936
Use Leviton and Leighton correlation. This method generally predicts elevated
liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
User-defined table
Enter a table of the Watercut and Viscosity ratio or emulsion viscosity.
Watercut Perform one of the following actions:
cutoff • Click Calculate to use the Brauner-Ullman method.
• Click Specify and enter a watercut cutoff percent (%) or fraction (fract.).
The default method is Specify. A typical value is between 55% and 70%; the
default value is 60%.
Related links:
Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions (p.717)
3.2.2 Salinity models

PIPESIM provides the option to define a "Salt component" as part of a Compositional fluid. This is
a useful feature to model the effect of salt on hydrate inhibition and its depression of the freezing
point and vapour pressure of water. In PIPESIM, the salt component cannot be explicitly (or
manually) defined. It can only be defined in one of two ways:
• Compositional fluid mode: You may choose one of two Salinity model options: Ion Analysis or
Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) to define a Salt component when creating a Compositional fluid.
• MFL file mode: You may define a Salt component when creating an MFL fluid in the Multiflash
interface using the Inhibitor Calculator. Refer to the Multiflash Help for details.

242
PIPESIM User Guide
The Salt component is a pseudo-component defined with a certain number of moles that
represents the NaCl equivalence of the salinity defined by the specified TDS or Ion Analysis data.
Choosing a Salinity model and entering its associated data will do the following.
• Add "Water" and the "Salt component" to the global component list
• Calculate the moles of the "Salt component" which is the moles of NaCl in an aqueous solution
that is equivalent to the aqueous solution defined by the specified TDS or Ion Analysis data
Define a salt component in compositional fluid mode using a salinity model

The steps below outline the procedure.
1. Set the Fluid mode for the workspace to Compositional, from the Fluid Manager and select
the global Salinity model option: TDS or Ion Analysis from the option list in the Component/
model settings tab. This will automatically add a read-only Salt component and Water to the
component list. Add the remaining components to the Component list by checking the boxes
beside them.
Note:
• The Salinity model option "None" implies that no Salt Component will be added to the
Compositional fluid. This is the default.
• The Salinity model selection is a global setting. All compositional fluids created in the
workspace will only be able to use the chosen salinity model.
2. On the Fluids tab, click New (+) at the bottom left corner of the Fluids table. Double-click the
row of the newly-created fluid to launch the Fluid editor. A new tab, Salinity Analysis, appears
next to the Viscosity tab in the Fluid editor.
Note: The Salinity analysis tab will appear in the Fluid editor only when the Salinity model
option is set to either TDS or Ion analysis.
3. Click the Composition tab and enter the value for the Moles of all components except the Salt
Component, which is read-only. By default, the Salt Component molar composition will be blank
until a Salt component is calculated from the Salinity analysis tab.
4. Click the Salinity Analysis tab and enter the required Salinity information for the previously-
selected Salinity model option: TDS or Ion Analysis, by overriding the default zero values.
Note:
• The required data for the Ion analysis option is: Cation and Anion concentration from a lab-
measured brine analysis (at least 1 of each must be specified) and Brine density*.
• The required data for the TDS option is: TDS from a lab-measured brine analysis and Brine
density*.
• *Brine density: For both the TDS and Ion analysis options, the default calculated brine
density may be used or a measured density/salinity may be entered. PIPESIM also provides
the option to convert measured salinity at standard conditions to measured density. To do

243
PIPESIM User Guide
this, choose Measured salinity (standard conditions) as the Brine density option, enter
the salinity value and then select Measured density from the option list. The converted
density value will be displayed.
5. If all the required data has been correctly entered, the Salt component moles in the Salinity
analysis tab will be computed and automatically updated in the Composition tab.
The phase envelope will also be regenerated and the phase compositions and phase properties
from the flash conditions will be automatically updated to reflect the calculated salt component
molar composition. You may observe the impact of the salt on the hydrate and water lines on the
phase envelope.
Note: There are several errors that may cause the Salt component moles to fail to calculate.
These errors will trigger red validation boxes in the data fields with validation issues and will
display clear mouse-over messages indicating the problems. The validation messages will also
appear in the Message center. Once all the validation issues are resolved, the Salt component
moles will be successfully computed.
Import PIPESIM classic models with compositional fluids including a salt

component
PIPESIM Classic (2012 and previous) supports three (3) Salinity model options:
• TDS
• Ion Analysis
• Salt Analysis
The new PIPESIM only supports TDS and Ion Analysis. When PIPESIM Classic models with Salt
Analysis data are imported in the new PIPESIM, the global Salinity model option under
Component/model settings in the Fluid manager, will be set to "None," and the data will not be
imported. For Classic models with other salinity models (TDS and Ion Analysis ), the data will be
imported. PIPESIM Classic models with multiple compositional fluids defined with a mix of different
Salinity models, will be imported, with the exception of data associated with the Salt Analysis
model type. For this special import case, the supported data (i.e. associated with the TDS and Ion
Analysis options only) will be imported, but the global Salinity model option will be set to "None."
To view the imported data, simply choose the supported Salinity model with data, from the global
Salinity model list. This is because only 1 global Salinity model may be defined for the entire
workspace. You will have to decide on one Salinity model option and enter the required data for
the same salinity model type for all the compositional fluids you choose to model with a Salt
component. Clear and descriptive messages related to the outcome of the salinity model import will
be displayed in the Message center.
Related links:

244
PIPESIM User Guide
3.2.3 Binary interaction parameter (BIP) sets

Binary interaction parameters ( BIPs) are adjustable factors, which are used to alter the predictions
from a model until the predictions match experimental data as closely as possible. BIPs are usually
generated by fitting experimental VLE or LLE data to the model in question. BIPs apply between
pairs of components, although the fitting procedure may be based on both binary and multi-
component phase equilibrium information.
Different PVT packages have different BIP sets as outlined below. All BIP sets can be overridden
in PIPESIM except the GERG BIP set.
Flash Package BIP set Comment

Mltiflash OILGAS4 See Multiflash Help System for more details.
E300 PVTi
GERG GERG Not exposed in the PIPESIM UI and cannot be overridden.
Related links:
3.2.4 E300 thermal coefficients

Thermal coefficients are the coefficients used in the following equations to calculate the Specific
Heat Capacity, Enthalpy and Entropy for individual components when the E300 PVT package is
selected. The thermal coefficients can be viewed for a component in a defined compositional fluid
by double-clicking on the component to launch the component editor and expanding the thermal
coefficients header. They are read-only fields that are populated only when the E300 package is
selected. The properties (specific heat capacity, enthalpy & entropy) of the fluid mixture are then
calculated as a weighted average of the property values of the individual components.
Specific heat capacity
Enthalpy
Entropy
Where
Cp = Specific Heat Capacity, J/mol K
H = Enthalpy, J/mol

245
PIPESIM User Guide
S = Entropy, J/mol K
T = Temperature, Kelvin
C0 = Coefficient 0, J/(mol )
C1 = Coefficient 1, J/(mol K)
C2 = Coefficient 2, J/(mol K2)
C4 =Coefficient 4, J/(mol K4)
C6 = Coefficient 6, J/mol K
3.3 Multiflash in the compositional fluid mode (native) vs.

Multiflash MFL files
PIPESIM enables two options for using the Multiflash package:
Package Type Description

Multiflash in the This option is enabled when you set the fluid mode to Compositional fluid
Compositional and choose Multiflash as the PVT package. With this option, the entire fluid
Fluid mode definition is done at a global level using the PIPESIM interface. The models
("native") selected (equation of state, viscosity, BIP set, etc.) are applied to all individual
fluids defined in the model. The models available with this option are a subset
of the full extent of the models available with the Multiflash MFL files option,
which gives you access to the standalone Multiflash program directly.
Multiflash MFL This option is enabled when the fluid mode is set to MFL file. The fluid
files definition is done using files generated by launching the Multiflash interface
(Multiflash MFL file). This option gives you access to the full extent of the
models available in Multiflash and is the required option for wax and
asphaltene thermodynamics. For complete details about defining and
managing MFL files in PIPESIM, refer to the sections Creating/Defining a new
MFL fluids (p.238), Using existing MFL fluid files (p.238), Editing an MFL fluid
file (p.238), and Availability of Multiflash models in PIPESIM using the MFL
file fluid mode option . (p.246)
Related links:
3.4 Ensure consistency among multiple fluid files in a

PIPESIM network model

246
PIPESIM User Guide
PIPESIM supports the ability to map a single MFL file to a workspace or multiple MFL files to
different wells and sources in a single workspace. When a single MFL file is mapped in the
PIPESIM workspace, all the information in the MFL file including the defined models (equation of
state, viscosity, thermal conductivity, surface tension, etc.) and any tuning that was done to match
experimental data, will be honored (used) by PIPESIM during the simulation. Refer to the tables
below for details on the Multiflash models currently supported by PIPESIM and the defaults used
when the selected Multiflash options are unavailable.
When multiple MFL files are mapped in the same workspace, it is important to use the
PROCOPTIONS (p.905) keyword to designate one of the MFL files as the 'master' file. This will
ensure that the models defined in the master MFL file i.e. equation of state, models for viscosity,
thermal conductivity, surface tension, etc.; in addition to any tuning done to match experimental
data in this master MFL file, are applied to all the MFL files in the workspace and used by PIPESIM
during the simulation. The simulation will proceed using all the information in the master MFL file
applied to all the MFL files in the workspace; with the only exception being the unique molar
composition of the individual MFL files, which PIPESIM will correctly incorporate in the simulation.
If none of the MFL files is designated as the master with the PROCOPTIONS keyword, PIPESIM
will arbitrarily choose one of them as the master MFL file and apply the models and tuned data in
it, to all MFL files in the workspace for the simulation.
If multiple MFL files must be mapped to a single PIPESIM workspace, care must be taken to
ensure that the models and components are consistent across all MFL files i.e. the fluid
characterization is consistent across the various fluid files to ensure reasonable simulation results
for network models.
Here are a few guidelines to follow when using multiple fluid files in a single PIPESIM network
model:
• All fluid files should have the same template of components or a subset of components.
Note: If the same component set is used across multiple MFL files in the workspace, for
components that are not present in a particular fluid, set their number of moles to zero.
• All fluid files should be characterized to the same number of pseudo-components and use the
same correlations and methods to estimate the properties of the pseudo-components (for
example, critical properties, acentric factors, omegas, etc.).
• All fluid files should be defined with the same Binary Interaction Parameter (BIP) set.
• It is strongly recommended that you designate one MFL file as the master MFL file using the
PROCOPTIONS (p.905) keyword to ensure that all component properties and fluid tuning
information are taken from the master file and applied to all the other MFL files in the model.
This requires that all fluids in the model be defined with MFL files that have the same set of
components and component properties i.e. the files should only differ from one another in the
molar amounts of each component. If the PROCOPTIONS keyword is not used, PIPESIM will
arbitrarily select one of the MFL files to be the master.
Note:
• PIPESIM can currently use tuned data in one (1) MFL fluid file in the workspace. If you tune the
models (EOS, Viscosity, etc.) to match experimental data for example, viscosity, density, etc., in

247
PIPESIM User Guide
the Multiflash interface, it is strongly recommended that you use only one MFL file (the one with
the tuned data) in the workspace. If you use multiple MFL files with tuned data in the PIPESIM
workspace, the tuned data in only one of the MFL files will be used in the PIPESIM simulation
run.
• If you use multiple MFL files with tuned data in the PIPESIM workspace, it is important to
designate one of them as the master MFL file using the PROCOPTIONS keyword and to
understand that the models and tuned data in this file will be applied to all MFL files in the
workspace. If none of them is designated as the master MFL file, PIPESIM will arbitrarily
designate one of them as the master for the simulation.
• When a single MFL file is mapped in the PIPESIM workspace, all the information in the MFL file
including the defined models (equation of state, viscosity, thermal conductivity, surface tension,
etc.) and any tuning information is honored by PIPESIM during the simulation.
Mapping of Multiflash equations of state to the PIPESIM

equivalents
Multiflash model name Available in PIPESIM model name
PIPESIM?
RKS Yes 3-parameter Soave-Redlich-Kwong (1972)*
RKS (Advanced) Yes 3-parameter Soave-Redlich-Kwong (1972)*
RKSA (Infochem) Yes 3-parameter Soave-Redlich-Kwong (1972) with
NRTL mixing rule
PR Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson (1976)*
PR (Advanced) Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson (1976)
PR78 Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson Corrected (1978)*
PR78 (Advanced) Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson Corrected (1978)
CPA-Infochem Yes Cubic Plus Association (CPA)
RKS API Version No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PSRK No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PSRK-NRTL No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
ZJ EoS No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
RKS-HVP No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)

248
PIPESIM User Guide

PIPESIM?
PR-HVP No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
*PIPESIM automatically upgrades the Multiflash model to this option.
**PIPESIM automatically defaults the Multiflash model to this option.
Table 3.4: Cubic Equations of State

PIPESIM?
BWRS Yes Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling (BWRS)
LK No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
LKP No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PC-SAFT No Problem: Not reading MFL file with this EOS
currently
Simplified PC-SAFT No Problem: Not reading MFL file with this EOS
currently
Table 3.5: Non-Cubic Equations of State

PIPESIM?
CSMA Yes Multi-reference fluid corresponding states
(CSMA)
Steam tables (IAPWS-95) Yes Problem: Not reading MFL file with this EOS
currently
GERG-2008 No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
GERG-2008 (Infochem) No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
CO2 high accuracy model No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
Table 3.6: Corresponding States models (CSMA)

249
PIPESIM User Guide
Mapping of Multiflash transport models to the PIPESIM equivalents
Note: The Multiflash option to include Diffusion coefficients in the transport model calculations
(viscosity, thermal conductivity and surface tension) is currently not supported by PIPESIM.
Multiflash model name Available in PIPESIM? PIPESIM model name

Pedersen Yes Pedersen
Pedersen + Twu Yes Pedersen or Pedersen & Twu
LBC Yes Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
SuperTRAPP Yes SuperTRAPP
Mixing rules No **defaults to Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
None **defaults to Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
Table 3.7: Viscosity models

MCS Yes Macleod-Sugden 1-phase
Sutton Yes Sutton
LGST No **defaults to Macleod-Sugden
Mixing rules No **defaults to Macleod-Sugden
None No **defaults to Macleod-Sugden
Table 3.8: Surface Tension models

CLS Yes CLS
SuperTRAPP No **default to CLS
Mixing rules No **default to CLS
Table 3.9: Thermal conductivity
Related links:
PROCOPTIONS: Master MFL file for mixing (optional but recommended) (p.905)
3.5 Create/define a new MFL fluid

250
PIPESIM User Guide
1. On the Home tab, select MFL file from the Fluid manager option list as the global fluid option
in the model.
2. On the Fluids tab, click New (+) at the bottom left corner of the Fluids table.
3. Click New… to launch the Multiflash application.
Note: An alternative workflow for Steps 2 & 3 is to right-click Fluids in the Inputs pane and
click New… Click New… again to launch the Multiflash application. (This applies only if a
PIPESIM layout is chosen which displays the Inputs pane).
4. Refer to the Multiflash Help to define the fluid composition, equation of state and to set all the
required parameters for the fluid. QC the fluid in Multiflash by generating and reviewing the
phase envelope and doing various flashes and reviewing the results.
5. Save the problem setup in Multiflash as an MFL file and close the Multiflash interface. This will
populate the File path in the PIPESIM interface with the location of the fluid file you just
created.
Note: Starting with PIPESIM 2014, MFL files are handled slightly different from older PIPESIM
versions. MFL files are actually imported into the PIPESIM model and the PIPESIM model can
be run without having physical copies of the MFL files on the machine. The MFL file path
mentioned is provided is simply for reference purposes. As such, even if the MFL file is
removed from this location, the PIPESIM model will still run with the imported MFL fluid.
Similarly, any changes to the MFL file in the file path will not be reflected in the PIPESIM model
unless the MFL file is re-imported.
6. Click OK.
7. Double-click the row of the newly-created fluid in the Fluids tab to visualize the fluid
composition, equation of state, viscosity model and phase envelope. Click Close twice to exit
the Fluid manager and continue with the model.
Note:
• An alternative workflow for Step 7 if the fluid was created from the Inputs pane is to expand
the Fluids list in the Inputs pane and double-click the fluid you just created to visualize its
details. Click Close to exit and continue with the model.
• The EOS and viscosity models displayed are the equivalent PIPESIM options and may differ
from the ones chosen in the Multiflash interface. Refer to the Availability of Multiflash Models
in PIPESIM using MFL file fluid mode option (p.246) section for additional details.
8. Repeat Steps 2-7 to create new MFL fluid files for the workspace OR include additional existing
MFL files by browsing to their locations by following steps 3-5 of the Importing existing MFL
fluid files (p.238) topic.
9. Click the Fluid mapping tab in the Fluid manager and map all the wells and sources in the
workspace to the defined MFL fluid files.

251
PIPESIM User Guide
Multiple MFL files can be defined in one PIPESIM model and mapped to different sources and
wells in the Fluid Manager, however care must be taken to ensure that the models and
components are consistent across all MFL files.
Note: PIPESIM can currently use tuned data in one (1) MFL fluid file in the workspace. If you tune
the models (EOS, Viscosity, etc.) to match experimental data for example, viscosity, density, etc.,
in the Multiflash interface, it is strongly recommended that you use only one MFL file (the one with
workspace, the tuned data in only one of the MFL files will be used in the PIPESIM simulation run.
For more information, see Ensuring consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network
model (p.246).
Related links:
Multiflash in the compositional fluid mode (native) vs. Multiflash MFL files (p.228)
Ensure consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network model (p.246)
Import existing MFL fluid files (p.238)
View wax or asphaltene curves on phase envelopes (p.99)
Edit a MFL fluid file (p.238)
Availability of Multiflash models in PIPESIM using the MFL file fluid mode option (p.246)
Multiflash phases supported in PIPESIM (p.246)
3.5.1 Import existing MFL fluid files

in the model.
2. On the Fluids tab, click New (+) at the bottom left corner of the Fluids table.
Note: An alternative workflow for Step 2 is to right-click Fluids in the Inputs pane and click
New… (This applies only if a PIPESIM layout is chosen which displays the Inputs pane).
3. Click … to browse to the location of the MFL file to be imported. Select the file and click Open.
This will populate the File path in the PIPESIM interface with the location of the fluid file you just
selected.
4. Click OK.
The MFL file will be imported.
5. Double-click the row of the newly imported fluid in the Fluids tab of the Fluid Manager to
visualize the fluid composition and phase envelope. Click Close twice to exit the Fluid
Manager and continue with the model.

252
PIPESIM User Guide
Note:
• An alternative workflow for Step 5 (if the fluid was created from the Inputs pane) is to
expand the Fluids lists in the Inputs pane and double-click the fluid you just created to view
its details. Click Close to exit and continue with the model.
• The EOS and viscosity models used for the simulation are the equivalent PIPESIM options
and may differ from the ones chosen in the Multiflash interface. Refer to the Availability of
Multiflash models in PIPESIM using the MFL fluid file option (p.246) section for additional
details.
6. Repeat Steps 2-5 to import additional existing MFL files into the workspace OR create new MFL
files by following steps 2-5 in the Creating/Defining a new MFL fluid (p.238) topic.
7. Click the Fluid mapping tab in the Fluid manager and map all the wells and sources in the
workspace to the defined MFL fluid files.
For more information, see Ensuring consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network
model (p.246).
Related links:
3.5.2 View wax or asphaltene curves on phase envelopes

Waxes are complex mixtures of solid hydrocarbons that freeze (solidify) out of crude oils if the
temperature is low enough - below the critical wax deposition temperature. They are formed from
normal paraffins (n-paraffins) and isoparaffins and naphthenes, if present.
Asphaltenes are defined as the fraction of crude oil that is insoluble in n-alkanes (for example, n-
heptane or n-pentane) but soluble in aromatic solvents such as benzene and toluene. They are
extremely complex mixtures whose molecular structure is difficult to determine because the
molecules tend to stick together in solution. They do not have a specific chemical formula but are
generally made up of large rings of aromatic molecules consisting of carbon, hydrogen, sulfur,
oxygen and nitrogen.
The Wax precipitation line and Asphaltene precipitation envelope can only be visualized in
PIPESIM using Multiflash MFL fluid files. The requirements for displaying these precipitation lines
on the PIPESIM phase envelope are outlined below.

253
PIPESIM User Guide
Requirements for display of wax precipitation line on phase envelope

• The Coutinho model for the precipitation of the Wax phase must be used in conjunction with the
RKSA equation of state for the phase equilibria of the other phases (This is done by choosing
Waxes or Combined Solids in the Model set when defining the fluid in Multiflash).
• Composition of Live Oil or Stock Tank Oil from a gas chromatography analysis, entered under
Select > PVT Lab. Input (if measured n-paraffin distribution is not available) or Select > PVT
Input with n-paraffin (if measured n-paraffin distribution is available).
• The wax content must be provided in Multiflash when defining the fluid using any one of the
following options:
• Enter a lab-measured n-paraffin distribution under Select > PVT Input with n-paraffin(Most
accurate and recommended
• Enter a Total Wax content under Select > PVT Lab. Input. In this case, the n-paraffin
distribution will be estimated by Multiflash based on the provided total wax content using the
Coutinho & Daridon method
• Check the box Estimate Wax Content under Select > PVT Lab. Input. Multiflash will
estimate both the total wax content and the n-paraffin distribution. The wax content will be
estimated empirically and the n-paraffin distribution will be estimated using the Coutinho &
Daridon method (Least accurate and not recommended).
• Optional Tuning Data for improving wax prediction accuracy
• Measured Bubble Point(s) (under Tools » Matching » Bubble Point / GOR in Multiflash
• Measured Wax Appearance Temperatures at corresponding pressures (under Tools >
Matching > Wax Phase in Multiflash).
• Measured amounts of precipitated wax at corresponding pressures and temperatures (under
Tools > Matching > Wax Phase in Multiflash)
Requirements for display of asphaltene precipitation envelope on phase

envelope
• The version of the RKSA equation of state that includes association terms for Asphaltene-
Asplatene and Asphaltene-Resin interactions must be defined (This is done by choosing
Asphaltenes or Combined Solids in the Model set when defining the fluid in Multiflash).
• Composition of Live Oil or Stock Tank Oil from a gas chromatography analysis, entered under
Select > PVT Lab. Input (for asphaltene precipitation only) or Select > PVT Input with n-
paraffin (for both asphaltene and wax precipitation, if measured n-paraffin distribution is
available for the wax).
• The amount of asphaltene in the oil and the ratio of resins to asphaltene, using any one of the
following options in Multiflash:
• Lab-measured, complete SARA analysis for example, Amount of Saturates, Aromatics,
Resins and Asphaltenes (Most accurate and recommended).
• Amount of Resins and Asphaltenes, as measured in the lab

254
PIPESIM User Guide
• Check the box Estimate RA (Resin-Asphaltene ratio) under Select > PVT Lab. Input or
Select > PVT Input with n-paraffin. Checking this box will cause Multiflash to estimate the
resin-asphaltene ratio using proprietary methods. (Least accurate and not recommended).
• Optional Tuning Data for improving asphaltene prediction accuracy
• Measured Bubble Point(s) (under Tools > Matching > Bubble Point / GOR in Multiflash)
• All of the following (if available) under Tools > Matching > Asphaltene Phase in
Multiflash):
• Measured Asphaltene Onset Pressures for Live Oil, ideally at two different temperatures
(Most accurate, recommended)
• Measured Amount of n-Heptane required for the Onset of Asphaltene precipitation for the
Dead Oil (Most accurate, recommended in addition to (Measured Asphaltene Onset
Pressures for Live Oil) if available)
• Reservoir pressure and temperature (Least accurate, should be provided if (i) and (ii) are
not available).
Use MFL files with wax and asphaltene phases

Once the MFL fluid file has been created to meet the Requirements for Display of Wax
Precipitation Line on Phase Envelope or Requirements for Display of Asphaltene Precipitation
Envelope on Phase Envelope, you may incorporate it in your PIPESIM workspace by following the
steps in any of the following workflows; Create/define a new MFL fluid (p.238), Import existing MFL
fluid file (p.238), and Edit a MFL fluid file (p.238), which will also guide you on how to visualize the
phase envelope, equation of state and viscosity model in the PIPESIM interface. You can also
report and plot the following wax and asphaltene system and profile variables after adding them to
the report template under Home » Simulation » Output variables:
• Wax formation temperature (profile): This is the wax precipitation temperature along the profile.
• Wax sub-cooling delta temperature (profile): This is the wax precipitation temperature minus the
fluid temperature along the profile. A negative wax sub-cooling delta temperature indicates that
the fluid is warmer than the wax formation temperature and there is no risk of forming wax.
Conversely, a positive value indicates there is tendency for wax to form at that location.
• Maximum wax subcooling temperature difference (system): This is the maximum value of the
wax sub-cooling delta temperature and pinpoints the location in the entire system that is at the
greatest risk of forming wax, if it is a positive value.
• Asphaltene formation temperature (profile): This is the asphaltene precipitation temperature
along the profile.
Related links:
3.5.3 Edit a MFL fluid file

in the model.

255
PIPESIM User Guide

2. If the MFL fluid you want to edit already exists in the workspace, use either of the following
options to edit it and jump to step 5:
• In the Fluids tab of the Fluid manager double-click the row of the fluid you want to edit in
the Fluids list.
• Expand the Fluids list in the Inputs pane and double-click the fluid you want to edit. ( This
applies only if a PIPESIM layout is chosen which displays the Inputs pane).
3. If the MFL fluid you want to edit does not already exist in the PIPESIM workspace, browse to
the location of the MFL file by using either of the options below and continue with step 4.
• Launch the Fluid manager and click New (+) on the Fluids tab.
• Right-click Fluids in the Inputs pane and click New...
4. Click … to browse to the location of the MFL file to be edited. Select the file and click Open.
This will populate the File path in the PIPESIM interface with the location of the fluid file you just
selected.
5. Click Edit to launch the Multiflash interface and modify the fluid as desired.
6. When the editing is complete, you have two options for saving the updated MFL file in the
Multiflash interface:
• Save as: This option is used to save the file to a different name and/or a different location. If
you save the file with the same name and to the same location, this is equivalent to the
Save option (below). Saving the file with a different name or to a different location will
update the File path in the PIPESIM interface when you close the Multiflash interface. If you
edit a pre-existing MFL fluid in your workspace and save the updated MFL file with a
different name and/or to a different location with this option, the File path in PIPESIM will be
updated once you close the Multiflash interface, and the updated MFL file will overwrite the
pre-existing PIPESIM fluid and the fluid name will be changed to match the updated MFL file
name. The phase envelope, models and composition may change in the PIPESIM interface
to reflect the changes you made. If there was no pre-existing fluid in your workspace, then
the edited MFL file will be imported as a new fluid into PIPESIM.
• Save: This option is used when you want to make changes to the fluid defined in an MFL file
but retain the same MFL file name and file location. If you edit a pre-existing MFL fluid in
your workspace and save the updated MFL file with this option, when you close the
Multiflash interface, the File path in PIPESIM will remain unchanged but the updated MFL
file will overwrite the pre-existing PIPESIM fluid and the phase envelope, displayed models
and composition may change depending on your modifications. If there was no pre-existing
fluid in your workspace, then the edited MFL file will be imported as a new fluid into
PIPESIM.
7. Click Close or OK.

256
PIPESIM User Guide
For more information, see Ensure consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network
model (p.246).
Related links:
3.5.4 Availability of Multiflash models in PIPESIM using the MFL file fluid
mode option
Multiflash is a 3rd party flash package that enables full phase thermodynamic modeling of
multiphase fluids and solids using standard and state-of-the-art models. Multiflash incorporates an
extensive suite of equations of state for advanced flashes and viscosity, interfacial tension and
thermal conductivity models for the prediction of transport properties. Multiflash enables flashes
that can result in up to 7 separate phases simultaneously including gas, liquid, water, ice, hydrates,
wax and asphaltene.
PIPESIM supports the ability to map a single MFL file to a workspace or multiple MFL files to
different wells and sources in a single workspace. When a single MFL file is mapped in the
PIPESIM workspace, all the information in the MFL file including the defined models (equation of
state, viscosity, thermal conductivity, surface tension, etc.) and any tuning that was done to match
experimental data, will be honored (used) by PIPESIM during the simulation. Refer to the tables
below for details on the Multiflash models currently supported by PIPESIM and the defaults used
when the selected Multiflash options are unavailable.
When multiple MFL files are mapped in the same workspace, it is important to use the
PROCOPTIONS (p.905) keyword to designate one of the MFL files as the 'master' file. This will
ensure that the models defined in the master MFL file i.e. equation of state, models for viscosity,
thermal conductivity, surface tension, etc.; in addition to any tuning done to match experimental
data in this master MFL file, are applied to all the MFL files in the workspace and used by PIPESIM
during the simulation. The simulation will proceed using all the information in the master MFL file
applied to all the MFL files in the workspace; with the only exception being the unique molar
composition of the individual MFL files, which PIPESIM will correctly incorporate in the simulation.
If none of the MFL files is designated as the master with the PROCOPTIONS keyword, PIPESIM
will arbitrarily choose one of them as the master MFL file and apply the models and tuned data in
it, to all MFL files in the workspace for the simulation.
If multiple MFL files must be mapped to a single PIPESIM workspace, care must be taken to
ensure that the models and components are consistent across all MFL files. Refer to the section
Ensure consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network model (p.246), for more
details.

257
PIPESIM User Guide
Mapping of Multiflash equations of state to the PIPESIM equivalents

PIPESIM?
RKS Yes 3-parameter Soave-Redlich-Kwong (1972)*
RKS (Advanced) Yes 3-parameter Soave-Redlich-Kwong (1972)*
RKSA (Infochem) Yes 3-parameter Soave-Redlich-Kwong (1972) with
NRTL mixing rule
PR Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson (1976)*
PR (Advanced) Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson (1976)
PR78 Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson Corrected (1978)*
PR78 (Advanced) Yes 3-parameter Peng-Robinson Corrected (1978)
CPA-Infochem Yes Cubic Plus Association (CPA)
RKS API Version No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PSRK No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PSRK-NRTL No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
ZJ EoS No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
RKS-HVP No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PR-HVP No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
*PIPESIM automatically upgrades the Multiflash model to this option.
Table 3.10: Cubic Equations of State

PIPESIM?
BWRS Yes Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling (BWRS)
LK No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
LKP No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
PC-SAFT No Problem: Not reading MFL file with this EOS
currently

258
PIPESIM User Guide

PIPESIM?
Simplified PC-SAFT No Problem: Not reading MFL file with this EOS
currently
Table 3.11: Non-Cubic Equations of State

PIPESIM?
CSMA Yes Multi-reference fluid corresponding states
(CSMA)
Steam tables (IAPWS-95) Yes Problem: Not reading MFL file with this EOS
currently
GERG-2008 No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
GERG-2008 (Infochem) No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
CO2 high accuracy model No **defaults to 3-parameter Peng-Robinson
(1976)
Table 3.12: Corresponding States models (CSMA)
Mapping of Multiflash transport models to the PIPESIM equivalents
Note: The Multiflash option to include Diffusion coefficients in the transport model calculations
(viscosity, thermal conductivity and surface tension) is currently not supported by PIPESIM.

Pedersen Yes Pedersen
Pedersen + Twu Yes Pedersen or Pedersen & Twu
LBC Yes Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
SuperTRAPP Yes SuperTRAPP
Mixing rules No **defaults to Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
None **defaults to Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
Table 3.13: Viscosity models

MCS Yes Macleod-Sugden 1-phase

259
PIPESIM User Guide

Sutton Yes Sutton
LGST No **defaults to Macleod-Sugden
Mixing rules No **defaults to Macleod-Sugden
None No **defaults to Macleod-Sugden
Table 3.14: Surface Tension models

CLS Yes CLS
SuperTRAPP No **default to CLS
Mixing rules No **default to CLS
Table 3.15: Thermal conductivity
Related links:
3.5.5 Multiflash phases supported in PIPESIM

PIPESIM currently supports the following Multiflash phases:
• Gas
• Liquid
• Water
• Hydrate I
• Hydrate II
• Wax
• Asphaltene
Related links:
3.6 Display phase envelopes for compositional fluid or mfl

file
When working with compositional fluid models or models with MFL files, you will find it helpful to
display phase envelopes and fluid properties associated with individual sources and wells using
the Phase envelope viewer. This is useful for quickly inspecting fluid models associated with

260
PIPESIM User Guide
source branches (wells, generic sources, and junction sources). Additionally, after running a
simulation task, you may view the simulated flowing pressure/temperature profile superimposed on
a phase envelope for each source branch.
1. On the Home tab, in the Data group, click Fluid manager, and then select MFL file or
Compositional.
2. Create the fluids and map them to the wells and/or sources in your model.
Refer to the topic Define compositional fluids (p.238) for more details on creating compositional
fluids, and Create/define a new MFL fluid (p.238) for more details on creating MFL files.
3. Exit the Fluid manager.
Note: Phase envelopes can be displayed for individual fluids or for the objects (wells and sources)
that the fluids are mapped to.
4. Display the phase envelop by performing one of the following actions:

• If you are in the Well perspective and have only one well in your workspace, on the Home
tab, in the Viewers and results group, and click Phase envelope.
You do not have to select the well object to display the phase envelope for the fluid mapped
to it. The fluid's phase envelope displays because in the well perspective, when there is only
1 well, it is already pre-selected.
• To display a phase envelope for a source with an associated compositional or MFL fluid,
click on the source, and then on the Home tab, in the Viewers and results group, click
Phase envelope.
• If you have multiple wells in the workspace, to display the phase envelope for another well
that is not currently selected, navigate to the well of interest, ensure that it has a mapped
fluid, and then on the Home tab, in the Viewers and results group, click Phase envelope.
The Phase envelope displays for the fluid associated with the selected well.
Note:
• For compositional fluids, the flash results are displayed in addition to the phase envelope.
The flash results consist of the flash conditions (pressure and temperature) and the fluid
properties, phase compositions, and phase properties at those flash conditions. By default,
the flash conditions are taken as the inlet pressure and temperature for the network. You
can change the flash conditions to any other values and the fluid will be flashed and the
results updated for the new conditions.
• For MFL fluid files, only the phase envelope is displayed. It is currently not possible to flash
MFL files within the PIPESIM* interface, so no flash results can be viewed.
5. Optional: To flash a fluid at other conditions of interest, and display the detailed fluid property
information, perform one of the following actions. The flash results will be automatically re-
calculated and updated. The option to flash a fluid is currently only available for compositional
fluids.

261
PIPESIM User Guide
• On the Phase envelope tab, under Condition, enter a Pressure and Temperature.
• In the phase envelope, right-click a point of interest, and then click Flash at this point.
6. Optional: In the Network perspective, to view a phase envelope for objects that have fluids
mapped to them (such as wells and sources), in the Inputs pane, select the well or source that
has the mapped fluid, then on the Home tab, in the Viewers and results group, click Phase
envelope.
The fluid's phase envelope displays along with the flash conditions (pressure and temperature),
and the fluid properties, phase compositions, and properties at those flash conditions.
7. Optional: In the Network perspective, to view a phase envelope for a fluid, in the Inputs pane,
select the fluid, then on the Home tab, in the Viewers and results group, click Phase envelope.
Note:
• For multilayer wells with multiple fluids assigned to the layers, the phase envelope viewer
displays a series of tabs, one for each fluid mapped to each separate completion.
• The Phase envelope button is inactive (appears grey) if you do not have a fluid selected, or
if the well or source you selected does not have a mapped fluid.
8. To display the simulated flowing pressure or temperature profile in the phase envelope,
complete the process of building the network and run a simulation task, and then perform one
of the following actions depending on the selected Perspective.
• In the Network perspective, click the well or source object, and then on the Home tab, in the
Viewers and results group, click Phase envelope.
• In the Well perspective, navigate to the well, and then on the Home tab, in the Viewers and
results group, click Phase envelope.
The phase envelope display with the simulated flowing pressure-temperature (PT) profile
from the last simulation task superimposed on it.
Note:
• The simulated flowing pressure-temperature (PT) profile can be viewed on the phase
envelope only when a well or source is selected; not flowlines or any other objects.
• For simulation tasks involving sensitivities, only the final sensitivity case is displayed on the
phase envelope.
Tip: When viewing results of a network simulation on a phase envelope, dock the phase envelope
on one side of the screen by dragging the Phase envelope tab to position it beside the network
diagram. Click the individual well and source objects on the network diagram or Inputs pane and
view the updated phase envelope and superimposed simulated flowing pressure temperature
profile for each selected object.

262
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
3.7 Override fluid phase ratios

It is common that single fluid models are available that represent production from multiple fluid
sources. For example, a fluid analysis may be performed based on fluid obtained from the
separator which is supplied with fluids from multiple sources, each having different phase ratios. In
these situations, you may define a single fluid to be mapped to multiple fluid sources and override
the phase ratios for the individual sources.
• By overriding phase ratios on the Fluid mapping tab in the Fluid manager
• By defining phase ratio overrides in the fluid tabs associated with individual fluid sources
Fluid override options vary by object type. All the objects with a fluid model assigned allow
overriding the phase ratio. However, with vertical completions, you may define a phase-ratio
versus draw down table to account for coning effects of water and gas phases. For all cases, the
impact is specific to that object only. That is, other objects sharing the same fluid are not affected.
1. On the property pane of a specific object, select one of the following override methods:
Object Type Override Options

Vertical completion Click the appropriate override method:
None
no override option is selected
Phase ratio
override phase ratios
Define coning
define a coning table (vertical completion only)
Horizontal completion Click the appropriate override method:
None
no override option is selected
Phase ratio
override phase ratios
Gas lift injection No phase ratio override is applicable.
Generic source Select the Override phase ratios check box to enter phase ratio
Junction source overrides.
Fluid Injection
2. If you selected Override phase ratios, perform the following actions:
a. Select one of the following values for gas phase:
• GLR

263
PIPESIM User Guide
• GOR
• LGR
• OGR
b. Select one of the following ratio types and override values:
• Watercut
• GWR
• WGR
3. If you selected Define coning, complete the following coning data:
a. Enter the Coned gas specific gravity value.
b. Enter the coning table values for each flowrate row you want to enter.
Note:
• Phase ratio overrides associated with fluid sources may also be overridden by simulation tasks.
Overriding phase ratios using simulation tasks will not affect the overrides associated with
model objects unless you click Publish Boundary Conditions on the network simulation
Parameters tab.
• Overriding phase ratios for black oil fluids will also affect fluid properties that are dependent on
phase ratios, such as viscosity. Also, remember that any calibrations previously made based on
the original phase ratio will still be applied, but may no longer be valid. For compositional fluids,
overriding the phase ratio will result in an adjusted molar composition, similar to the tuning
operation used in the fluid definition.
• Phase ratios cannot be overridden when MFL files or PVT files are used in the workspace.
Related links:
3.8 Import a PVT file

A pressure-volume temperature (PVT) file describes the behavior of a fluid through the properties
table written in a specific file format supported by PIPESIM*. You can define only one PVT fluid per
model due to the limitation that tabular fluid representations cannot be accurately mixed. The PVT
file that you import is saved in a PIPESIM model until you import a different PVT file.
1. On the Home tab, click Fluid manager and select PVT file from the option list as the global
fluid option in the model.
• On the Home tab, click Fluid manager, and then on the Fluids tab, click New (+).
• On the Inputs pane, right-click Fluids, and then click New.

264
PIPESIM User Guide
3. On the new fluid window, click ... to import and browse to the location of the PVT file and then
click Open. Click OK to finish the import.
The new fluid is displayed in the Fluid manager window and on the Inputs pane.
4. If you want to view the current associations for the fluid, click the Fluid mapping tab.
Note: Models imported from PIPESIM 2012 or previous versions may contain several PVT file
associations: one each at the global, branch, and completion levels, so long as compositional
specifications are present. PIPESIM 2013 only allows a single PVT file to be associated with a
model.
Only the PVT file associated at the global level in the imported model is associated with models
that you import.
Related links:
Convert black oil models into compositional models using Multiflash for PIPESIM (p.265)
Run a perforation design to generate productivity results (Productivity workflow) (p.397)
Install a new completion (p.427)
Update an existing completion (p.431)
3.9 Convert black oil models into compositional models

using Multiflash for PIPESIM
The black oil analysis within Multiflash allows you to create an ‘equivalent’ compositional fluid from
very limited black oil input.
Knowledge of the type of reservoir fluid to be modeled is one of the main requirements to run any
PIPESIM simulation. PIPESIM supports the modeling of black oil fluids, compositional fluids
through the PIPESIM interface or using Multiflash MFL files, and the use of fluid property tables
using PVT files.
The black oil model is used for simulating dry gas, water, and non-volatile oils, while the
compositional model is best suited to light oils, condensates, and natural gases. In general,
compositional models are more accurate but require a lot more data, which is often unavailable.
This is the reason why most simulations rely on more simplified black oil models. Additionally, even
when both black oil and compositional fluid data are available, as a ‘first-pass,’ fluids are often
modeled as black oils to quickly get preliminary results for analysis. Typically, this is followed by
more detailed compositional fluid modeling. Compositional fluid modeling is also required to be
able to analyze certain flow assurance issues such as wax, hydrates, asphaltenes and scale.
For instances where it is important to model the fluid as a compositional fluid, but only black oil
data is available, Multiflash provides a useful feature to create an ‘equivalent’ compositional fluid
from basic black oil data. This approach should be used with caution as the equivalent
compositional fluid may not be a true representation of the black oil fluid. It is strongly
recommended that where possible, accurate compositional data be obtained by doing proper PVT

265
PIPESIM User Guide
laboratory analysis of a representative sample of the fluid to be simulated. However, the steps to
exploit this useful Multiflash feature are outlined below.
1. Launch PIPESIM and create a new well-centric or network-centric workspace or open an
existing one.
2. On the Home tab, go to Fluid manager and select MFL file from the dropdown list.
3. Click the green plus sign to add a row for a new MFL fluid.
4. Select New to launch the Multiflash interface, as below.
5. On the File tab, select Save as to save your Multiflash MFL file. Save periodically during the
rest of this procedure.
6. On the Home tab, select Units and choose the units of your preference (for example, All in
Imperial) and click OK.
7. Define the model set.
a. On the Models tab, select one of the options from the Models Quick Load group. For
example, if you choose the RKSA option, this will define the RKSA equation of state, as well

266
PIPESIM User Guide
as internally select default options for the transport properties including Viscosity, Thermal
conductivity and Surface tension; and define the fluid phases. The default options selected
are not immediately apparent. To see the options available and individually configure them,
go to the next step.
b. To individually configure the equation of state, transport properties and phases based on
your preference, click Select model.
c. Select the model category e.g. Cubic EoS, on the left and select your preferred options for
equation of state or thermodynamic model, viscosity, thermal conductivity, surface tension
and phases.
d. Click Define model.
A message displays indicating that the models and phases were successfully defined.
e. Click OK to exit the window.
Note: Refer to the Multiflash Help for details on the thermodynamic models and transport property
options.
8. Characterize an equivalent compositional fluid from black oil input.

a. On the Fluid tab, select PVT analysis.
b. Select Black oil as the analysis type on the left.
c. Enter the available black oil data in the Main input for Black Oil Analysis section of the
window.
It is strongly recommended that you enter the Watson K-factor value if it is available or can be
calculated, even though it is listed as optional. This is because it is used to determine the
molecular weight of the stock tank liquid for the created, equivalent compositional fluid.
Note: You can also enter values for the Gas Analysis, SARA Analysis (STO) and Total Wax
Content, if available and applicable.
9. Configure the pseudocomponent settings for the fluid characterization.

a. In the Pseudocomponents section, select from the dropdown list, the carbon number you
would like the pseudocomponent distribution to start from, when the fluid characterization is
done.
b. Similarly, select the number of pseudocomponents you would like the equivalent
compositional fluid to be characterized to.
An example of the data entry is displayed below. In this example, the characterized fluid will
have 15 pseudocomponents starting from C6.

267
PIPESIM User Guide
10. Click Do Characterization.

A message displays indicating that the characterization was successful.
11. Click OK to exit the window.
12.A fluid composition for the characterized fluid will be generated on the left of the main window,
as below.

268
PIPESIM User Guide
The fluid characterization process generates an equivalent compositional fluid consisting of

pure components and 15 pseudocomponents or petroleum fractions, starting from C6. The
pseudocomponents generated depend on the settings configured in steps 9a-b. In general, the
more data you supply for the fluid characterization, the closer the match between the created
compositional fluid, and the original black oil fluid.
13. View the phase envelope for the fluid by clicking Phase envelope or Automatic Phase
envelope on the Home ribbon.

269
PIPESIM User Guide
14. Exit the phase envelope.

15. Save the MFL file again and close the Multiflash interface. This takes you back to the PIPESIM
interface and displays the path to the MFL file you just created.
16. Click OK to import the MFL file to your workspace.
17. You may continue building the model and run the PIPESIM simulations of interest.
Related links:
Import a PVT file (p.264)

270
PIPESIM User Guide
4
Run simulations
You can perform nodal analysis, reservoir simulation, and use other analytical tools (such as
pressure/temperature (P/T) profiles, VFP tables, and network simulation) to calculate the
distribution of flowrates, temperatures, and pressures throughout the system and plan new field
developments.
Related links:
Configure simulation settings (p.271)
Run a P/T profile (p.302)
Run a nodal analysis (p.309)
Create a VFP table (p.324)
Run a network simulation (p.286)
Run a system analysis (p.318)
Run gas lift diagnostics (p.373)
Design an ESP (p.340)
Manage results (p.450)
Run a perforation design (p.39)
4.1 Configure simulation settings

You can configure simulation settings for the entire network or well model. You can also apply local
overrides to some simulation settings, such as flow correlation and heat transfer options.
Note: The fields for each tab may be slightly different depending on whether you are using
network-centric mode or well-centric mode.
1. On the Home tab, in the Settings group, click Simulation.
Run simulations
271
PIPESIM User Guide
2. Click the tab for the category that you want to configure.
• To configure flow correlation and heat transfer options for the entire network or well model,
click Use global.
• To configure flow correlation and heat transfer options for individual flowlines, risers and
wells, click Use local. The content changes to a tabular format.
4. To change the global default values for the entire branch, update the Default row as necessary.
5. Click Close.
Related links:
Flow correlation properties (p.272)
Heat transfer properties (p.275)
Erosion/corrosion properties (p.275)
Output variables properties (p.278)
Override the default value in specific rows (p.285)
4.1.1 Flow correlation properties

Use the Flow correlations tab to set flow correlation options at the global level or at local levels. If
you set flow correlation options at the local level, the source, correlation, friction factor, and holdup
factor appear as individual columns for both vertical and horizontal geometries.
Name Name of the individual wellbore, flowline, or riser for which the setting is
applied. This field appears only when the Use local branch correlation option
is selected. This value cannot be changed.
• Source Defines the global, vertical, or horizontal source of the correlation.
• Vertical Baker Jardine
multiphase Developed by Schlumberger (originally Baker Jardine) and tested
source extensively. This value is the default source selection.
• Horizontal Neotec
multiphase
The Neotec flow correlations were developed by a company called Neotec
source
based in Calgary. Neotec was formed in 1972 by Gary Gregory and Khalid
Aziz, professors at the University of Calgary who specialized in Multiphase
Flow research. Neotec developed several software applications used in
the oil and gas industry, including WELLFLO, PIPEFLO and FORGAS. In
2010, Neotec was acquired by SPT Group and became part of
Schlumberger in 2012 when Schlumberger acquired SPT Group.
Run simulations
272
PIPESIM User Guide
OLGAS
Based in large part on data from the SINTEF multiphase flow laboratory
near Trondheim, Norway. The OLGA-S mechanistic models are applicable
for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase
model considers gas-liquid flow. The 3-phase model considers gas-oil-
water flow.
TUFFP Unified
Developed by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects (TUFFP) research
consortium. The models are applicable for all inclination angles, pipe
diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase model considers gas-liquid
flow. The 3-phase model considers gas-oil-water pipe flow.
LedaFlow PM
The LedaFlow Point Model is the steady-state version of the transient
model developed by SINTEF in collaboration with Total and
ConocoPhillips and commercialized by Kongsberg. It is applicable for all
inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase model
considers gas-liquid flow. The 3-phase model considers gas-oil-water flow.
Tulsa (Legacy 1989)
Developed by the University of Tulsa, USA, and last modified by Professor
Jim Brill, February 1989. The code is usually of academic quality and may
return errors. No modifications have been made to accommodate extreme
conditions or ensure mathematical stability. These models are included
only for the purpose of validating calculations against publications and
other simulators using the same code. Not recommended for general use.
• Correlation Select the appropriate global, vertical, or horizontal correlation method.
• Vertical Available correlation methods depend on the source selected.
multiphase
correlation
• Horizontal
multiphase
correlation
• Friction factor One of two factors used to adjust the friction and holdup prediction of a
• Vertical particular flow correlation. The default value is 1.
multiphase
friction factor Note: A linear relationship is used for the friction pressure drop. For example,
if you set the friction factor to 0.5, the friction element of pressure drop
• Horizontal
computed by the correlation is halved. The two factors are used often as
multiphase
calibration factors when a good match to field data cannot be obtained by any
friction factor
other method. Changing these factors affects the results. Use with caution.
• Holdup factor One of two factors used to adjust the friction and holdup prediction of a
particular flow correlation. The default value is 1.
Run simulations
273
PIPESIM User Guide
• Vertical
multiphase Note: A non-linear relationship is used to calculate the liquid holdup from the
holdup factor value predicted by the correlation. The default value is 1. The two factors are
• Horizontal used often as calibration factors when a good match to field data cannot be
multiphase obtained by any other method. Changing these factors affects the results. Use
holdup factor with caution.
Swap angle Angle at which vertical correlations are used instead of horizontal correlations.
For angles less than or equal to 45°, horizontal correlations are used. For
angles greater than 45°, vertical correlations are used.
Single phase Based on the flow correlation selected, you may need to enter a drag factor,
correlation flow efficiency, or C factor (see SP factor). Single phase flow is assumed if the
liquid volume fraction is less than .0001 or greater than .99.
SP factor Single phase factor that represents a drag factor, flow efficiency, or C factor for
the single phase correlation selected.
Override Select this check box to override global values set for the branch. Appears
only when the Use local branch correlation option is selected.
For more information, see Flow regimes (p.482), Horizontal multiphase flow correlations (p.486),
Vertical multiphase flow correlations (p.492), Friction and holdup factors (p.499), Single phase
flow correlations (p.500), and Swap angle (p.504).
Run simulations
274
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
4.1.2 Heat transfer properties

Use the Heat transfer tab to specify the heat transfer calculation methods used for flowlines.
Name Name of the individual wellbore, flowline, or riser for which the setting is applied.
This field appears only when the Use local heat transfer option is selected.
Pipe burial Model to use for pipeline heat transfer calculations. The calculations use the
method burial configuration of the pipe (fully buried, partially buried, or fully exposed) and
give different U-value results based on the model selected. The options, in
decreasing order of accuracy, are:
• 2009 Method (default)
• 2000 Method
• 1983 Method
All options produce identical results for a fully exposed pipeline, but the results
are different for a fully buried or partially buried pipe.
Inside film Inside film coefficient (IFC) calculation model for heat loss calculations.
coefficient • Kaminsky model
method
• Kreith combined Reynolds number model (default)
U-value Multiplier for user entered U-values in heat loss calculations. This is particularly
multiplier useful when performing a temperature match. The default value is 1.
Override Select this check box to override global values set for the branch. Appears only
when the Use local heat transfer option is selected.
Note: When this check box is selected, you can change the Pipe burial method,
Inside file coefficient method, and U-value multiplier.
For more information, see 2009 Method (p.687), 1983 Method (p.688), Internal fluid film heat
transfer coefficient (p.644), Kreith (p.647), and Kaminsky (p.650).
Related links:
4.1.3 Erosion/corrosion properties

PIPESIM has several models to predict erosion and corrosion in the piping system and report
important parameters for analysis and prediction.
The following results are reported:
Run simulations
275
PIPESIM User Guide
• Erosion velocity - The maximum allowable erosion velocity.

• Erosion velocity ratio – A ratio of fluid velocity over maximum allowable erosion velocity
predicted by selected erosion model. Values greater than 1.0 indicate erosion risk.
• Corrosion rate (where applicable) – An indication of the rate of loss of pipe material due to
corrosion.
These parameters are calculated at every segment/node and reported under node result tables
and profile plots. Also, branch level maximum values are reported under branch result tables and
system plots.
Follow these steps to model erosion and corrosion in PIPESIM:
1. Go to the Home » Data group » Simulation settings.
2. In the Simulation dialog box, select the Erosion/Corrosion tab and specify related properties
as indicated in the tables below.
Erosion model By default, API 14 E is selected with its default properties. The API 14 E is
the only available option through the user interface. This model comes from
the American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice 14 E, to predict
solid free erosion only.
Erosion velocity Also referred as C-factor and is applicable to API 14 E model. This constant
constant depends on several factors like pipe material, fluid properties, etc. and can
(dimensional) be user defined.
The default value of erosion velocity constant is: 122 kg 0.5m -0.5s-1(SI units);
100 lbm 0.5ft -0.5s-1 (field units)
Table 4.1: Erosion options
Corrosion The only available option is the de Waard (1995) corrosion model that calculates
model corrosion rate caused by presence of CO 2 dissolved in water.
The concentration of CO 2 and Water are obtained from the fluid properties
definition (black oil, compositional or ScaleChem generated PVT files). If either
CO 2 or Water is absent in the fluid, the resulting corrosion rate reported will be
zero.
Corrosion A multiplier, C c, to correct for inhibitor efficiency, or to match the field data.
efficiency
Actual pH: Options are to specify or calculate. When calculated, PIPESIM will calculate the
pH as a function of CO 2 fugacity and temperature. If the pH is known, it may be
specified. However, this is recommended only for analysis over a narrow range of
pressures and temperatures.
Table 4.2: Corrosion options
Run simulations
276
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
4.1.4 Environmental properties

Use the Environmental tab to define environmental conditions used for heat transfer calculations.
By setting the conditions to be defined in one place, the information can be used by multiple wells,
flowlines, and pipes. Optionally, for individual flowlines and risers, this data may be ignored by
selecting override environmental data for individual flowline and riser objects.
General data
Atmospheric pressure displays the read-only air pressure value that is used to convert from
gauge to absolute pressures.
Air data
Temperature Air temperature. This value is used for heat transfer calculations for flowlines in a
land environment. Because the ambient temperature is constant for the system
being modeled in most cases, setting a global value allows you to conveniently
model the effects across the system. This value may be easily modified to
account for diurnal or seasonal variations in air temperature to analyze the
effects on pipeline hydraulics and compressor performance.
Wind speed Velocity of air used for heat transfer calculations. The default value (8.43 ft/s or
2.57 m/s) equals 5 knots (which, in meteorological terms, corresponds to a light
breeze).
Atmospheric The atmospheric pressure specification is used when converting from gauge to
pressure absolute units. The default value is based on standard conditions.
Changing the reference atmospheric pressure is most commonly performed
when modeling low pressure gas systems at higher elevations, and pressure
data is entered in gauge units.
Note: If you change the atmospheric pressure and your chosen display unit for
pressure is in gauge units, all pressure entries will update to reflect this change. If
your chosen display unit is in absolute units, all pressure entries will remain
unchanged.
Soil data
Soil type One of various soil types may be selected if the soil conductivity is not known.
The default value, Moist Clay, is common in onshore fields. However, for
offshore applications, the conductivity is generally higher and a type such as
Run simulations
277
PIPESIM User Guide
Deepwater Gulf of Mexico may be more appropriate. This data has been
compiled from various sources by Neotec.
Soil Representative soil conductivity for each soil type you chose. The property may
conductivity be specified by setting the Soil type to User defined.
Metocean data
Metocean data is used to define seawater temperature and current velocity as a function of depth.
For cases where measured data is not available, typical data representing several active
development areas are provided based on the analysis of data published by several publically
available sources including NORA, SIMORC, and NOAA. Seawater temperature data near the
surface (down to about 100 feet below sea level) will vary by season, and the typical data
presented tends to represent winter conditions which are more conservative for flow assurance
studies involving solids predictions.
Note: The data presented represent typical conditions. Actual conditions may vary significantly.
Therefore, for detailed flow assurance studies, specify measured data as User defined.
Related links:
4.1.5 Output variables properties

The Output variables tab contains various lists of simulation output variables. Each selected
variable is available to be tabulated or plotted after running a simulation.
Note: Each template has specific associated variables. You can create a new report template with
different variables.
Report Select a report template from the available report templates. PIPESIM provides
template the following predefined templates:
• Gas Field
• Well Performance
• Flow Assurance
• Large Network
Run simulations
278
PIPESIM User Guide
Note: Predefined templates cannot be deleted or renamed.
Selected Click to toggle the display between selected variables and the complete list of all
variables associated with the report template.
Profile Click to display a list of profile variables associated with the report template.
System Click to display a list of system variables associated with the report template.
unlabeled Type part or all of the variable name to find a specific variable in the complete
search field list.
Related links:
Manage output variable report templates (p.279)
Manage output variable report templates

Each report template has specific output variables associated with it. If you want to customize the
output variables list and reuse the customized list later in other workspaces, you can create a new
report template by copying a predefined template and updating its properties, delete a template, or
rename a template.
1. On the Home tab, in the Data group, click Simulation settings, and then click the Output
variables tab.
2. In the Report template list, select the template that most closely resembles the one you want
to create, and then click Clone.
3. Enter a New name for the template (you can use spaces and special characters), and then
click OK.
4. Click Selected until the display shows the complete list of all variables associated with the
report template.
5. Click either Profile or System to display the appropriate variable types in the list.
6. Perform the following actions:
• To add a variable to the template, select the check box in its Selected column.
• To remove a selected variable, clear the check box.
7. To rename a custom report template, perform the following actions:
a. In the Report template list, select the custom template, and then click Rename.
b. Enter a New name for the template (you can use spaces and special characters), and then
click OK.
Note: You cannot rename a default report template.
8. To rename a custom report template, perform the following actions:
Run simulations
279
PIPESIM User Guide
a. In the Report template list, select the custom template, and then click Delete.
b. To confirm that you want to delete the template, click Yes.
Note: You cannot delete a default report template.
9. Click Close.
Related links:
4.1.6 Advanced properties

Use the Advanced tab to configure additional calculation options and specify keyword input.
Pipe segmentation data
Max. report Optionally specify the maximum report interval length to generate profile
interval length results at shorter distances along the pipe segment.
Print computation Select this check box to report the results for each computation segment.
segment results This report may include very short pipe segments if required for the solution
to converge or the option to use additional short segments across nodes, if
selected.
Computation You may specify the number of computational segments the engine uses per
segments per report interval. This action is similar to specifying the Max. computation
report interval segment length; however, the specification is relative to the report interval
(either automatically set by the engine or user specified) rather than explicit.
This option may be helpful when analyzing results associated with specific
pipe segments that are reported.
Max. computation Initial maximum segment length to be used by the program. Regardless of
segment length pipe length, data is calculated for sections of the given length. For example, if
you specify 100ft, data is calculated for 10 segments of a 1000-foot-long pipe,
or for 200 segments of a 20,000-foot-long pipe.
To obtain a converged solution, PIPESIM may further subdivide the segment.
Additional short Adds short (one foot) segments to the start and end of each pipe section.
segments across This feature ensures the reported fluid properties and flowrates are calculated
nodes at an almost identical temperature and pressure to that reported at the node.
(In fact, the fluid properties are calculated at segment average pressure and
temperature.)
Enabling this parameter minimizes the discrepancies caused by this
mismatch; however, this does effect run time. To disable this feature, clear
the check box.
Run simulations
280
PIPESIM User Guide
Compositional flashing options

Compositional flashing options control the way fluid properties are calculated. It is only applicable
to compositional fluid models and MFL files.
The options are:
• Temperature energy balance: - Controls the Temperature-Energy Balance. These values are
used to maintain the temperature/enthalpy/entropy balance of the fluid.
• Physical properties: - Controls determination of transport Physical properties (PP). These are
the values required to perform the multiphase fluid flow and heat transfer calculations, and
include phase volume fractions, densities, viscosities, heat capacities and surface tensions.
Note: The Interpolate, Hybrid, and Rigorous parameters apply to Temperature energy
balance and Physical properties options.
Properties Description
Interpolate This option uses interpolation between physical properties determined by in a
predefined grid of temperature and pressure points.
Hybrid This option is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that
properties will change more rapidly when close to a phase boundary.
Interpolation is performed whenever the grid points comprising a rectangle all
show the presence of the same phases. For example, if all four (4) points in the
rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no water, then you can assume the
rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the hydrocarbon phase
envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however one, two, or three of the
points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon dew point line crosses the
rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
Rigorous This option enables rigorous flash calculations at all times. This will produce the
most accurate results, through will significantly increase runtimes.
Note: For those requiring more accuracy, the recommended setting (that is the greatest
increase in accuracy for the smallest effect on performance) is Physical Properties = Hybrid
and Temperature Energy balance = Interpolate. This option typically increases runtime 2-4
fold compared to using the Interpolate option, though this depends on the number of flash
calculations required in the proximity of phase boundaries.
• In most simulations, for every PP flash that is performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes,
thus the TH flashes will have the greatest effect on speed and run time. The inaccuracies of
TH interpolated flashes are usually minimal.
• The speed impact of each choice will obviously depend on the composition, and the phase
behavior in the PT region of interest. As a rough guide, taking the base case as
interpolation, swapping just the PP flashes to "rigorous" will multiply your run time by about
4. With TH flashes also "rigorous", run time will probably increase at least 20 fold. Use of the
'compromise' choices will be faster.
Run simulations
281
PIPESIM User Guide
• Single component system: - Controls "one component" behavior. Can be enabled or

disabled by you through following options. If enabled, the fluid is assumed to consist entirely
of one component molecule, and hence does not exhibit a classical phase envelope when
graphed on axes of pressure versus temperature. Salient Examples of such systems are
pure water or steam, pure Carbon Dioxide, pure methane, and so on. One component, if
enabled, forces the engine to use enthalpy as master and force a pressure-enthalpy flash.
• Yes - One component system is enabled.
• No - One component system is disabled.
• Auto - If the composition contains a single component, 'One component' behavior is
automatically enabled. If multiple components are detected, 'One component' behavior is
disabled.
Note: When Modeling single component systems, you should set both flash options to
Hybrid or Rigorous.
Network solver options

The Network Solver options control the method and accuracy of the network simulation.
Network Automatic
solver For this release, the Standard method will always be applied if "Automatic" is
method selected. In future releases, the option will automatically select the most
appropriate method to use.
Standard
The default method used to perform the network simulation. In general, this
method will be the fastest but may fail to find a solution for some models and
settings. If this method fails to find a solution, use the Advanced method.
Advanced
This method uses additional information and calculations to perform the
network simulation and; therefore, will be more reliable but may require more
simulation time. If the Standard method fails to find a solution, consider using
this method.
Use well This option enables the generation of well performance curves (outlet pressure vs.
curves flowrate) which are used in place of full well simulation during the network
simulation. After the network simulation converges, a final solve then performed to
generate detailed well results. Well curves are often useful in cases where wells
are unstable (switch on and off in subsequent iterations), and therefore generally
require fewer iterations to solve the network. Wells that tend to be shut-in may
have a better chance of remaining open when well curves are used. Additionally,
for repeated network simulations using the same well boundary conditions, use of
well curves may reduce the run time.
Options available include:
Run simulations
282
PIPESIM User Guide
No (default)
Solve full pressure/temperature traverse for well models for each network
iteration.
Yes (as required)
Generate well performance curves prior to each network simulation only if
boundary conditions have been updated.
Yes (always)
Always generate well performance curves prior to each network simulation.
Max. number The solver will iterate solution values until the model converges within the user
of network specified tolerance. If the solver has not found a solution within the specified
solver tolerance after reaching the max. number of network solver iterations, the
iterations simulation will stop and the best unconverged solution will be reported.
Note: A larger number will not reduce performance when a solution is possible. It
will however take longer to return the best unconverged result when no solution
can be found.
Network The average relative error of the pressure and mass flow rate equations used to
solution determine the converged solution. These equations are different between the
tolerance Standard and Advanced methods and have been scaled to give approximately
similar errors in average node properties when converged to the same tolerance.
Max number The maximum number of iterations in which to try and determine a solution. The
of network simulation will stop after this number of iterations unless the tolerance has been
solver met. The default value is 100.
iterations
Network This option defines the solution tolerance for the network solver. A network has
solution converged when the pressure balance and mass balance at each node is within
tolerance the specified tolerance. The calculated pressure at each branch entering and
leaving a node is averaged. The default value is .01 (1%).
Miscellaneous options
Thermal This feature specifies how the engine will determine the ambient temperature as
interpolation a function of distance along pipe segments. For well deviation surveys, flowlines
method and risers, the ambient temperature for each specified survey point (distance or
depth) will be interpolated from the ambient temperatures specified in the Heat
Transfer data. However, the calculation engine often adds shorter computation
segments during the simulation run. These options apply only to these
computation segments, as opposed to user-defined survey points.
Run simulations
283
PIPESIM User Guide
Interpolate
This method will interpolate the value for ambient temperature for all
computation segments. Interpolate is the default method for newly-created
models and is generally recommended.
Step function
This method will use the ambient temperature from the previously-defined
survey point for all computation segments until the next defined survey point
is used. This method is discouraged, particularly for wells, as this is not
often representative of actual conditions.
Automatic
This method will interpolate the value for ambient temperature for
computation segments associated with wells, and apply a step-function to
determine the ambient temperature value for flowlines and risers. This
method is the default method for models imported from PIPESIM* 2012 and
previous versions as it mostly closely replicates (though does not exactly
match) the default methods for these versions.
Note: The Step-function method in PIPESIM 2012 and previous versions

behaves differently than the method in PIPESIM 2013 and later versions. With
PIPESIM 2012, the step-function method would reset the ambient temperature
only when a new temperature is specified in the ambient temperature table.
Starting with PIPESIM 2013, the ambient temperature reset at the end of the
user-defined (that is. not computation) segment to the interpolated value based
on the specified ambient temperatures.
For example, for a pipe with five survey points and differing ambient
temperatures specified at the start and end of the pipe, PIPESIM 2012 will only
use the first value for the entire length of the pipe, whereas PIPESIM 2013 will
interpolate the ambient temperature and apply it to these five points.
ESP slippage ESP Slippage factor is used to de-rate pump operating speed. The specified
factor operating frequency (Hz) of the motor in the ESP property pane is multiplied by
this factor and converted to display operating speed of the pump (c/min).
The default value of .9722 will result in a speed of 3500 RPM for a frequency of
60 Hz.
Ignore This option allows you to turn-off validation errors that prevent invalid entries in
validation fields so that you can run a simulation task.
errors
Engine keywords
Engine keywords can be used to generate PIPESIM input language for the engine/solver for
features that may not have exposed to the user interface or to perform advanced tasks.
Run simulations
284
PIPESIM User Guide
There are 2 ways to enter keywords in PIPESIM:

1. Using the Engine Keywords Tool (EKT) object: An engine keyword tool (p.72) can be inserted
as a downhole object or as part of the surface network, to enter keywords at a specific location
in the production or injection path.
2. Under the general simulation settings: Keywords can be entered in the Engine keywords
section under Home » Simulation settings » Advanced. Keywords can be entered as single
branch or network keywords, as described below.
Single When entering keywords in this area, the PIPESIM engine uses the associated
branch values specified for all single branches in the network.
keywords Single branch keywords applies to well or branch while performing single branch
tasks like PT Profile, Nodal Analysis, System Analysis, VFP Table, etc.
Network Network keyword is applied to the whole network and impacts results of Network
keywords Simulation.
(top) Location of the keyword depends on the type of keywords used. Network (top)
keywords are written at the top of the *.TNT file and therefore should be
information that are not part of a typical *.TNT file, else the keywords will be
replaced by information found elsewhere. Example could be keyword that prints
additional heat transfer output data, etc.
Note: It is recommended not to use both single branch and network keywords in
the same model.
Network Network (bottom) keywords are written at the bottom of the *.TNT file and therefore
keywords works by overriding any existing keyword that may be present elsewhere in the
(bottom) *.TNT file. Example could be using Steam keywords that overrides any fluid
information we may have in the *TNT file.
For more information, see keywords from the PIPESIM engine keyword tool (EKT) (p.751) and
COMPOSITION: compositional fluid specification (p.898).
Related links:
4.1.7 Override the default value in specific rows

You can override simulation settings in specific rows.
Note: The fields for each tab may be slightly different depending on whether you are using
network-centric mode or well-centric mode.
Run simulations
285
PIPESIM User Guide
1. On the Home tab, in the Data group, click Simulation.

2. Click the tab for the category that you want to configure.
3. In the row that you want to change, select the Override check box.
Many of the properties that could not be changed become editable. For example, you can
select a different Vertical multiphase correlation method.
4. Change the values in that row as necessary.
5. To reapply global simulation settings to specific rows, in the row that you want to change, clear
the check box in the Override column.
All the values for that row return to the global setting.
6. To reapply global simulation settings to all rows, perform the following actions:
a. Click Apply global flow correlations to all or Apply global heat transfer options to all.
b. To apply the default settings to all branches, overwriting any values previously entered, click
Yes.
7. Click Close.
Related links:
Flow correlation properties (p.272)
Heat transfer properties (p.275)
4.1.8 Enter sensitivity ranges

You can use the Sensitivity range dialog box to quickly enter a range of sensitivity values for
the parameter that you are sensitizing on in the task simulation.
4.2 Run a network simulation

Run a network simulation to calculate the distribution of flowrates, temperatures, and pressures,
and other properties throughout the system. You can run the simulation using either known or
hypothetical conditions. To run a network simulation, your network must include at least one
source and one sink or injection well.
1. Verify that the network includes at least one source (well, source, or junction treated as source)
and one sink or injection well.
2. Review and resolve any error messages in the Message center pane or in the Validation
pane.
3. On the Home tab, in the Settings group, click Simulation to configure the simulation settings.
• On the Home tab, in the Tasks group, click Network simulation.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click Network simulation.
Run simulations
286
PIPESIM User Guide
5. Click the Parameters tab.

6. Enter a name and description for the simulation.
7. On the Parameters tab, review or edit the simulation parameters in the data table.
8. In the Boundary conditions check area, perform the following actions:
a. If you want to refresh the table with data from the network objects, click Populate from
model. If you want to update the network objects with the current data in table, click Update
back to model.
b. If the Required number of boundary conditions does not match the Supplied number
(indicating that boundary conditions are missing or incorrect), review and resolve the error
messages that appear. When all required boundary conditions are supplied, the Run and
Restart buttons become available.
9. Perform one of the following actions to simulate the model:
• Click Run.
The simulation uses the initial pressure and flowrate estimates. Use this option if this is the
initial run, or if wells have been added to the model since the last run.
• Click Restart.
The simulation uses the final results from the last run for the initial guess, shortening the
simulation time. You can use this option if no wells, flowlines, or any other objects have
been added to the model since the last run.
Note: When the simulation is complete, the Run and Restart buttons become available again.
10. Perform one of the following actions to simulate the model:

• If the simulation fails, review and resolve the error messages in the Message center pane
or in the status bar.
• If the simulation completed successfully, view the simulation results by clicking the Node/
Branch results tab or the Profile results tab.
Note: If you want to access simulation results from multiple studies in one place, view the
results from the Results tab.
Important: If you must terminate a simulation in progress, always click Stop. Do not simply close
the Network simulation window. Clicking Stop deletes temporary files and frees disk space.
Related links:
Boundary conditions (p.288)
Rate constraints (p.288)
Node/branch results tab properties - network simulation (p.291)
Run simulations
287
PIPESIM User Guide
Profile results tab properties - network simulation (p.293)
4.2.1 Boundary conditions

Network simulation requires boundary conditions to be provided at boundary objects so that the
system can be solved. Boundary conditions are configured differently depending on the simulation
task.
Sources
Wells, completions within wells (in a multilayer well, each completion is a separate
source), source objects, and injection points
Sinks
Sink objects and injection wells
1. The total number of P/Q specifications - pressure (P), flowrate (Q), or PQ table - must equal the
number of boundary nodes.
2. All sources must have at least one specified boundary condition, which can be P, Q, P+Q, or
PQ table. EXCEPTION: All injection points must have at least one specified boundary condition,
which must be flowrate (Q).
3. All sources must have temperature specified.
4. Sinks can have pressure or flowrate data.
5. Sources and sinks can have two boundary conditions, as long as rule 1 is satisfied.
6. At least one supplied boundary condition within the model must be pressure (or a PQ curve). In
other words, you cannot specify flowrate as the condition for all boundary nodes.
Differences between single-layer and multi-layer wells in network simulation

Single-layer well
You can specify pressure or flowrate. The algorithm used by PIPESIM calculates reservoir
pressure if you specify flowrate. Flowrate is calculated if you specify pressure.
Multi-layer well
You must specify the pressure at each layer (completion). PIPESIM will calculate the
producing rates for the individual completions.
Network simulation properties

In the Parameters tab, enter the data used to run a network simulation on the selected network.
To run the simulation, the data must meet the boundary conditions requirements.
Object filter In the Object filter list, select one of the following filters to display only objects
of the selected type:
• All
• Well
Run simulations
288
PIPESIM User Guide
• Source
• Sink
• Injection point
• Zone
Location of Click the appropriate option to specify whether to include the well models in the
Well Boundary simulation run.
Conditions Reservoir
When selected, the Completion and Zone columns appear in the table and
boundary conditions are associated with the reservoir.
Surface
When selected, boundary conditions are associated with the wellstream
outlet conditions defined for the production wells or the wellstream inlet
conditions defined for the injection wells. The Completion and Zone
columns disappear because they pertain only to reservoir conditions.
Override By default, this check box is not selected, and the simulation uses the phase
phase ratios ratios from the assigned fluids. If you want to modify the phase ratios for the
simulation, select the check box, and then enter the new values in the following
columns:
• Gas ratio type
• Gas ratio
• Water ratio type
• Water ratio
Table 4.3: Parameters Tab Properties - Global Settings
Name Displays the name of the network object.
Type Displays the type of network object. Network simulations may include wells,
sources, injection points, sinks, and zones.
Completion Displays the name of the well completion. This column appears when you
select Reservoir as the Well BC location.
Active Select this check box to include the network object in the simulation scenario.
To exclude the object from the simulation, clear the check box.
Pressure (P) You can enter the pressure for the network object. If you do not specify a value,
it will be calculated.
Rate type If entering a flowrate, select the type of material in the flowline (Liquid, Gas, or
Mass).
Flowrate (Q) You can enter the flowrate for the network object. If you do not specify a value,
it will be calculated.
Run simulations
289
PIPESIM User Guide
Temperature You must enter the inlet temperature associated with the fluid source.
Zone Displays zone parameters, which are optionally used to consolidate boundary
conditions for any completions defined within the zone. This column appears
when you select Reservoir as the Well BC location.
PQ Table When this check box is selected, the simulation uses the PQ curve defined for
the source. If you select the check box and the source has no defined PQ
curve, an error will appear in the Boundary conditions check area.
Gas ratio type If you selected the Override phase ratios check box, select one of the
following gas ratio types:
GLR
Gas/liquid ratio
GOR
Gas/oil ratio
LGR
Liquid/gas ratio
OGR
Oil/gas ratio
Gas ratio Enter the ratio value and units of measure for the selected Gas ratio type.
Water ratio type If you selected the Override phase ratios check box, select one of the
following water ratio types:
GWR
Gas/Water Ratio
WGR
Water/Gas Ratio
Watercut
Ratio of water present in an overall liquid volume
Water ratio Enter the ratio value and units of measure for the selected Water ratio type.
Table 4.4: Parameters Tab Properties - Table Columns
Synching boundary conditions with the model

The first time you open the Network simulation window, boundary condition data (such as
reservoir and sink pressures) are automatically retrieved from the model. If you make changes to
the model (for example, to run other simulation studies) and want to refresh the data in the
Boundary Conditions tab, click Reset boundary conditions. If you want to update model
properties with the boundary conditions defined in the network simulation task, click Publish
boundary conditions.
Run simulations
290
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
4.2.2 Rate constraints

To enter maximum flowrate constraints:
1. Select the Rate Constraint tab in the network simulation task.
2. Specify the maximum flowrate limits for the desired rate types and branches.
Branches that have flowrate constraints defined must contain one or more chokes. When the
network solves, the constraint is met by adjusting the bean size of the choke. If more than one
choke is present in the branch, the most downstream choke in the branch is adjusted. If you want
the choke to only be active if the flow rate exceeds the limit, fully open the choke in the model.
One or more flowrates constraints may be defined for each branch for the following rate types:
• Gas
• Liquid
• Oil
• Water
• Mass
For cases where multiple rate constraints are defined, the most limiting constraint is applied such
that all constraints are honored. If the flow rate is below the defined limit, the choke operates at its
specified bean size (for example, no adjustment is applied). If the flow rate is above the limit, the
bean size is decreased by the engine such that the flow rate limit is achieved. The modified bean
size is reported in the output results.
You may not specify flowrate constraints associated with rate specified objects as these values will
create a conflict.
Note: Over constraining the network may prevent the simulation from converging on a result. For
models containing separators, certain configurations will effectively rate specify the streams
leaving the separator and therefore cannot be rate specified themselves. More specifically, do not
place rate constraints on a sink or injection well downstream of the discontinuous stream leaving
the separator. Additionally, for separators that have a pressure specification, do not place a rate
constraint on any sink or injection well downstream of the separator.
Related links:
4.2.3 Node/branch results tab properties - network simulation

The Node/Branch results tab displays network simulation results in two modes: Node or Branch.
Run simulations
291
PIPESIM User Guide
Node
In this display mode, objects with no associated physical dimensions are shown. These
include sources, sinks, equipment, and completions. You can show all equipment types, or
filter the results table to show only a specific equipment type (such as chokes,
compressors, or pumps). You can also select the columns to be shown in the results table.
After selecting the desired columns, you can expand the rows to display additional
information about particular objects.
Display mode Click Node or Branch to switch the display mode.
Equipment In the list, click All to show all network objects in the results
filter table, or click a single equipment type for display.
Select Click this button to open the Select columns window where
columns you can select the columns to be shown in the results table.
The available properties correspond to the system variables
selected in the Output variables tab (located in the
Simulation settings window).
Expand all Click on a row in the results table to show detailed results for
certain individual objects.
Click the Expand all button to show or hide detailed information
for all network objects in the results table.
For example, a compressor row expands to display data such
as pressure difference and differential temperature. (Some
object types, such as junctions, sinks and wellheads, do not
expand.)
Branch
In this display mode, individual branches that comprise various objects (such as flowlines
and equipment) may be shown. Branch results are used to display the inlet and outlet
conditions of the branch, as well as minimum and maximum values. You can also select
the columns to be shown in the results table.
Display Click Node or Branch to switch the display mode.
mode
Select Click this button to open the Select columns window where
columns you can select the columns to be shown in the results table.
Note: For branch results, the available columns are fixed and
not associated with the results configurable from the Output
variables tab (located in the Simulation settings window).
Run simulations
292
PIPESIM User Guide
Related links:
4.2.4 Profile results tab properties - network simulation

The Profile results tab displays the results as a function of distance along a specific network
branch in tabular or graphical format.
You can also filter the results table to show specific branches (for example, typing well will display
all branches that contain well in the name).
You can also select the columns to be shown in the results table. After selecting the desired
columns, you can expand the rows to display additional information about particular network
objects.
Show grid Click this option to display the simulation profile results in a table.
Show plot Click this option to display the simulation profile results as a graphical plot. If you
want to view plots for all branches at once, click the upper-left hand corner of the
table. Double-click the plot to configure it.
Select Click this button to open the Select columns window, where you can select the
columns columns to be shown in the results table.
The available properties correspond to the profile variables selected in the Output
variables tab (located in the Simulation settings window).
Expand all Click this button to show or hide detailed information for all network objects in the
results table.
For example, a compressor row expands to display data such as pressure
difference and power required. (Some object types, such as junctions, sinks and
wellheads, do not expand.)
Note: Click on a row in the results table to show detailed results for certain
individual objects.
Related links:
4.2.5 Improve network simulation performance

In general, Performance is a trade-off between speed and accuracy. When dealing with models
that are taking too long to run, there are several approaches that can be taken to improve the
network speed. Improving the speed may compromise the accuracy and you may need to reverse
some of the changes outlined in the approaches below to restore the appropriate level of accuracy,
once you have fine-tuned the model.
Run simulations
293
PIPESIM User Guide
Approaches for improving network speed

• Approach 1: Change the PIPESIM execution and reporting settings
• Approach 2: Make high and low-level changes to the PIPESIM model
Note: After using the approaches above to improve the network speed and fine-tune the model, it
is important that you carefully reverse some/all of the changes, in order to regain accuracy.
Approach 1: Change the PIPESIM execution and reporting settings

The options outlined below do not modify the model but attempt to reduce the engine workload to
improve speed. You may need to do some trial-and-error to determine which one, or combination
of options below, is best for speeding up your model.
Option Details
Increase the no. PIPESIM has introduced a parallelized network solver where you can run
of allocated network simulations with multiple processors to increase the speed.
processors How do I do this?
Go to Workspace » Options » Advanced » Engine Options. Increase the
Number of processes for Network engine. For more information, see
Advanced Options (p.8).
License You may experience delays in running simulations if a network license server
checkout at is being used due to communication latency. By checking out available
startup licenses at startup, network latency is eliminated allowing faster performance
when running simulation tasks or editing compositional fluid models.
How do I do this?
Go to Workspace » Options » Advanced, then under LICENSING, select At
startup (faster).
Decrease the Decreasing the verbosity level will reduce the amount of output displayed in the
verbosity level engine console during simulation.
How do I do this?
Go to Workspace » Options » Advanced » Engine Options. Decrease the
Network verbosity level. 0 is minimal, 1 is default and higher generally
increases the amount of output.
Restart the Restarting a network simulation, as opposed to running it, increases the
simulation network speed. This option uses a restart file to initialize the simulation by
using the results from the previous simulation as estimates for the unknown
variables. This is most effective when you are running many similar scenarios
with only small variations. If minor changes (such as flow rates, pipe
dimensions, etc.) have been made to a network, use the Restart function.
However, if structural changes (such as new pipes, wells deleted, inactive
branches reactivated, etc.) have been made, run the model from scratch, by
clicking Run instead.
Run simulations
294
PIPESIM User Guide
Option Details
How do I do this?
If you have not run the model at all, launch the Network simulation task and run
it to generate restart files. To run subsequent simulations faster, after minor
changes have been made to the model as described above, launch the
Network simulation task and click Restart. For more information, see Restart
Simulation (p.299).
Do not display Choosing not to display the engine console window during the simulation
engine console should increase the network speed.
window How do I do this?
Go to Workspace » Options » Advanced » Engine Options. Uncheck the
Show engine console box.
Do not generate Choosing not to generate the engine output files after the simulation is
engine output complete, should increase the network speed.
files How do I do this?
Go to Workspace » Options » Advanced » Engine Options. Uncheck the
Show engine output files box.
Run the model How do I do this?
locally Save the model to the local PC rather than to a Network drive. This will
eliminate any potential network delays. Also use a local PIPESIM license file,
rather than a network license, if possible.
Approach 2: Make high and low-level changes to the PIPESIM model

The following options will increase the simulation speed, but may sacrifice accuracy in doing so.
Use these options to fine-tune the model, but reverse them to get more accuracy, once this is
done. You may need to do some trial-and-error to determine which one, or combination of options
below, is best for speeding up your model. The high level changes are easy to reverse, the low
level changes might require a bit more work to reverse.
Option Level of Details

Change
Increase the High and PIPESIM solves the network using an iterative approach. It stops the
Tolerance Low calculation when the iterative error is less than a given tolerance.
Thus, the specified tolerance has a direct impact on the number of
iterations and the time taken to achieve an acceptable result. The
default tolerance is 1% (0.01). Increasing the tolerance will increase
the speed but will compromise the accuracy.
Note: The results with tolerance greater than 2% are not

recommended.
How do I do this?
Run simulations
295
PIPESIM User Guide

Change
For a network model, go to Home » Simulation settings »
Advanced Engine Options and enter a higher value for the
Network solution tolerance.
Specify flow Low Specifying flow rates as the boundary conditions at inlet nodes
rate as the inlet usually result in faster performance.
boundary How do I do this?
conditions
For a network model, launch the Network simulation task. Delete
the pressure boundary conditions for inlet nodes (wells and sources)
and enter flow rate boundary conditions instead, but ensure that at
least 1 pressure is specified to satisfy the criteria required for the
network to solve.
Change the High and The Moody friction factor is calculated as part of the multiphase
calculation Low pressure drop calculations (vertical and horizontal) when the single
method for the phase flow correlation option is set to Moody or Cullender-Smith. For
Moody friction more information, see Single Phase Flow Correlations. (p.500)
factor to There are three (3) options for the Moody fiction factor calculation. In
Approximate increasing order of accuracy, they are: Approximate/Moody (refer to
the Moody paper (p.738)), Explicit/Sonnad (refer to the Sonnad and
Goudar paper) (p.738), and Implicit/Iterative (Colebrook-White
equation or Moody chart). The default option is Explicit. Changing the
calculation method to Approximate will increase the speed but
decrease the accuracy.
How do I do this?
Go to Home » Simulation settings » Advanced » Engine
Keywords and enter the following lines of PIPESIM keywords in the
Network keywords (bottom)field. This will add the keywords to the
bottom of the engine network file.
OVERRIDE
SPHASE MOODYCALC = APPROXIMATE
Decrease the High and PIPESIM divides pipes into shorter segment lengths to do the
number of Low pressure drop calculations. The greater the pipe segmentation, the
segments per better the accuracy, but the slower the performance. The default
pipe length number of segments per pipe length in PIPESIM is 4. Decreasing
this number to 3, for example, will speed up the simulation.
Decreasing it to 2 will further speed up the simulation, but the
answers may become more unstable. Furthermore, if when using the
user-specified number of segments, PIPESIM encounters
discontinuities, it will override the specification and this will ultimately
slow down the simulation.
How do I do this?
Run simulations
296
PIPESIM User Guide

Change
Go to Home » Simulation settings » Advance » Pipe
Segmentation Data and enter a value less than the default value of
4, in the Computation segments per report intervalfield.
For the single branch model, enter a value less than the default value
of 4, in the Segments per pipe length field.
For the network model, click the Option Control tab and follow the
previous step.
Deactivate the High PIPESIM calculates fluid properties at the average pressure and
option to temperature for each segment. The average values for these
include short properties may not be representative for the beginning and end of
segments the segment (for example, the nodes), particularly if the segment is
long and there are significant changes in pressure and temperature
across it. PIPESIM resolves this by adding short 1 foot segments at
both ends of each segment, by default. This will ensure accurate
values at the start and end of each node are reported, but it also
slows down the engine. If you are not interested in the exact values
at the beginning and end of each node, or are performing some fine
tuning, you may deactivate this option to speed up the simulation.
How do I do this?
Go to Home » Simulation settings » Advanced » Pipe
Segmentation Data, and uncheck the box Additional short
segments across nodes.
Changing the High In the Compositional fluid mode, the fluid is flashed for the
Flashing temperature energy balance and for the calculation of the fluid
Settings physical properties, but depending on the option chosen in PIPESIM,
this can be a computationally expensive process. To speed up the
network simulation, change the flashing option for Temperature
energy balance and Physical properties, to a faster, but less
accurate one, as described below.
PIPESIM has 3 flashing options for Temperature energy balance
and Physical properties. In order of increasing accuracy but
decreasing network speed, they are:
• Interpolate (fastest): This option uses interpolation between
physical properties determined by a predefined grid of
temperature and pressure points.
• Hybrid: This is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which
assumes that properties will change more rapidly when close to a
phase boundary. Interpolation is performed whenever the grid
points comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the same
phases. For example, if all 4 points in the rectangle have some oil,
some gas, and no water, then we assume the rectangle lies
entirely within the 2-phase region of the hydrocarbon phase
Run simulations
297
PIPESIM User Guide

Change
envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however one, two or
three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon dew
point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
• Rigorous (slowest): Interpolation never occurs. Properties are
obtained by rigorous flashing at every required pressure and
temperature. This is the slowest, but the most accurate method.
For more information, see Advanced Properties (p.8).
How do I do this?
Go to Home » Simulation settings » Advanced » Compositional
Flashing Options, and select the fastest flashing option for
Temperature energy balance and Physical properties.
Switch to a Low Generally, black oil fluid models run faster than compositional fluid
Black Oil fluid models. However, Compositional fluid models are more accurate,
model particularly when dealing with gas condensates and volatile oils. If
your model does not undergo a lot of compositional or phase
changes and/or the difference in results between running the
simulation in black oil vs. compositional mode is minimal, then it
would be reasonable to run the model in black oil mode to speed up
the simulation.
How do I do this?
If you have a compositional fluid model, change it to Black Oil by
selecting Home » Fluid manager. Select Black Oil from the option
list and enter the required values.
Changing Flow Low Changing flow correlations is another way of speeding up
Correlations simulations, but this option should be used with great caution. Flow
correlations should be chosen based on their ability to reproduce/
match the flowing pressures, holdups, etc. observed in the field.
However, if different correlations yield similar (accurate) results but
varying simulation speeds, then it would be reasonable to choose the
flow correlation that yields the fastest simulation speed. The native
Baker Jardine and Neotec package is the fastest. 3rd party flow
correlations, specifically the 3-phase mechanistic flow correlations,
will typically be the slowest, but most accurate.
How do I do this?
Change the flow correlations under Home » Simulation settings »
Flow correlations.
Avoid loops in Low Loops in the network require PIPESIM to do extra checks to ensure
the network overall consistency (for example, elevation difference). Avoid loops
topology where possible to speed up the performance.
Run simulations
298
PIPESIM User Guide

Change
Follow these High and • Try to split the model into smaller networks, which can be solved
general tips Low independently, before linking them all together. (This helps in
troubleshooting the model.)
• When first building the model, leave out equipment such as
compressors and separators, then incorporate them one at a time.
(Again, this helps troubleshooting.)
• When using a compressor or pump, define it initially with a Delta P
rather than with a power or user curve. It can be changed as
required later. Also, avoid defining a compressor with discharge
pressure, as this can have the effect of over-constraining a
system.
• Try to avoid unnecessary nodes in a network, as this increases
the computing time required to solve it.
• Avoid dangling or redundant branches.
• If the sinks are flow rate specified, and are consistently being
reported at atmospheric pressure upon simulation (see messages
in engine window), try changing the boundary condition to an
outlet pressure to see what flow rate can be achieved.
• When first attempting to solve a large network, increase the
convergence tolerance to 5% and check the validity of the results.
The tolerance can later be reduced and the model restarted.
• If a branch appears to be behaving strangely, or is ill-conditioned,
split it into smaller segments. This aids troubleshooting and
improves continuity along the branch.
• If the program crashes part way through an iteration with "file
open" or "macopen" errors, this is due to the processor running
out of memory. Simply restart the model; the program will start
from where it left off. Use the PIPESIM toolbar Restart button in
this case.
• Try to avoid having long flowlines and risers in the same branch.
Related links:
Reversing the changes made to PIPESIM models to optimize their simulation performance (p.301)
PIPESIM differences from other simulators (p.300)
Restart simulation (p.299)
Restart simulation
The restart information is only available between simulation runs in the same application session,
or if you save the model. The results in the restart file can be reused as initial estimates for a
Run simulations
299
PIPESIM User Guide
subsequent simulation, if the new simulation is launched by restarting the model (as opposed to
rerunning it).
The restart file results will be used as initial estimates, instead of the PIPESIM default estimates
(Production/injection well static pressure = 5,000 psia, Source/sink/node pressure = 1,000 psia &
Flowrate = 10 lb/s). Restarting the model is a good option for increasing network speed, and is
most effective when you are running many similar scenarios with only small variations. If minor
changes (such as flow rates, pipe dimensions etc.) have been made to a network, use the Restart
function. However, if structural changes (such as new pipes, wells deleted, inactive branches
reactivated, etc.) have been made, run the model from scratch, instead. For more information, see
Improve network simulation performance (p.293).
To restart a model:
1. Launch the Network simulation task and click Run to run the simulation (if the model has not
been run at all).
2. Make the minor changes you want to make to the model, as described above.
3. Re-launch the Network simulation task and click Restart to initialize the simulation.
The Restart function, by default, restarts the model by keeping all deactivated branches
permanently deactivated. So if you deactivate a branch, run the model, and reactivate the branch
again before using the Restart function, the deactivated branch remains deactivated.
Note:
• If the model has changed significantly (for example, a well was added, or a branch or node
was de- or re-activated), the use of the Restart function may actually slow down the
simulation.
• If minor changes have been made to a network (for example, a flow rate or pipe dimension
change), Restart should provide a faster convergence than a normal run.
• The Restart function is particularly useful to continue a simulation from where it left off, in
the following scenarios: if the program crashes part way through an iteration; if the model
does not solve in the allowed number of iterations; or if the run is terminated prematurely by
user intervention or some other system error.
Related links:
PIPESIM differences from other simulators

It is important to understand how PIPESIM works in order to assess its performance in comparison
with other network simulators, which may or may not appear to be faster. PIPESIM differs from
other simulators in the following ways:
• PIPESIM is a multiphase flow simulator. Other simulators with apparent faster performance
may be single-phase simulators, which cannot capture important multiphase effects.
• PIPESIM can model general networks including loops and crossovers. Other simulators may be
limited to solving gathering networks only (multiple sources, 1 sink).
Run simulations
300
PIPESIM User Guide
• PIPESIM does not require (good) initial estimates at each source and sink, which may be a
requirement for other simulators.
• PIPESIM does not require (good) internal node estimates, which may be a requirement for
other simulators.
• The tolerance in PIPESIM may be defined differently from other simulators.
• PIPESIM performs a rigorous heat balance, which may not be the case for other simulators.
• Other simulators may have to define the fluid composition for each branch in the model at the
start of the simulation, before the flow rates are known! This is not a PIPESIM requirement.
• PIPESIM rigorously checks for network inconsistencies, for example elevation mismatches,
prior to the simulation, which is a step other simulators may skip.
• Other simulators may need to have non-return valves placed in lines to indicate the direction of
flow. This is not a PIPESIM requirement.
• PIPESIM has a strong and rigorous fluid Compositional PVT characterization supported by the
Multiflash package, which is also embedded in OLGA, allowing better alignment and transition
from steady-state to transient workflows.
• PIPESIM includes more PVT correlations for heavy oil characterization.
• PIPESIM includes a comprehensive list of flow correlations; single-phase, multiphase, empirical
and state-of-the-art mechanistic flow correlations such as the OLGA-S correlations.
• PIPESIM has more engineering tools for flow assurance analysis (hydrates, asphaltenes, wax).
• PIPESIM data matching is more rigorous as the (U value and pressure hydraulics) are
simultaneously tuned to give a more accurate thermo-hydraulic representation of the system
being modeled.
Related links:
Reversing the changes made to PIPESIM models to optimize their simulation

performance
After using the approaches above to optimize the network performance and fine-tune the PIPESIM
model, it is important that you carefully reverse some/all of the above changes in order to regain
accuracy. A subset of some (not all) of the changes that may need to be reversed are outlined
below:
• Tolerance:Restore the default tolerance of 1%. Generally, increasing the tolerance above the
default value of 1% will increase network speed but decrease accuracy. Decreasing the
tolerance to 0.1% or lower will significantly increase the simulation time.
• Moody friction factor: Change the Moody friction factor calculation method back to the default,
EXPLICIT, or the most accurate method, IMPLICIT. Do this by replacing the keyword
APPROXIMATE, which was recommended in the previous section to speed up the
performance, with EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT (Refer to the previous section for Help with entering
the keywords correctly).
• Boundary conditions: Enter the appropriate boundary conditions that are fit for purpose.
Run simulations
301
PIPESIM User Guide
• Extra one foot segments: Reactivate the option to add extra one foot segments under
Simulation settings » Advanced.
• Flashing settings:If working with a Compositional fluid, select a more accurate flashing option;
Rigorous or Hybrid. For more information, see Improving Network Simulation Performance
(p.293).
• Flow correlations:Select the flow correlations that most closely reproduce the rates,
pressures, holdups, etc. recorded in the field.
• Loops: Enter accurate and representative topology for the loops in the network.
Related links:
4.3 Run a P/T profile

Use the pressure/temperature profile (P/T profile) task to generate pressure and temperature
profiles as a function of distance or elevation along the defined single-branch flow path.
1. (Network-centric mode) On the network diagram, or in the Inputs pane, select the well or
source where the analysis will start. (Well-centric mode) No selection is required.
• On the Home tab, in the Tasks group, click P/T profile.
• In the Tasks pane, double-click P/T profile.
3. On the Parameters tab, enter the properties, including the branch endpoint, the calculated
variable, and any sensitivity variables.
4. Click Run.
To monitor simulation progress, check the message center or progress monitor.
5. View the profile results by clicking the System results tab or the Profile results tab.
Related links:
P/T profile parameters tab (p.303)
4.3.1 System results tab properties

The System results tab displays task results in two modes: Node or Branch. This tab displays the
range of calculated results when the profile includes sensitivity data. You can also select the
columns to be shown in the results table. You can also expand the rows to display additional
information for completions and equipment objects.
Node display mode properties
Show grid Click this option to display the system profile results in a table.
Run simulations
302
PIPESIM User Guide
Show plot Click this option to display the system profile results as a graphical plot.
Double-click the resulting plot to configure it.
Equipment filter In the list, click All to show all network objects in the results table, or click a
single equipment type for display.
Select columns Click this button to open the Select columns window where you can select
the columns to be shown in the results table.
Expand Click this button to show or hide detailed information for all network objects in
the results table.
For example, a compressor row expands to display data such as pressure
difference and differential temperature. (Some object types, such as junctions,
sinks, and wellheads, do not expand.)
Note: You may also click on a row in the results table to show detailed results
for certain individual objects.
unlabeled Enter part or all of the name of a case, equipment, or equipment type to filter
search field the rows to show specific cases.
Case (column) Name of the sensitivity case.
Branch display mode properties
Show grid Click this option to display the system profile results in a table.
Show plot Click this option to display the system profile results as a graphical plot.
Double-click the resulting plot to configure it.
Select columns Click this button to open the Select columns window where you can
select the columns to be shown in the results table.
unlabeled search Enter part or all of the name of a case, equipment, or equipment type to filter
field the rows to show specific cases.
Case (column) Name of the sensitivity case.
4.3.2 P/T profile parameters tab

Enter the properties for the pressure/temperature profile (P/T profile) task, including the branch
endpoint, the calculated variable, and any sensitivity variables.
General properties
In this area, enter the endpoint that defines the selected branch for the P/T Profile.
Run simulations
303
PIPESIM User Guide
Branch start The well, source, or junction (if treated as a source) selected when the task was
started. You cannot change this value.
Branch end The default value is the junction farthest from the selected Branch start. To change
the Branch end, select the endpoint of the selected branch from the list. Setting the
endpoint at an object (for example, a flowline) includes that object in the simulation.
Default profile plot properties

In this area, define the X and Y axes that will appear by default on the Profile plot tab, which
displays the results of the P/T Profile task. Double-click the resulting plot to configure it.
Elevation vs. pressure Plots the elevation change against pressure. Subsurface
elevations are expressed as negative values.
Elevation vs. temperature Plots the elevation change against temperature.
Pressure vs. total distance Plots pressure against total distance. This setting is selected
automatically for source models.
Temperature vs. total distance Plots temperature against total distance.
Calculated variable properties

In this area, specify one of three key variables (inlet pressure, outlet pressure, or flowrate) as the
calculated variable. The calculated variable is derived from the other two values.
To specify a calculated variable other than inlet pressure, outlet pressure, or flowrate, click
Custom. You can select a single custom variable related to any object within the branch being
evaluated by the P/T profile.
Inlet pressure To calculate the inlet pressure, enter both outlet pressure and any flowrate.
Outlet pressure To calculate the outlet pressure, enter both inlet pressure and any flowrate. The
inlet pressure is determined by the pressure at the start node.
Liquid flowrate Select the flowrate (liquid, gas, or mass) to be calculated. To calculate the
Gas flowrate flowrate, enter both inlet pressure and outlet pressure. The inlet pressure is
determined by the pressure at the start node.
Mass flowrate
Custom To calculate a custom variable, click Custom and then enter inlet pressure,
outlet pressure, and flowrate. The inlet pressure is determined by the pressure
at the start node.
Custom variable properties

If you want to specify inlet pressure, outlet pressure, and flowrate (all three), you must also specify
how to achieve the specified outlet pressure by defining a custom variable. A custom variable is a
user-defined variable whose value is calculated to match the specified conditions.
Run simulations
304
PIPESIM User Guide
Select an object and a variable whose value will have an effect on the system outlet pressure. For
example, in a production well model, a choke positioned at the wellhead may have Bean size as
the variable. You can select any object and variable, as long as they have an effect on the system
hydraulics.
You must specify the allowable maximum and minimum values for the variable, and the
proportionality relationship (whether an increase in the variable's value causes an increase or a
decrease in outlet pressure).
• If you select Direct, the outlet pressure is assumed to be directly proportional to the variable,
and will increase when the variable increases (for example, the choke bean diameter).
• If you select Inverse, the outlet pressure is assumed to be inversely proportional to the
variable, and will decrease when the variable increases. As an example, consider the watercut
of a black oil fluid in a production well: as watercut increases, the well's static delta pressure
increases, and therefore its outlet pressure decreases.
Run simulations
305

Pipesim: User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Pipesim: User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pipesim: User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PIPESIM

Copyright © 2017 Schlumberger. All rights reserved.

Trademarks & Service Marks

PIPESIM® is a mark of Schlumberger.

An asterisk (*) is used throughout this document to designate a mark of Schlumberger.

2 Build physical models .......................................................................................................... 52

2.1.4 Add artificial lift ............................................................................................................................... 73

3 Create or edit fluid models ................................................................................................ 228

3.5.2 View wax or asphaltene curves on phase envelopes ............................................................... 99

4 Run simulations ................................................................................................................... 271

4.5.2 System results tab properties - system analysis ..................................................................... 322

4.11.1 Launch the results viewer ........................................................................................................... 451

5 Manage model data ............................................................................................................. 458

6 Work with the GIS map ....................................................................................................... 462

7 Technical Description ......................................................................................................... 482

7.1.2 Horizontal multiphase flow correlations .................................................................................... 486

7.1.8 deWaard (1995) corrosion model .............................................................................................. 505

7.3.4 Artificial lift ..................................................................................................................................... 597

7.5.5 Liquid mixture properties ............................................................................................................. 717

8 Keyword index ...................................................................................................................... 751

8.1.10 K ..................................................................................................................................................... 753

8.3.6 OPTIONS Calculation Procedure Options (Optional) ............................................................. 765

8.5.10 IPRCRV or IFPCRV: Inflow Performance Curve ..................................................................... 819

8.6.23 SEPARATOR Separator (Optional)........................................................................................... 865

8.9.7 Multiple case and PS-PLOT ....................................................................................................... 917

9 Tutorials ................................................................................................................................. 937

10 Support ................................................................................................................................. 1057

Index ............................................................................................................................................. 1058

Navigate the interface

1.1 Workspace tab options

Navigate the interface

1.2 Workspace types

Navigate the interface

1.2.1 Network-centric workspace

Navigate the interface

1.2.2 Well-centric workspace

Navigate the interface

1.3 Workspace options

Navigate the interface

Select a standard unit system

Create a custom unit system

Navigate the interface

Import or export a custom unit system

Navigate the interface

• User profile calculations

User defined flow correlations

Register user flow correlations

Use user defined flow correlations

Navigate the interface

User defined equipment

Register user defined equipment

Use user defined equipment

Navigate the interface

User profile calculations

Register user profile plugin

Use user profile calculations

1.3.3 Advanced options

Navigate the interface